Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
User Guide
r7.1
Second Edition
This documentation and any related computer software help programs (hereinafter referred to as the
“Documentation”) is for the end user’s informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by CA at
any time.
This Documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed, modified or duplicated, in whole or in
part, without the prior written consent of CA. This Documentation is confidential and proprietary information of CA
and protected by the copyright laws of the United States and international treaties.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation for
their own internal use, and may make one copy of the related software as reasonably required for back-up and
disaster recovery purposes, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced copy.
Only authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who are bound by the provisions of the license for
the product are permitted to have access to such copies.
The right to print copies of the documentation and to make a copy of the related software is limited to the period
during which the applicable license for the Product remains in full force and effect. Should the license terminate for
any reason, it shall be the user’s responsibility to certify in writing to CA that all copies and partial copies of the
Documentation have been returned to CA or destroyed.
EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE STATED IN THE APPLICABLE LICENSE AGREEMENT, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, CA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENTATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL CA BE LIABLE TO THE END USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
LOSS OR DAMAGE, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, GOODWILL, OR LOST DATA, EVEN IF CA IS EXPRESSLY
ADVISED OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGE.
The use of any product referenced in the Documentation is governed by the end user’s applicable license
agreement.
Provided with “Restricted Rights.” Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to the
restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 12.212, 52.227-14, and 52.227-19(c)(1) - (2) and DFARS Section 252.227-
7014(b)(3), as applicable, or their successors.
All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective companies.
CA 1® MVS (CA 1)
CA Audit
Contact CA
Contact Technical Support
For online technical assistance and a complete list of locations, primary service
hours, and telephone numbers, contact Technical Support at
http://ca.com/support.
Provide Feedback
Chapter 1: Introduction
CA Dynam for VSE Products ................................................................... 1-1
CA Dynam/T Tape Management............................................................ 1-1
CA Dynam/D Disk Management ............................................................ 1-1
CA Dynam/FI File Independence ........................................................... 1-2
Common Subset Features ..................................................................... 1-2
CA Dynam Catalog and Audit Trail Files .................................................... 1-2
Data Set Control .......................................................................... 1-3
Backup, Restore, and Recover ............................................................. 1-3
Report on the Catalog ..................................................................... 1-3
Start and Deactivate CA Dynam ............................................................... 1-4
Start CA Dynam .......................................................................... 1-4
Deactivate CA Dynam ..................................................................... 1-4
CA Dynam Extended Operator Communication Facility .......................................... 1-4
Critical System Function Integrity .............................................................. 1-5
System Adapter CANCEL-DELAY Support ....................................................... 1-6
TLBL/DLBL Extensions ........................................................................ 1-6
TLBL Extensions .......................................................................... 1-6
DLBL Extensions ......................................................................... 1-12
Delete Label Option Blocks—RESET Statement................................................. 1-15
RESET Format ........................................................................... 1-16
Contents v
Modifying Retention Characteristics ....................................................... 2-10
Scratching Eligible Data Set Versions ..................................................... 2-10
Data Set Name Listing ................................................................... 2-12
Automatic Volume Recognition (AVR) ..................................................... 2-12
Using the Early Drive Release ............................................................ 2-14
Dynamic LUB Allocation .................................................................. 2-14
Mounting Tapes ......................................................................... 2-15
TLBL Statement Extensions and Format ................................................... 2-30
Tape Reel Length Specification ........................................................... 2-39
Recording Density (MODE) Specification .................................................. 2-42
Tape Cartridges ......................................................................... 2-46
Managing Special Files ...................................................................... 2-48
Using Work Data Sets ................................................................... 2-48
Altering Retention Characteristics ........................................................ 2-48
Releasing Work Data Sets................................................................ 2-49
Defining Independent Files ............................................................... 2-49
Running Tests with Production JCL........................................................ 2-53
Using Cataloged Information ................................................................. 2-54
Daily Catalog Maintenance ............................................................... 2-54
Protecting the Catalog ................................................................... 2-56
Protecting Data Sets ..................................................................... 2-57
IBM Hardware Based Tape Encryption Support ................................................ 2-60
Automatic Cataloging/Uncataloging ....................................................... 2-60
Sending File-Dependent System Messages ................................................ 2-61
Processing Predefined Multifile Volume Data Sets.............................................. 2-62
Redefining Retention Characteristics ...................................................... 2-63
Maintaining Predefined Multifile Volume Data Sets ......................................... 2-64
Automatic Tape Positioning .............................................................. 2-64
Processing Without Additional Positioning ................................................. 2-65
Processing Unchained Multifile Tapes ......................................................... 2-67
Using Automatic Multifile (AMF) Data Sets .................................................... 2-69
Generating AMF File Numbers ............................................................ 2-69
Creating an Automatic Multifile Data Set .................................................. 2-69
Volume Switching with AMF Data Sets .................................................... 2-70
Scratching More Than the Last AMF DSN .................................................. 2-71
Inputting AMF Data Sets ................................................................. 2-71
Renaming and Resetting AMF Data Sets .................................................. 2-72
Forced Standard Label Support .............................................................. 2-72
Support for Read Backwards ................................................................. 2-73
ASCII Tape Support ......................................................................... 2-73
Using Other Software with CA Dynam/T ...................................................... 2-73
Sort and Utility Package Support ......................................................... 2-73
Processing FORTRAN Tape Files .......................................................... 2-74
vi User Guide
LIBR Backups and Restores ............................................................... 2-75
Controlling Single and Multi-Volume POWER Offload Tapes ..................................... 2-80
Controlling POWER Job Accounting Tapes ..................................................... 2-82
Enforcing Volume Serial Number Standards ................................................... 2-82
Specifying the SET Command ................................................................ 2-82
SET Command Syntax Rules .............................................................. 2-83
Summary of SET Command Syntax ....................................................... 2-83
Tape Drives ................................................................................. 2-84
Pooling Tape Drives (DTPOOL Option Record) .............................................. 2-84
Locking Tape Drives (DTLOCK Option Record) ............................................. 2-84
Using the Console Alarm Facility .............................................................. 2-85
Contents vii
Chapter 4: Disk File Management
Basic Components ........................................................................... 4-2
Allocate Disk Space ....................................................................... 4-2
Catalog File .............................................................................. 4-6
Temporary Data Sets ..................................................................... 4-8
Logical Units ............................................................................. 4-9
File Type ................................................................................. 4-9
Default Allocation Support ............................................................... 4-10
Managing the VTOC ......................................................................... 4-10
VTOC Indexes ........................................................................... 4-11
Processing the VTOC .................................................................... 4-11
Building the VTOC Index ................................................................. 4-11
Searching the VTOC ..................................................................... 4-12
Creating New VTOC Records ............................................................. 4-12
Deleting Expired Files .................................................................... 4-13
Indexed VTOC Processing ................................................................ 4-13
Defining File ID Option Codes ................................................................ 4-14
Syntax Conventions ..................................................................... 4-14
Common Syntax Errors .................................................................. 4-14
Controlling Generation Data Sets ............................................................. 4-20
Defining Generation Data Sets ........................................................... 4-20
Changing Generation Numbers ........................................................... 4-21
Deleting Generation Data Sets ........................................................... 4-22
Generation Data Set Option .............................................................. 4-22
Automatic Volume Assignment and Recognition (AVR) ......................................... 4-24
Using AVR Processing .................................................................... 4-24
Bypassing AVR Processing ............................................................... 4-24
Selecting Logical Units....................................................................... 4-25
Overriding SYS Numbers ................................................................. 4-25
Specifying Other Option Codes ........................................................... 4-25
LUB Availability ......................................................................... 4-26
SYS Number Considerations.............................................................. 4-26
Modifying Logical Unit Assignments (LUBS) ................................................... 4-27
Dynamic LUB Allocation .................................................................. 4-27
Defining LUB Ranges .................................................................... 4-27
COMLUB Option Record Processing ....................................................... 4-28
LUB Assignments ........................................................................ 4-28
Extending ISAM Files ........................................................................ 4-29
Adding a File to the Catalog .................................................................. 4-29
Controlling Disk Pools ....................................................................... 4-30
Defining Disk Pool Volumes (COMPOOL) .................................................. 4-30
Rotating Disk Pool Volumes .............................................................. 4-31
Contents ix
Chapter 6: Controlling File Independence
Introducing CA Dynam/FI ..................................................................... 6-1
Supported Program DTF Types ................................................................ 6-2
Physical Files ................................................................................ 6-3
Restrictions on DTF Types .................................................................... 6-3
Special Considerations .................................................................... 6-3
Unsupported DTFs ........................................................................ 6-3
Hierarchy of File Information .................................................................. 6-4
Unit Record Simulation ....................................................................... 6-4
CICS Command Level Preprocessor Support................................................ 6-6
CICS Macro Level Preprocessor Support.................................................... 6-7
Dynamic File Sorting ......................................................................... 6-8
Changing File Characteristics ................................................................ 6-10
TLBL/DLBL Extensions and Format........................................................ 6-10
TLBL Statement ......................................................................... 6-11
DLBL Statement ......................................................................... 6-15
Cataloged Data Set Definitions ........................................................... 6-20
Considerations for CA Dynam/FI Options .................................................. 6-21
Storage Requirements ................................................................... 6-22
Block Sizes and Logical Record Lengths ................................................... 6-22
Concatenated Data Sets ................................................................. 6-24
Controlling System Actions .................................................................. 6-26
Setting System Controls - SET Statement ................................................. 6-26
SYSLOG Support - ASSGN Statement ..................................................... 6-28
Operator Device Switching Facility ........................................................... 6-34
Requirements ........................................................................... 6-35
Operation ............................................................................... 6-35
Restrictions ............................................................................. 6-36
Using Other Software with CA Dynam/FI ...................................................... 6-36
With CA Dynam/D and CA Dynam/T ...................................................... 6-36
With System Utilities .................................................................... 6-38
With Sort Packages ...................................................................... 6-39
With Existing Programs .................................................................. 6-40
Limiting File-independence Processing .................................................... 6-42
Direct Access File Independence Facility (VCKD) .............................................. 6-43
Utility Programs ......................................................................... 6-43
Record Formats ......................................................................... 6-43
Data Records ........................................................................... 6-43
System Restrictions ..................................................................... 6-44
Activating VCKD ......................................................................... 6-44
VCKD File Parameters ................................................................... 6-44
FBA Disk Files ........................................................................... 6-46
x User Guide
VCKD Utility Programs ................................................................... 6-48
Catalog Support for CA Dynam/FI ............................................................ 6-52
Catalog File.............................................................................. 6-52
Setting Catalog Support .................................................................. 6-52
Maintaining Catalog Information .......................................................... 6-53
Contents xi
ACTION Command ...................................................................... 8-11
ADD Command .......................................................................... 8-12
ALTER Command ........................................................................ 8-17
BACKUP Command ...................................................................... 8-41
DEFINE Command ....................................................................... 8-44
DELETE Command ....................................................................... 8-63
DEQUEUE Command..................................................................... 8-66
END Command .......................................................................... 8-67
INITIAL Command....................................................................... 8-67
INT and INTR Commands ................................................................ 8-69
LISTCAT Command ...................................................................... 8-73
MACC Command ........................................................................ 8-75
MCAT Command ........................................................................ 8-76
OWN Command ......................................................................... 8-77
RENAME Command ...................................................................... 8-78
RESTORE Command ..................................................................... 8-80
SCRATCH Command ..................................................................... 8-83
SCRPOOL Command ..................................................................... 8-86
STATUS Command ...................................................................... 8-90
VAULT Command ........................................................................ 8-91
VTOC Command......................................................................... 8-93
Contents xiii
Batch Reporting for CAJAUDIT .............................................................. 11-17
Printable Fields ............................................................................ 11-17
CA DYNAM/T Header Fields ............................................................. 11-17
CA DYNAM/FI Header Fields ............................................................. 11-19
Glossary
Index
Contents xv
Chapter 1: Introduction
The CA Dynam for VSE software system is designed to provide a
comprehensive file management facility for the data center using all releases
of VSE currently supported by IBM. It is most effective when used as an
integrated system; its three products work together to efficiently manage tape
and disk files and provide file independence.
This guide provides specific chapters detailing each product in the CA Dynam
family.
CA Dynam/T helps you manage your tape library in the following ways:
Protects disk data sets from overlapping and deleting active files
Throughout this guide, all comments that refer to the combined CA Dynam
system (commonly known as CA Dynam) apply equally to each of the three
products, regardless of their individual or combined installation. Individually,
the products are referred to by their commonly known names: CA Dynam/T,
CA Dynam/D, and CA Dynam/FI.
Use of the Catalog file is required for CA Dynam/T and is optional for CA
Dynam/D and CA Dynam/FI.
Use of the Audit Trail file is optional for all subset systems.
Instructions for creating the Catalog and Audit Trail files are included in the
"Maintaining Tape Files" chapter of this guide. For more information about
Catalog and Audit Trail files, see the chapters "Accessing The Catalog" and
“Maintaining and Reporting On The Audit Trail.”
While the Audit Trail and Catalog files are optional features of CA Dynam/D
and CA Dynam/FI, their use provides for more effective management of your
data center's files.
The CA Dynam Catalog is a common file shared by the three subset systems.
This disk file records information about every file controlled by CA Dynam in
much the same way a card catalog stores data about all the books in a library.
While your production jobs are running, CA Dynam automatically catalogs
pertinent data for each file that is opened or closed, including the following
details:
The CA Dynam Audit Trail file, stored on disk, provides a simple and efficient
means of protecting your data sets in the event of disaster. In addition to
logging data about production job files, it writes an Audit Trail record each
time the CA Dynam Catalog is updated from batch or online processing.
Whenever the need arises, you can backup, restore, and recover the CA
Dynam Catalog from the Audit Trail records.
Start CA Dynam
CASAUTIL can be run at any time (not just from an ASI PROC), but the system
can protect data sets only when active. Thus, we recommend that it be started
as early in the IPL procedure as possible. For more information about
CASAUTIL, see the Programming Guide.
After activation, all the subsets that comprise the complete CA Dynam family
remain active.
Deactivate CA Dynam
To temporarily deactivate one or more of the subset systems, the profile phase
for the subsets can be deleted from the core image library or renamed, and an
IPL performed. Alternatively, through the use of CASAUTIL START statements,
various subsets of the CA Dynam family can be activated while leaving others
inactive, without requiring deletion or renaming of any library entries. For
more information, see the Programming Guide.
Any CP command valid for the userid's privilege class(es) will be processed.
For instance, this facility could be used to attach or detach tape devices.
CASTART fn Starts partitions, either static or dynamic, which were previously stopped by
CA Dynam.
CA? The STATUS commands display information about the CPU, operating system,
and CA products currently active in the system, as follows:
This facility only affects cancellations originating with the operator (not those
generated by program-check interruption, I/O errors or other causes) and
delays; it does not prevent operator cancellation. The System Adapter ensures
that critical CA Dynam system tasks, such as CATALOG DEQUEUE, complete
without interruption, preventing Catalog corruption which might otherwise
occur.
In either case, no further action should be taken until a reasonable time has
elapsed to permit the critical function to complete. If it is suspected that the
partition which has been canceled or flushed is in an unending loop or wait
condition, an override to the CANCEL-DELAY facility has been provided. The
operator can enter, to the attention routing (AR), any one of the following:
CA-CANCL nn or
CA-CAN nn or
CA-FLUSH nn where nn = partition ID of the partition to be canceled.
TLBL/DLBL Extensions
CA Dynam products extend the TLBL and DLBL statements so that CA Dynam
processing options can be defined. The following charts summarize the
extensions.
TLBL Extensions
The TLBL Extensions include Standard TLBL and TLBL with CA Dynam
Extensions.
Standard TLBL
file-id 1—44 alphanumeric characters enclosed in single quotes. Equals data set
name in CA Dynam Catalog.
For example:
// TLBL FILEX,'DSNAME.(-1)'
For example:
// TLBL FILEX,'DSNAME,W,H'
R Release at CLOSE
U Unload at CLOSE
W Rewind at CLOSE
N No rewind at CLOSE
Z Multitask
L Long tape
M Medium tape
S Short tape
D8 Tape cartridge
== partition independence
Examples
// TLBL FILEX,'==WORK'
// TLBL FILEX,'WORK=='
If the actual data set name length (after the options are stripped) is
greater than 17, the last 17 significant characters are written to the HDR1
label on the tape.
date Expiration date (yy/ddd or yyyy/ddd) or number of days retention (nnnn). This
date is calculated using the greatest number of retention days specified in any
one of the following places:
volser Volume serial number of first input volume. Omit for output.
volseq Volume sequence number of specific volume of multivolume data set. Omit for
output.
fileseq The file sequence number field is not used by CA DYNAM/T and should be
omitted in all cases. The multifile data set control provided by CA DYNAM/T is
based upon the data set name and control records in the Catalog.
gen Specific version of input data set; 1-4 digits. Place generation number here
instead of within file-id if the file-id is too large or contains special symbols.
Gen=nnn Specific, absolute generation number assigned to a new version of a data set.
Entering this generation number lets you to access a particular data set
version for input. Place the absolute generation number here instead of within
file-id if the file-id is too large or contains special symbols. Processing options
must be separated by commas. If the first option is a keyword and IBM
options are omitted, at least 1 comma after file-id is required; otherwise, at
least 2 commas are needed.
Topt CA Dynam/T numeric processing options. Place option codes here instead of
within file-id if the file-id is too large or contains special symbols.
1 Rewind at CLOSE
2 Unload at CLOSE
4 Release at CLOSE
32 No rewind at CLOSE
Multiple numeric options can be specified by adding the values of the options
and placing the sum in this field. If you specify both numeric and alphabetic
options, the numeric options are ignored.
Option Description
FIOPT=(option,option...) Options:
SL|UL Standard/unlabeled
NOFI No FI processing
DLBL Extensions
Standard DLBL
file-id 1—44 alphanumeric characters enclosed in single quotes. Equals data set
name in CA Dynam Catalog.
Example
// DLBL SDDOUT,'DISK.FILE(A,I)'
IE ISAM extend
NF Do not fragment
== Partition independence
For temporary data sets, prefix the 1- to 8-character FILEID with ##.
code IBM file type code, two to four alphabetic characters. Omit if data set is
defined to CA Dynam Catalog. Examples are SD, DA, DU, ISC, ISE, and VSAM.
FIOPT=(option,option...) Options:
NOFI No FI processing
RESET Format
[//] RESET FILE={*filename|filename|ALL}
*Filename Deletes the label option block (TLBL or DLBL) for every
group (user, partition, system) for which this file is a
member.
filename Deletes the user label option block for this file.
After you have selected the Audit option, you must first define and format the
CA Dynam Audit Data Set (audit trail). The Audit facility is shared by all
components of CA Dynam; therefore, you have to submit only one label and
initialize it only once.
Use the file name CAIAUDT to define the Audit Data Set. The system accesses
the data set using direct physical IOCS. However, define it as an SD file for
label purposes.
Review the Audit Trail Facility chapter before determining the location and size
of the data set.
Place the data set on a different disk volume from the Catalog file; if a
hardware failure destroys the Catalog, the Audit data set will still be available
for recovery.
For information about labeling the Audit data set, see the Programming Guide.
Catalog File
The Catalog file controls the tape library. It is a direct access file shared by all
CA Dynam software components.
The Catalog file stores all information necessary to perform the following
actions:
Use the file name CAICATL to define the CA Dynam Catalog. The system
directly accesses the Catalog with physical IOCS; however, define the Catalog
as an SD file for label purposes.
Review the Programming Guide before deciding where to place the Catalog
file, its size, and which logical unit will access it.
For more information about the Audit and Catalog files, see the chapters
"Accessing the Catalog" and "Maintaining and Reporting on the Audit Trail."
The batch program, DYNCAT, and the online program, CUI File Management,,
establish and define to the Catalog those data sets that CA Dynam/T is to
control. You can also define data sets to the Catalog at output OPEN through
use of the optional automatic cataloging facility.
A data set must have a unique name. You can include retention information; a
default can be specified in the DYNAM/T option record.
Example:
This creates a data set named DYNAM/T BACKUP. When members of this data
set are created, they are retained for at least three generations and for at
least three days.
You can enter existing generations of data sets with the DYNCAT ADD
command.
If you will be using tapes as output for CA Dynam/T controlled data sets,
initially define them to the Catalog as scratch tapes by doing any one of the
following:
When a volume is entered into the Catalog, a search is made to verify that it
has a unique volume serial number. Recognition characters are placed in the
HDR1 label to identify it as a CA Dynam/T controlled tape. You can use the
batch program TDYNLBL to create block printed serial number labels. When
these are placed on initialized tapes, they enable the operator to easily
recognize tapes which are under the control of CA Dynam/T. For more
information about TDYNLBL, see the chapter "Supporting Tape File
Management."
Examples:
DYNCAT is executed from the console and the tapes on drives 299 and 29A are
initialized and rewound. The absence of a volume serial number in the
CADT009D message indicates that the tapes were originally unlabeled. The
operator enters the new volume serial numbers 100732 and 100733 and
enters EOB/END in response to the repeated CADT009D message, to indicate
that those numbers are to be used.
Modifying JCL
The final step in preparing to use CA Dynam/T includes the following JCL
changes:
1. In order for the system to recognize a tape file that is to be controlled, the
FILE-ID field of the TLBL must match a data set name in the Catalog.
2. Remove all logical unit assignments to tape drives to enable the Automatic
Volume Recognition facility to function. This change is not required
because CA Dynam/T respects existing assignments. However, not using
this facility defeats the purpose of an automated tape management
system.
The following example displays a job stream before and after conversion to
CA Dynam/T control:
Before Conversion
After Conversion
The // ASSGN statements are removed to enable AVR. Also, the Forced
Labeled Tape facility is used to change the file on SYS008 from unlabeled to
standard label so that it can be controlled. Finally, the data set names are
standardized to begin with PR, thus identifying these as PAYROLL data sets.
Implementing CA Dynam/T
You can implement CA Dynam/T all at once or gradually, depending upon the
needs of your installation. However, one specific person should be responsible
for coordinating the implementation. Convert a few frequently run jobs to
allow the operations staff to become accustomed to CA Dynam; usually one to
two weeks is sufficient. After the operators are familiar with the system, it can
be implemented as quickly as the data sets can be cataloged. If a different
automated file management system was previously used, operators will be
familiar with the concepts involved and will only need to learn the new
message formats.
All tapes must be assigned unique volume serial numbers. They should be
standard label tapes. After the system is activated, convert any unlabeled
tapes in use (created by other than 1400 programs) to standard label
tapes by including TLBL statements for these files in the JCL. The next
time the file is created it will be a standard label file.
All file names in the TLBL statements must uniquely identify a data file.
The same file name cannot refer to two different data sets. Review all JCL
to make sure these requirements are met.
Appropriate data set names for each tape file must be entered in the
Catalog using the DEFINE command of the DYNCAT program.
Tapes must be entered in the Catalog to indicate which volumes are under
control. A unique identifier (TC) is placed in the SYSTEM CODE field of the
VOL1 label of the tape volume. The identifier is written on the tape either
with the DYNCAT INT or INTR commands, or when CA Dynam/T requests
an output scratch tape in normal processing.
In either case, the operator should look at the volume serial number
displayed on the console with the external label on the tape. A new label
should be placed on each tape as it is brought under CA Dynam/T control
so that the operator knows at a glance whether a tape has been initialized.
A utility label print program (TDYNLBL) is provided for this purpose.
Bring 1400 Emulator tapes and system logical unit tape files under
CA Dynam/T control with the TDYNASN OPEN and CLOSE commands.
Using CA Dynam/T
CA Dynam/T controls and protects data sets by intercepting all OPEN and
CLOSE requests issued for tape files. Using information in the Catalog file,
CA Dynam/T verifies that the correct tape is being used, as follows:
For output OPEN requests, a tape that has been initialized under
CA Dynam/T control and listed in the file in scratch status is required.
CA Dynam/T issues a message requesting that a scratch tape be mounted
if it does not find one already mounted. Specific responses to these
messages are discussed later.
If CA Dynam/T has been activated but is unable to access the Catalog for
any reason, it makes sure that no file is written to a volume that has been
initialized to CA Dynam/T, as determined by the special identification
characters. This protects controlled data sets from being overwritten even
in exceptional situations.
In response to OPEN requests for tape files that have not been placed
under CA Dynam/T control.
CA Dynam/T checks that the logical unit being opened has been assigned
to a tape drive to prevent abnormal termination with the IBM message
4883I INVALID LOGICAL UNIT (input).
CA Dynam/T makes sure that the specified drive does not contain a tape
that is an active generation of a controlled data set (output).
Programs and utility packages that do not open and close files (for
example, DITTO)
Programs that perform physical I/O operations that violate VSE LIOCS
conventions
DTFMT TYPE=WORK
Tape files opened as input, then processed as output
CA Dynam/T is flexible regarding data set retention. You can use the various
retention methods it provides individually or in combination. You can also
modify individual generations within a data set to allow for exceptional or
permanent retention independent of the characteristics of the data set as a
whole.
Establish the retention characteristics with the DYNCAT DEFINE command. You
can alter them with the DYNCAT ALTER command.
You may retain a data set for a specific number of the following:
Days, or until a specific expiration date has been reached (date retention)
Generations
AS-OF-DATE cycles (also known as PERIOD ENDING DATE cycles)
Date Retention
Date retention is based upon an expiration date calculated from the creation
date and the number of retention days specified either in the Catalog or on the
TLBL statement used in the creation of the generation.
If retention days are specified in both the Catalog and the TLBL, the larger
number is used. This provides the longest possible retention. When the
expiration date is reached, the version is eligible for scratch.
Generation Retention
AS-OF-DATE Retention
Each time you access a version, CA Dynam updates the last access date field
in the Catalog. This value is compared with the current date. If the last access
date plus the NOACC value (number of days that version is to be retained after
last access) is less than the current date, the version is eligible for scratch
under this retention option.
The DYNCAT ALTER command enables you to modify the existing retention
characteristics of a data set.
For example, this ALTER command assures that a particular version will not be
scratched until December 31, 2020.
The expiration date of version 1 of the data set is changed to December 31,
2020. DYNCAT accepts American and European date formats. For more
information about acceptable dates, see the DYNCAT ALTER command.
The SCRATCH command of the batch program DYNCAT analyzes each data set
and scratches eligible versions. A version remains a protected member of the
data set until the SCRATCH command is run, even if its expiration date has
passed. This lets you control the process by which tapes are returned to the
scratch pool.
For example:
The TAPEOPT=ROTATE option is specified for the data set (the oldest
version is used for output when a new version is created)
In order to explain how the various retention schemes work, we will refer to
the following sample DATA SET NAME LISTING. An asterisk beside the version
number indicates that the version is eligible for scratch.
2. Also note data set AR.MASTER, which has retention criteria of zero cycles,
30 days, and three AS-OF-DATE cycles (PEDCYC). The current AS-OF-
DATE for the data set is 12/31/**. Also, the AS-OF-DATE for each version
is 12/31/20, as indicated on each version line (PED). All the version AS-
OF-DATES are considered members of the same AS-OF-DATE cycle,
because all the version AS-OF-DATES are identical. Therefore, only the
most current will be retained because of AS-OF-DATE. Only data set
versions less than 30 days old will be retained, because 30 days retention
has been specified.
3. Finally, note data set AR.BACKUP, which has 2 cycles and 4 AS-OF-DATE
cycles retention. Versions 1 and 2 will always be retained because of the
2-cycle retention; (Version 1 would also be retained because of AS-OF-
DATE retention). Version 3 is a member of a different AS-OF-DATE group
(12/31/20), so it will be retained.
DSN VLT VOLSER VER VOL FIL OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION------------ PED PED TAPE MSG
ID ID ID DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
AR.BACKUP
ACCTS RECEIVABLE BACKUP
A 100486 1 1 0 2 01/20/20 01/20/20 23.42 A BG ARBACKUP 4 01/31/20
B 100423 2 1 0 2 01/06/20 01/06/20 23.42 A BG ARBACKUP 4 01/31/20
C 100659 3 1 0 2 12/24/19 12/24/19 23.42 A BG ARBACKUP 4 12/31/19
AR.DESC.1 MF
ACCTS RECEIVABLE DESCRIPTION - FILE 1
A 100744 1 1 1 0 2 01/21/20 01/21/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
A 100723 2 1 1 0 2 01/14/20 01/14/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
A 009876 3* 1 1 0 2 01/07/20 01/07/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
AR.DESC.2 MF
ACCTS RECEIVABLE DESCRIPTION - FILE 2
A 100744 1 1 2 0 2 01/21/20 01/21/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
A 100723 2 1 2 0 2 01/14/20 01/14/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
A 009876 3* 1 2 0 2 01/07/20 01/07/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
AR.DESC.3 MF
ACCTS RECEIVABLE DESCRIPTION - FILE 3
A 100744 1 1 3 0 2 01/21/20 01/21/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
A 100723 2 1 3 0 2 01/14/20 01/14/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
A 009876 3* 1 3 0 2 01/07/20 01/07/20 23.41 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/20
AR.MASTER
ACCTS RECEIVABLE MASTER FILE
A 100733 1 1 30 01/29/20 12/30/19 23.41 A BG ARMSTRUP 3 12/31/19
A 080655 2* 1 30 12/29/19 11/29/19 23.41 A BG ARMSTRUP 3 12/31/19
A 051234 3* 1 30 11/30/19 10/31/19 23.41 A BG ARMSTRUP 3 12/31/19
A 099976 4* 1 30 10/30/19 09/30/19 23.41 A BG ARMSTRUP 3 12/31/19
Activating AVR
AVR is activated when a program for a controlled tape file issues an OPEN
request and the logical unit to be used (SYS-number) is not assigned to a tape
device. It can be either assigned to a device other than tape or unassigned.
AVR is not activated if the logical unit is assigned IGN. In that case,
CA Dynam/T performs no processing for this file; normal IGNORE processing
occurs.
The unit is not assigned to any logical unit in any partition, either through
a temporary or standard assignment.
The unit is a member of a defined POOL of tape drives available for the
CPU and partition issuing the OPEN (see DTPOOL option record), or no
tape drive pools have been defined in the DTPOOL option record.
The unit is not locked against cross-CPU use by CA Dynam/T (see DTLOCK
option record).
The unit is physically accessible (has not been DETACHed under VM, or has
not been placed offline).
The tape on the unit has a recording density compatible with the tape
drive, and no I/O errors occur when the VOL1/HDR1 labels are read.
The tape unit is of the same type as the tape currently being opened.
If all of the above conditions are met, CA Dynam/T reads the tape on the unit
to determine if it is the desired volume. Depending on whether it is the desired
volume, CA Dynam/T does the following:
If it is not the desired volume, the tape is returned to load point and
CA Dynam/T continues searching until all available tape units defined in
the applicable DTPOOL table have been searched. If no DTPOOL option
records are defined, the search continues through all tape drives in the
PUB table. If the correct volume has not been located, CA Dynam/T
instructs the operator to mount the desired volume (input) or a scratch
volume (output). When the operator responds, CA Dynam/T is again
activated and processing continues.
A tape unit is assigned only while in actual use between OPEN and CLOSE
of the accessed file, instead of remaining assigned for the duration of an
entire job.
For multivolume files, the volume switch can take place as soon as EOV
occurs. Alternate assignments requiring that two tape units be assigned
while only one is in use are not necessary.
You can override the AVR facility at any time through JCL assignments. It can
also be limited to selected drives through the DTPOOL option record.
1. Logical unit as specified with the S:nnn option of the TLBL statement (LUB
override).
3. Logical unit as defined for the partition in the COMLUB option record.
To exclude a particular file from dynamic LUB allocation, code the P (to
prohibit) or H option (to hold) on the TLBL statement. The DTLUBEX option
record can be used to exclude a group of DTF names or phase names from
dynamic LUB allocation.
Mounting Tapes
Reissue the OPEN and search for the ACCEPT DSN=dataset name,
indicated data set, version, or volume [VER=nnn|,VOL=xxxxxx]
instead of the one called from the JCL.
BG // JOB ARDUMP
DATE 01/07/09,CLOCK 23/07/07
BG // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR TRANS,W' X
BG // EXEC MSTROUT
BG CADT007I **** LABEL TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100732 1 *AR TRANS* Y
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100732 *AR TRANS* BLK=12 Z
BG EOJ ARDUMP
DATE 01/07/09, CLOCK 23/08/09, DURATION 00/01/02
1. This creates the file TAPEOUT, data set AR TRANS. Rewinds the tape at
CLOSE.
2. AVR locates a scratch tape on drive 299, and the CADT007I message is
issued.
3. The file is closed and the CADT031I message is issued. The Catalog is
updated; tape 100732 is now version 1 of data set AR TRANS.
BG // JOB ARUPD
DATE 01/21/09, CLOCK 20/03/14
BG // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR TRANS,W' X
BG // EXEC MSTROUT
BG CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH TAPEOUT SYS011 DSN=AR TRANS MODE=1600 Y
BG STATUS Z
BG CADT015I 298-UA-* DOWN * [
BG CADT015I 299-UA-RDY LP/W 100732 AR TRANS
BG CADT015I 29A-UA-RDY LP/W 100733 AR MASTER
BG CADT015I 29B-UA-*AVRLOCK*
BG CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH TAPEOUT SYS011 DSN=AR TRANS MODE=1600
BG 29A \
BG CADT010D VOLSER 100733 ALREADY IN FILE AS AR MASTER ]
BG CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH TAPEOUT SYS011 DSN=AR TRANS MODE=1600
BG STOP ^
F2 EOJ PAUSE
DATE 01/21/09,CLOCK 20/05/22,DURATION 00/00/53
F1 1Q34I F2 WAITING FOR WORK
AR CASTART BG _
BG CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH TAPEOUT SYS011 DSN=AR TRANS MODE=1600
BG 299 `
BG CADT009D VERIFY VOLUME NO=100867
BG
BG CADT007I **** LABEL TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100867 1 *AR TRANS*
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100867 AR TRANS BLK=12
BG EOJ ARUPD
DATE 01/21/09,CLOCK 20/05/53,DURATION 00/02/38
1. This creates file TAPEOUT, data set AR TRANS. Rewinds tape at close.
4. Drive 298 is DVCDN, 299 and 29A are available, ready at load point and
write enabled, with the indicated volumes mounted. Drive 29B is LOCKED
for use by another CPU.
6. 29A contains an active data set volume; the MOUNT message is reissued.
7. The operator responds STOP to free the console while a SCRATCH tape is
mounted.
8. The operator reactivates the job with the CASTART command, and the
MOUNT message is reissued.
BG
BG CADT007I **** LABEL UOUT SYS005=29A 1004561 *AR MASTER*
BG CADT509I BLOCK COUNT=0000002 INPUT
BG CADT510I BLOCK COUNT=0000002 OUTPUT
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* UOUT SYS005=29A 100456 AR MASTER BLK=53
BG EOJ COPY
DATE 01/23/09,CLOCK 20/31/53,DURATION 00/01/19
1. This copies an unlabeled tape file, UIN, to a labeled tape file, UOUT,data
set AR MASTER. Rewinds output tape at CLOSE.
F2 // JOB ARDESCUP
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/46/38
F2 // ASSGN SYS010,299
F2 // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR DESC 1',,,,,,2
F2 // ASSGN SYS011,29A
F2 // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR DESC 1',,,,,,2
F2 // EXEC MSTRIO
F2 CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=299 100723 AR DESC 1
F2 CADT008I MOUNT SCRATCH TAPEOUT on 29A DSN=AR DESC 1 MODE=1600
F2 CADT017D *INTERV-REQ* 29A
F2 STATUS
F2 CADT015I 298 - UA- NOT AVBL
F2 CADT015I 299 - F2 - SYS010
F2 CADT015I 29A - F2 - SYS011
F2 CADT008I MOUNT SCRATCH TAPEOUT ON 29A DSN=AR DESC 1 MODE=1600
F2 CADT017D *INTERV REQ* 29A
F2
F2 CADT007I **** LABEL TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100744 1 *AR DESC 1*
F2 CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100744 AR DESC BLK=14
OJ ARDESCUP
F2 DATE 01/22/09, CLOCK 20/49/40,DURATION 00/03/02
JCL assignments for SYS010 and SYS011 are in effect. Note the difference in
the CADT008I message, and the CADT017D *INTERV REQ* message. The
operator is required to use drive 29A for the output file, because JCL
assignments are in effect. Note that STATUS shows 298 is not available for
processing, probably having been placed offline or detached.
BG // JOB ARUPD
DATE 01/23/09,CLOCK 20/00/43
BG // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR TRANS,U'
BG // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR MASTER,W'
BG // EXEC MSTRIO
BG CADT004D MOUNT VOLUME 100372 AR TRANS SYS010
BG STATUS
BG CADT015I 298 - UA - RDY LP/W *NOT-CAP*
BG CADT015I 299 - UA - RDY NLPW
BG CADT015I 29A - UA - RDY LP/W 100733 BGWORK
BG CADT004D MOUNT VOLUME 100372 AR TRANS SYS010
BG 299
BG CADT002D *NOT LD PNT* SYS010=299
BG REWIND
BG CADT004D MOUNT VOLUME 100372 AR TRANS SYS010
BG
BG CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=299 100732 AR TRANS
BG CADT007I ****** LABEL TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100733 1 *AR MASTER*
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100733 AR MASTER BLK=54
BG EOJ ARUPD
DATE 01/23/09,CLOCK 20/01/34,DURATION 00/00/51
BG // JOB ARRPLOAD
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/26/49
BG // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR RP MAST,W'
BG // EXEC MSTRIN
BG CADT004D MOUNT VOLUME 028768 AR RP MAST SYS010
BG RERUN
BG CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=29A 100665 AR RP MSTR
BG EOJ ARRPLOAD
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/27/07,DURATION 00/00/18
BG // JOB ARRPLOAD
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/25/24
BG // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR RP MSTR,W'
BG // EXEC MSTRIN
BG CADT004D MOUNT VOLUME 028768 AR RP MSTR SYS010
BG 29A
BG CADT005D WRONG TAPE:VOL=100665 HDR1='AR RP MSTR' SYS010=29A
BG ACCEPT
BG CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=29A 100665 AR RP MSTR
BG EOJ ARRPLOAD
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/25/46,DURATION 00/00/22
The operator has directed CA Dynam/T to a tape other than the one called for,
and the CADT005D message is issued showing the volume serial number and
file ID of the tape actually found. An ACCEPT response allows the operator to
override CA Dynam/T and input volume 100665 instead of volume 028768.
BG // JOB ARRPLOAD
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/26/04
BG // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR RP MSTR,W'
BG // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR RP MSTR,W',,,,,2
BG // EXEC MSTRIN
BG CADT004D MOUNT VOLUME 028768 AR RP MSTR SYS010
BG ALTER
BG CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=29A 100665 AR RP MSTR
BG EOJ ARRPLOAD
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/26/23,DURATION 00/00/19
BG // JOB ARBKUP
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/28/10
BG // TLBL SYS006,'AR MSTR BKUP,U'
BG // EXEC ARMBKUP
BG CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH SYS006 SYS006 DSN=AR MSTR BKUP
OWNER=AR SIZE=L
BG SCRTCH
BG CADT048I 000774 OWN=AR VLT=A L
BG CADT048I 001844 OWN=AR VLT=A L
BG CADT048I 000031 OWN=AR VLT=A L
BG CADT048I 000379 OWN=AR VLT=A L
BG CADT048I 000814 OWN=AR VLT=A M
BG CADT048I 001303 OWN=AR VLT=A M
BG CADT048I 000034 OWN=** VLT=A L
BG CADT048I 002035 OWN=** VLT=A L
BG CADT048I 000499 OWN=** VLT=A M
BG CADT048I 000611 OWN=** VLT=A M
BG CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH SYS006 SYS006 DSN=AR MSTR BKUP
OWNER=AR SIZE=L
BG STOP
AR CASTART BG
BG CADT007I ****** LABEL SYS006=299 000379 1 *AR MSTR BKUP*
BG CADT031I *CLOSE* SYS006 SYS006=299 000379 AR MSTR BKUP BLK=54
BG EOJ ARBKUP
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/38/20,DURATION 00/10/10
The scratch tapes that meet the qualification criteria (Owner=AR and
Length=L) are listed first, followed by those that match only the owner ID,
then by those matching the length, and finally by unqualified scratches to fill
out a full list of ten tapes. The volume, 000379, appears on the list as being a
scratch with owner AR and size L; the operator stops the partition, locates the
tape and mounts it on drive 299. When the operator restarts the partition,
CA Dynam/T locates the tape through AVR, and the file is created.
BG // JOB LOADMSTR
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/52/31
BG // TLBL SYS005,'AR MSTR BKUP,U'
BG // ASSGN SYS005,29A
BG // EXEC ARLOAD
BG CADT004I MOUNT VOLUME 000379 DSN=AR MSTR BKUP SYS005
BG CADT002D *INTERV REQ* SYS005=29A
BG STATUS
BG CADT015I 298 - F2 - SYS021
BG CADT015I 299 - UA - RDY LP/W 000379 AR MSTR BKUP
BG CADT015I 29A - BG - SYS005
BG CADT0041 MOUNT VOLUME 000379 DSN=AR MSTR BKUP SYS005
BG CADT002D *INTERV REQ* SYS005=29A
BG REL
BG CADT032I ASSIGNED SYS006 SYS006=299 000379 AR MSTR BKUP
BG EOJ LOADMSTR
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 21/03/32,DURATION 00/11/01
The tape volume called for was mounted on a drive other than the one to
which the JCL assigned it. The operator responds REL to release the
assignment and force AVR rather than move the tape from 299, where it was
mounted and ready, to its assignment at 29A. CA Dynam/T locates the tape
and the file is processed.
Had the JCL been originally submitted without the // ASSGN SYS005,29A
statement to take full advantage of AVR, the volume would have been located
on the first AVR scan, and none of the console dialog would have been
required.
BG // JOB BUILDMST
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 20/52/31
BG // TLBL ARMTAP,'AR MSTR OUT,U'
BG // EXEC ARCREATE
BG CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH ARMTAP SYS006 DSN=AR MASTER OUT BUILDMST
BG STATUS
BG CADT015I 298 - F2 - SYS021
BG CADT015I 299 - F2 - SYS022
BG CADT015I 29A - UA - *LOCKED*
BG CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH ARMTAP SYS006 DSN=AR MASTER OUT BUILDMST
BG DISK
BG CADD002I ALLOCATED FILE=ARMTAP SYS038=15C SYSWK1 IX=00/204/40 (G#06)
BG EOJ BUILDMST
DATE 01/22/09,CLOCK 21/03/32,DURATION 00/11/01
An output tape file, ARMTAP, is to be created on SYS006, under the data set
name AR MSTR OUT. When the CADT008D MOUNT message is issued, STATUS
shows no tape drives available. The operator could reply STOP and allow the
job in F2 to complete; then, he could restart BG. Instead, he chooses to
respond DISK, requesting CA Dynam to change the device type from tape to
disk and use the disk allocation characteristics stored in the Catalog to control
the allocation of the file. CA Dynam/FI is invoked to modify the file type, and
CA Dynam/D to locate the space; the file is successfully created on DASD
volume SYSWK1.
Note that another logical unit is used by CA Dynam/D for the file. When the
file is called for as input, CA Dynam/FI intervenes to locate the file on disk and
allow it to be inputted from there automatically, even though JCL can call for
the file on tape.
In order for processing such as this to take place, all of the following must be
true:
For more information, see Operator Device Switching Facility in the chapter
"Controlling File Independence."
These commands can be issued from the operator console to position tapes or
display status without issuing DITTO or MTC commands.
DT STATUS pp Show status of all tape drives available to the partition specified (pp). Drives
are shown in the order in which they will be AVRed in this partition.
DT STATUS FREE Show status of all tape drives that are in a ready status with no tape mounted,
are unassigned, and are attached to the machine issuing the command.
** This is only seen when using the IUCV interface and an unusual situation
occurs.
Note: The format of these commands has changed from previous releases of
CA Dynam. However, for reasons of compatibility, the previous command
format of 'CA-D/T xxx' is still supported.
For more information about the DTPATH option record, see the chapters
"Installation Options" and "Using CA Dynam with Special Environments" in the
Programming Guide.
All parameters for the DT PATH command are positional and must be specified
in the format shown above.
DISABLE Disables a specific receive path or all receive paths for this CPUID.
DISPATCH Forces a specific receive path or all receive paths for this CPUID to be read,
even though it has been disabled.
ENABLE Enables a specific receive path or all receive paths for this CPUID. A receive
path is one defined for another CPUID with a TO value specifying this CPUID.
LOG Enables logging of various events for a specific receive path or all receive
paths. The events to be logged can be indicated as:
You can specify one type of event or a combination of event types listed above
for LOG.
QUERY Displays the status of a specific path or all paths for this CPUID.
TRACE Enables the trace facility to trace various events for a specific receive path or
all receive paths. The events to be traced can be indicated as:
ADAPT All adapter type calls, except PATH and CATALOG type
calls.
Use this parameter only at the request of CA Technical Support personnel. You
can specify one type of event or a combination of event types listed above for
TRACE.
Examples:
The following is an example defining DTNODE and DTPATH option records for
communicating across three systems, the first running CA Dynam/T VSE, the
second also running CA Dynam/T VSE, and the third running CA 1. The two
CA Dynam/T systems share a catalog, and as such only one receiver is active.
Two Multi:ACCESS queue files (DYN2CA1 and CA12DYN) are used to describe
the two physical links, with a separate PATH description for communication in
each direction active on each link.
// JOB DBU0
// EXEC CACCDBU0
DEF DTNODE CPU(*) DUPREC(DELETE) -
NODEID(VSE.SYSA) -
NCPUID(A)
/*
/&
DT PATH Examples:
The following messages are issued in response to querying ALL paths. They
show the status for all paths controlled by this CPU. (CA1MVS) is the NODEID
of the CPUID sending transactions on this path and the return code is the
highest recorded for this path. The status will display whether the path is
currently enabled, and whether any traces or logs are pending for this path.
Enable or disable a particular receive path, in this case CA12DYN, for this
CPUID.
Request or discontinue logging of events for the CA12DYN pathid. The type of
event is unspecified here, defaulting to ALL three event types (PLIST, VERIFY,
and RECEIVE).
Request or discontinue tracing of events for the CA12DYN pathid. The type of
event is unspecified here, defaulting to ALL three event types (PLIST, VERIFY,
and RECEIVE).
CA Dynam/T provides an automatic retry of the AVR scan for input or output
tapes if you so specify in the DYNAM/T option record. This facility notifies the
operator of a required mount for a specific input tape or a scratch tape using
the normal mount message, then goes to sleep for a user-specified interval
without requiring an operator response, allowing the operator to locate the
volume and mount it on an available drive.
With proper education and procedures, this facility can significantly reduce the
number of operator console interactions. A reasonable time between AVR
requests (for example, 30 seconds) allows tapes to be located in a timely
fashion, but does not cause undue overhead through AVR if operator
intervention is to be needed. You can select the ALARM(YES) parameter in the
DYNAM/T option record to ensure the operator is aware of the informational
MOUNT messages which appear while AUTO-RETRY is in progress; a console
alarm is sounded whenever a MOUNT message is issued. For more information
about instructions in the coding and use of the DYNAM/T option record, see
the Programming Guide.
CA Dynam/T requires a VSE standard TLBL for each controlled file. You can
submit the TLBL in the job stream, or place it in the partition or system
standard label area. All normal VSE labeling conventions apply.
Some of the fields of the TLBL have been functionally extended to provide
additional information to CA Dynam/T, allowing the user to better control the
processing of tape files. These extensions permit you to specify the following:
Retention
Version (generation)
// TLBL filename,'file-id',ret,volser,volseq,fileseq,gen,ver
TLBL Parameters
The following list describes the parameters for each of the TLBL fields.
filename(dtfname) Required parameter, 1 to 7 alphanumeric characters long. The file name must
be the same as the name specified for the file in the program's DTF.
// TLBL filename,'FILEID.(-1),W,H,D'
Version 2 of the data set FILEID is requested. At CLOSE, the REWIND, HOLD,
and DROP options are performed.
Note: If the actual data set name field length is greater than 17 (after the
options have been stripped) the LAST 17 significant characters are written to
the HDR1 label on the tape.
ret Specify exceptional retention for output files in this field with any one of the
following:
volser Request a specific volume for input files in this field with a 1- to 6- character
alphanumeric volume serial number. Omit this field for output files.
volseq Use this field to request a specific volume of a multivolume data set for input
files with a 1- to 4-digit number from 0 to 9999. Omit this field for output files.
fileseq The file sequence number field is not used by CA Dynam/T and should be
omitted in all cases. The multifile data set control provided by CA Dynam/T is
based upon the data set name and control records in the Catalog.
gen In this field, request a specific version of a data set for input files with a 1-to
4-digit version number from 0 to 9999. Omit this field for output files.
ver Use this field to specify option codes that control various processing functions.
Enter a 1- to 2-digit number, 0—99.
G=nnnnn or GEN=nnnnn
Use the field to specify an absolute generation number from 1 to 65535 for the
data set. This number lets you always access this particular version of the data
set. This is a positional entry and must be coded after all other parameters. If
the first option is a keyword and IBM options are omitted, at least 1 comma
after file-id is required; otherwise, at least 2 commas are needed.
Example:
// TLBL filename,'file-id',,G=123.
Retention The value specified in the TLBL date field overrides the number of retention
days specified in the Catalog only if it is the larger of the two. It applies only to
the version created using that TLBL.
Examples:
Version (Generation) CA Dynam/T defaults to the current version of the data set requested for
Specification input files. You can select another version three ways.
Volume Serial Number Use the File Serial Number field of the TLBL to select a specific volume with
which to begin processing for input files. The volume can be any reel of any
version, as long as it is a member of the requested data set.
If the requested volume is not a member of the data set, a mount for that
volume serial number is issued. A valid entry is a 1- to 6-character volume
serial number. The following example calls for volume number 765:
// TLBL FILENAME,'FILE-ID',,000765
Volume Sequence Use the Volume Sequence Number field to select a specific volume of a
Number multivolume version of a data set with which to begin processing for input
files. The default is volume one.
If you specify a volume that does not exist, CA Dynam/T issues a mount for
that volume serial number. A valid entry is a 1- to 4-digit volume sequence
number. The following example calls for volume sequence number two.
// TLBL FILENAME,'FILE-ID',,,2
The TLBL options enable you to control certain system actions at OPEN and
CLOSE. You can communicate these options to CA Dynam/T as any one of the
following:
Alphabetic option codes appended to the data set name in the FILE-ID field
CA Dynam/T ignores numeric options if the alphabetic option codes are used in
a TLBL. You can specify certain options only with alphabetic option codes.
Release R 04
Unload U 02
Rewind W 01
Norewind N 32
Prohibit P
Catalog C
Drop D 16
Hold H 08
Identify I
Modify A 64
Multitask Z
Long L
medium long ML
Medium M
medium short MS
Short S
extra short XS
800 BPI C8
1600 BPI C0
6250 BPI D0
TAPE CARTRIDGE D8
Note: If the JX or SX option is specified for an input file and the job step
abnormally terminates, the file is not deleted. This allows the job to be rerun.
JX and SX options are not supported for multifile data sets.
Examples:
Both result in the REWIND, HOLD, and DROP options being performed.
To specify multiple numeric options, add the numeric values of the option
codes and place the sum in the Version Number field.
unload U or 02 Alters the DTF to unload the file when // TLBL FILE1,'ABC,U'
the file is closed.
// TLBL FILE1,'ABC',,,,,,02
Catalog data C Automatically adds the data set name // TLBL dtfname,'DSN,C'
set name in the TLBL to the Catalog when it is
first opened for output.
drop D or 16 Erases the TLBL from the label track // TLBL dtfname,'DSN,D'
for the file when it is closed. A
// TLBL dtfname,'DSN'...16
subsequent OPEN can process the
next TLBL with the same DTFname
modify A or 64 Modifies the open DTF file name when // TLBL dtfname,'DSN,A'
there is more than one open tape file
// TLBL dtfname,'DSN'...64
with the same name (see Notes.)
logical unit S:nnn Overrides the logical unit defined in // TLBL dtfname,'DSN,S:030'
override the DTF with the value (nnn) specified
and assigns the logical unit to a
dummy device.
delete label at DL Delete the label for the file at the // TLBL dtfname,'DSN,DL'
close close of the file.
CA Dynam/T modifies the file name of the DTF being opened to SYS0nnn,
where nnn is the logical unit being used for the file. This is necessary when a
program has two tape files with the same file name concurrently open (usually
one input and one output). This rare occurrence is most likely to appear in
ANSI COBOL programs with two SELECT statements for tape files, both
specifying the same external name.
Both files can be controlled if you use the dynamic file name modification
option on the first of the two TLBLs with the file name MASTER:
// TLBL MASTER,'DSN,A'
// TLBL MASTER,'DSN'
or
// TLBL MASTER,'DSN',,,,,,64
// TLBL MASTER,'DSN'
Suppose the logical unit for the first of the two files to be opened was SYS010.
At OPEN, CA Dynam/T would change the file name to SYS0010 in the program
and on the label track.
Note that if you use the DROP option in conjunction with MODIFY, successive
label records (TLBLs) must use the modified file name (in this case, SYS0010).
CA Dynam/T lets you specify the size of tape reels for specific data sets. This
maximizes your magnetic tape resources. You can indicate tape reel length in
any one of the following ways:
CA Dynam/T provides six length codes (XS, S, MS, M, ML, L) ranging from
extra short to long. They allow for data sets of various lengths.
The chart below details the permitted length specifications, as defined to the
Catalog using the DYNCAT DEFINE statement.
In a TLBL Statement
In DYNCAT Commands
Establish the length of the tape when initializing the volume with the DYNCAT
INT or INTR commands. This information is maintained in the Catalog, not on
the physical VOL1/HDR1 of the tape. Specifying length is unnecessary if your
tape library has only one size of tape reel. Several examples follow:
Examples:
The tape on drive 280 is initialized with volume serial number 1001 as an
extra short tape.
The tape on the drive to which SYS008 is assigned is initialized with volume
serial number 1002 as a short tape, owned by PR.
The tape on drive 281 is read to determine the volume serial number so that
the operator can verify that it is correct. Next the tape is initialized with its
previous number (unless the operator overrides it) as a medium short tape.
The tape on drive 282 is initialized with volume serial number 1003 as a
medium length tape. It will be flagged in the Catalog for cleaning when more
than 100 temporary read/write errors have been recorded for it.
The tape on drive 283 is initialized with volume serial number 1004 as a
medium long tape at a recording density of 1600 BPI phase encoding.
The tape on drive 284 is initialized with volume serial number 1005 as a long
tape. The tape will be rewound when initialization is complete.
Length checking is done only during AVR scanning. CA Dynam/T does not
associate any length attribute with the tape if you do not specify one when
initializing it. CA Dynam/T will not select a tape of unspecified length for a data
set of a specified length.
Examples:
Tape volumes 1005, 1006, and 1007 are redefined in the Catalog as long
tapes.
Tape volume 1007 is redefined in the Catalog as a short tape owned by PR.
Tape volume 1008 is redefined in the Catalog as a long tape, and the owner ID
is reset to blanks.
You can use a tape whose length is different from the specified length of the
data set. This does not alter the tape's length attribute. The operator must
direct CA Dynam/T to the drive containing the scratch tape you will be using;
no other operator action is required to override the specified length. However,
the tape must be in scratch status.
CA Dynam/T enables you to decide the recording density (or mode) of a data
set. You can indicate tape density in the following ways:
The TLBL specification overrides a Catalog specification for the data set.
In TLBL Statements
30 1600 BPI Streaming: high speed and short gap (8809 only)
50 1600 BPI Start-Stop: low speed and long gap (8809 only)
60 1600 BPI Start-Stop: low speed and short gap (8809 only)
90 1600 BPI Streaming: high speed and long gap (8809 only)
D0 6250 BPI
D8 Tape cartridge
0BWE Tape cartridge—encrypted data compaction with buffered write mode (3592E)
Example:
In the Catalog
You can indicate the data set mode in the Catalog by using the DEN=
parameter of DYNCAT's DEFINE/ALTER commands.
DEN=2BWE Tape cartridge (encrypted data compaction with unbuffered write mode—
3592E)
For example, the following commands establish four data sets with the
appropriate recording densities:
You can reply with the responses mentioned in Answering Mount Messages.
When the message specifies a particular drive, CA Dynam/T verifies that the
requested mode can be written before making the assignment. You can
respond cuumm to override the requested mode for this version only. For
example, if you reply 280D0 to the MOUNT message above, CA Dynam/T
creates the tape on drive 280 in 6250 mode.
If no mode is specified for the data set, CA Dynam/T does not check or set the
mode. It uses the mode specified in the PUB for the device allocated (VSE
standard).
Tape Cartridges
Use the Tape Status Display for tape drive and volume information.
CA Dynam/T uses the READ BLOCKID and LOCATE BLOCK channel commands
for positioning and locating files within multifile data sets for tape cartridges.
This facilitates tape reel positioning for multifile data sets that contain
nonstandard file structures.
Stacking Files
Standard and nonstandard files can be stacked on the same tape. For
example, VSAM and non-VSAM files can be backed up to the same tape. Thus,
you can avoid creating largely empty tapes on tape cartridges.
During AVR (when a drive is eligible for AVR), up to the point when a tape
is selected for use
Format:
iiiiii u
or
iiiiii f
NT RDY Sense information received from the drive shows that the
drive is not ready.
NLDPNT Sense information received from the drive shows that the
drive is ready, but not at load point.
f a protected file.
The Status Display will remain until the volume is physically removed from the
drive, or until the next load/unload cycle.
The CA Dynam/T work data set lets you use tape as intermediate storage for a
file while processing a job, then return the tape to the scratch pool when
processing is completed.
Establish the work data set with the DYNCAT DEFINE command. Include the
WORK=YES parameter. For example, this DEFINE statement establishes a
work data set named BGWORK:
You cannot specify retention characteristics for a work data set (such as
cycles, days, or AS-OF-DATE), because a work data set is, by definition,
temporary. You can modify its retention criteria, however, with the DYNCAT
ALTER command.
Work data sets have two characteristics which differentiate them from other
data sets. They are as follows:
You can release work data sets and return them to the scratch pool
immediately at CLOSE by specifying the RELEASE option (R or 04) on the
TLBL statement.
Unreleased work data sets are retained for as long as specified in the
CA Dynam/T option record. While in use, work data sets are completely
protected. You can release them at any CLOSE (input or output).
Partition-Independent Files
// TLBL SYS010,'==WORK'
If the same TLBL were processed in the F3 partition, the resulting file ID would
be F3WORK.
Establish one (or more) work data set names for each partition with DYNCAT;
CA Dynam/T makes sure that the same name is never used in more than one
partition simultaneously.
Example:
For users running other software which changes the SYSLOG ID, the special ID
characters (==) are replaced with the appropriate SYSLOG ID found in the
PUB2.
CPU-Independent Files
Updating the system adapter option record. This option record, the same
used for multi-CPU support for CA Dynam/D, produces a table of CPU
serial numbers, each associated with a unique identification character.
These characters are used to provide CPU-independent data set names in
conjunction with partition-independent data set names.
Examples:
The special character @ will be replaced with the CPU ID established for the
machine. The CPU ID character can appear in either of the following ways:
@ @WORK AWORK
== ==FILE BGFILE
If the CPUID definition phase has not been cataloged, a default value of A is
used whenever the CPUID is required by the system.
Example:
BG // JOB ARRPUPD
DATE 01/22/00, CLOCK 20/14/03
BG // TLBL TAPEOUT,'==@WORK,W'
BG // EXEC MSTROUT
BG CADT007I ***** WORK TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100524 1 *BGAWORK*
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100524 BGAWORK BLK=29
BG // TLBL TAPEIN,'==@WORK,W,R'
BG // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR RP MSTR,W'
BG // EXEC MSTRIO
BG CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=299 100524 BGAWORK
BG CADT007I ***** LABEL TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100699 1 *AR RP MSTR*
BG CADT028I RELEASED TAPEIN INPUT 100524 BGAWORK
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100699 AR RP MSTR BLK=29
BG CADA102I AUDIT TRAIL FILE IS 10 PERCENT FULL.
BG EOJ AURPUPD
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/14/34,DURATION 00/00/31
A temporary data set is created in one step, which can then be inputted or
scratched. The TLBL contains the partition- and CPU-independent data set
name '==@WORK'. CA Dynam/T replaces '==@' with BGA, creating the data
set name BGAWORK, because the job is run in BG partition in CPU A. The W
option forces the file to be rewound, ready for the next step. In the next step,
the file is used for input and both the W and D options are indicated, causing
the tape to be both of the following:
F2 // JOB ARRPUPD
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/19/06
F2 // TLBL TAPEOUT,'==@WORK,W'
F2 // EXEC MSTROUT
F2 CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH TAPEOUT SYS011 DSN=F2AWORK JOB=ARRPUPD
F2 STATUS
F2 CADT015I 298-UA-*DOWN*
F2 CADT015I 299 - BG - SYS010,*
F2 CADT015I 29A - BG - SYS011,*
F2 CADT008D MOUNT SCRATCH TAPEOUT SYS011 DSN=F2AWORK
F2 STOP
AR CASTART BG
BG
BG EOJ PAUSE
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/19/36,DURATION 00/03/86
F1 1Q34I BG WAITING FOR WORK
F1 1Q34I LST WAITING FOR WORK ON 02E
AR CASTART F2
The same job stream as in the previous example is run in partition F2. When
no available scratch tape is found during AVR, CA Dynam/T issues the
CADT008D MOUNT message. The operator responds with STATUS, and finds
that tape drives are either DVCDN (298) or assigned in another partition (299
and 29A). Then the operator issues the STOP command to place the partition
in a wait state and free the console until a tape drive becomes available. The
job running in BG finishes, F2 is restarted with the CASTART command, and
processing continues.
You do not have to catalog new versions of output data sets when running
tests with production JCL. The programmer test option enables you to define a
$TEST jobname in the following ways:
In the DYNAM/T option record, you can define test jobs by specifying an
identifying character string and its starting position within the jobname.
For example, if the DYNAM/T option record specifies:
TESTJOB($$$,6)
When you run a test job, CA Dynam/T does not update the Catalog file at
CLOSE for output data sets. Otherwise, the system functions as usual. All
input files are selected through AVR; output scratch tapes are allocated.
Examples:
Output tapes do not become new versions of the data sets. They are cataloged
as TEST status tapes and are retained until the next DYNCAT SCRATCH
command is run, returning them to SCRATCH status. They will not be called
for as input to production runs. If you request their data set name as input
during a subsequent step of a $TEST job, CA Dynam/T calls the most current
$TEST version as though it were a member of the data set.
You can fully test JCL for jobs that create a file in one step, and then read the
newly created file in a later step. If you request a data set on input which
contains no test versions, CA Dynam/T inputs the appropriate production
version.
Note: All output $TEST multifile data sets are created as single file data sets
with a file sequence of one on separate volumes, because of the many
combinations of production and $TEST tapes possible in a multifile set. This is
to allow testing of a production jobstream that might start by creating other
than the first file in a multifile sequence where the previous files were created
by a true production job. In this way, the mixing of production and test data
on the same volume is prohibited.
You must use one of the following methods to input test versions to production
runs:
As uncontrolled files
Through use of the ACCEPT response to a MOUNT message
The following sample job stream performs these functions. You can perform
other functions, as well.
Example:
This job stream produces all required daily reports. It first backs up the
Catalog file and verifies its integrity. Then it returns all eligible volumes to the
SCRATCH pool. It also provides the following:
An exception list
A list of all active data sets and their associated volumes in alphabetic
sequence
Use only the DYNCAT BACKUP command to back up the Catalog. No other
utility or user-written program properly resolves the internal pointers used in
the Catalog file.
Also, transactions can be logged to the audit file and can be reported upon
using AUDTUTIL.
There are other Catalog maintenance and reporting utilities besides DYNCAT.
This guide describes them in detail.
Catalog Owner ID
You can use the DYNCAT OWN command to change the Catalog ID at any
time. It is best, however, to establish a unique ID when first initializing the
Catalog and to maintain that ID for the life of the Catalog.
Catalog Password
You must specify the Catalog password to gain access to the passwords of
individual password-protected data sets.
Examples:
LIST PASSWORD='UNLOCK'
Password Protection
The following example assigns the password RESTRICT to the data set. The
password is required before the characteristics of the data set can be manually
modified.
To modify the number of retention generations for PAYROLL FILE, you must
issue the following command:
The password is not required for online access to the data set or DYNCAT ADD
modifications of the data set. Use the ALTER command's LOCK option to
prohibit all modifications to a data set (locking the data set):
ALTER 'PAYROLL FILE' LOCK PASSWORD='RESTRICT' (The proper password unlocks the
data set.)
To lock a particular version, the data set as a whole must first be unlocked.
To change a data set password, use the ALTER command. The following
example replaces the PAYROLL FILE password, RESTRICT, with the new
password, SECURITY.
You can establish data set ownership with the DYNCAT DEFINE and ALTER
commands. This is different from Catalog ownership. Data set ownership
enables you to divide the tape library into sublibraries.
The tapes that can be allocated for a data set are limited by data set
ownership to a particular group of volumes, as follows:
All active owned versions of a data set retain the ownership, even after
scratching. Ownership is specified on all data set reports. During AVR,
CA Dynam/T selects output scratch tapes with the same owner as the data
set for which they are required (if the data set has an established owner).
If a scratch tape with the same owner is not available, the operator can
reinitialize another scratch tape to the requested owner.
A volume's data set ownership code is not a physical part of the VOL1 or HDR1
of the tape. Thus, if a scratch volume is added to a data set which has a
certain owner code, the volume is immediately considered a member of that
owner group. You do not have to reinitialize the tape. When this volume is
scratched, it retains the ownership of the last data set of which it was a
member.
Most installations use numeric volume serial numbers; a tape received from
another CA Dynam/T user could easily contain a volume serial identical to one
in the Catalog as a scratch tape.
Use the DYNCAT INT, INTR, SCRPOOL, and ALTER volser commands to
establish an ownership code for a volume. These two-character ownership
attributes are maintained in the Catalog file.
Example:
The DYNCAT BACKUP command backs up the Catalog files. Data set
CA Dynam/T BKUP is established with mode 1600 and owner OP. Option 2 is
used on the TLBL to force unload at CLOSE. A scratch tape with the specified
owner is not found on a drive capable of writing in 1600 mode; a subsequent
CADT008D MOUNT message is issued specifying owner OP and mode 1600.
The operator responds 299.
The operator could also have responded to the CADT010D message with
ACCEPT; then the indicated volume would be reinitialized with owner OP.
IBM has added four modes to indicate a file should be encrypted when written
to tape. Accordingly, support for new density values has been added to Dynam
which, when specified, indicates that a particular data set should be encrypted
when written to tape.
Note: Even if a dataset is defined with KEKL information, the dataset will only
be encrypted if the dataset is defined with an encryption type density. If the
density specification for the dataset is a non-encryption mode the KEKL
information for the dataset is ignored by CA Dynam/T.
Automatic Cataloging/Uncataloging
If all four of these conditions are met, CA Dynam/T generates a Catalog data
set base record for the data set name in the TLBL. The default values are
those specified in the DYNAM/T option record. You can use the DYNCAT ALTER
command to change these values for the new data set.
Data sets which have been added to the Catalog by way of the automatic
catalog feature can be automatically removed from the Catalog. If you
specified AUTCATD(YES) in the DYNAM/T option record, CA Dynam/T
automatically deletes any data set that was automatically added when the last
active version in the data set is scratched.
This option provides a powerful tool for testing and controlling temporary data
sets on tape without requiring Catalog maintenance. You can create a test
version under a unique data set name with specific retention by simply coding
options on the output TLBL. When the specified retention has passed,
CA Dynam/T returns the tape to SCRATCH status, automatically removing the
test data set name from the Catalog.
Example:
Create the data set JOES.TEST and retain it for thirty days.
// TLBL MYFILE,'JOES.TEST,C',30
At the end of the thirty days, CA Dynam/T deletes the data set without any
manual Catalog intervention.
You can define these messages in the Catalog by using the DYNCAT DEFINE or
ALTER commands. They will be issued automatically by the system at the
indicated point. For more information, see the chapter "Maintaining the
Catalog—DYNCAT Program."
To Issue A At Specify
Specify all of the multifile data set attributes only for the first file.
Catalog all subsequent files with the DEFINE command, specifying only the
data set name for the file being cataloged and the data set name for the
previous file on the volume. For example,
Multifile data sets can also be supported as predefined or unchained data sets.
This means the data sets do not need to be written to tape in an exact order
and the data sets do not need to be predefined to the Catalog as multifile data
sets. The TLBL STACK option lets you specify a file's place within a multifile
data set.
Retention attributes defined for the first file are automatically defined for all
subsequent files. Use the DYNCAT ALTER command to assign different
retention characteristics to any but the first file.
Keep in mind that predefined multifile data sets are listed alphabetically on
CA Dynam/T reports. Name these data sets so that they will appear together
on the reports.
Examples:
Defining a multifile-volume
This job stream catalogs four files for a multifile-volume, each with 3-cycle
retention. The files will always be written in the specified sequence: FILE 1 is
the first file on the tape and FILE 4 is the last.
Example:
Note:
You cannot directly catalog a file between two existing files on a multifile-
volume data set. Delete the first data set, which deletes all following data
sets. Then catalog all data sets correctly.
CA Dynam/T takes the file sequence number from the Catalog. Do not
include it on the TLBL statement—it will be ignored.
Creating versions of the same multifile data set simultaneously can lead to
errors and is unsupported.
You cannot perform the RENAME command on any file of a multifile set.
If you perform the ALTER command on one file, it is performed only on the
named file—not on all files of a multifile set.
If you use the ADD command for a multifile data set, the ADD commands
must be performed in proper order.
Example:
AVR functions in its usual manner for the first file of a multifile data set.
However, CA Dynam/T automatically positions subsequent files only if AVR can
locate the volumes. The tape must be at load point. Otherwise, you must
assign the logical unit external to the AVR facility by doing the following:
Indicate the HOLD option to use a logical unit from the previous file
Suppose file three ends on volume one. When you create file four,
CA Dynam/T calls for volume one and correctly positions the tape.
You can issue the ACCEPT override for multifile data sets in response to the
CADT004D MOUNT message (not the CADT005D WRONG TAPE message):
This ensures that the correct multifile version is read. Correct positioning can
be performed only through the Catalog definition for multifile versions.
When opening tape files that are members of a multifile set, CA Dynam/T
modifies the DTF to NOREWIND. The file can subsequently be processed
without additional positioning, so that you can process files as multifile data
sets even if they were not originally so intended. Use any of the tape
positioning options on the TLBL or in the Catalog to override the default
specification.
Example:
BG // JOB ARDESCUP
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/34/09
BG // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR DESC 1',,,,,,24
BG // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR DESC 2',,,,,,2
BG // EXEC MSTROUT
BG CADT007I **** LABEL TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100723 1 *AR DESC 1*
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100723 AR DESC 1 BLK=12
BG // EXEC MSTROUT
BG CADT023I **** DSN 'AR DESC 2' FILE NO. 2 BEING CREATED ON TAPE
100723 299
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100723 AR DESC 2 BLK=5
BG EOJ ARDESCUP
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/34/32,DURATION 00/00/22
BG // JOB ARDESCUP
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/35/25
BG // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR DESC 3',,,,,,1
BG // EXEC MSTROUT
BG CADT020D MOUNT VOLUME 100723 FOR FILE NO. 3 DSN='AR DESC 3' SYS011
BG CADT023I **** DSN 'AR DESC 3'FILE NO. 3 BEING CREATED ON TAPE
100723 299
BG CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=299 100723 AR DESC 3 BLK=27
BG EOJ ARDESCUP
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/35/53,DURATION 00/00/28
Option 8 prevents AVR for the second OPEN, directing CA Dynam/T to the
same drive used for file 1, because the same volume is to be used for file 2 on
the same logical unit. The 16 option is required, because the same dtfname is
used for both TLBLs; when the file is opened the second time, the current TLBL
will be used.
In the second job, AVR cannot locate the required volume; the CADT020D
message is issued. When the volume is located, it is assigned and positioned
for file 3, which is then created.
Example:
F2 // JOB ARDESCUP
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/46/38
F2 // ASSGN SYS010,299
F2 // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR DESC 1,H,D'
F2 // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR DESC 2,H,D'
F2 // TLBL TAPEIN,'AR DESC 3,U'
F2 // ASSGN SYS011,29A
F2 // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR DESC 1,H,D'
F2 // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR DESC 2,H,D'
F2 // TLBL TAPEOUT,'AR DESC 3,W'
F2 // EXEC MSTRIO
F2 CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=299 100723 AR DESC 1
F2 CADT007I **** LABEL TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100744 1 *AR DESC 1*
F2 CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100744 AR DESC 1 BLK=12
F2 // EXEC MSTRIO
F2 CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=299 100723 AR DESC 2
F2 CADT023I **** DSN 'AR DESC 2' FILE NO. 2 BEING CREATED ON TAPE
100744 29A
F2 CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100744 AR DESC 2 BLK=5
F2 // EXEC MSTRIO
F2 CADT032I ASSIGNED TAPEIN SYS010=299 100723 AR DESC 3
F2 CADT023I **** DSN 'AR DESC3' FILE NO. 3 BEING CREATED ON TAPE
100744 29A
F2 CADT031I *CLOSED* TAPEOUT SYS011=29A 100744 AR DESC 3 BLK=27
F2 EOJ ARDESCUP
DATE 01/22/00,CLOCK 20/47/58,DURATION 00/01/20
Example:
Submit identical dtfnames consecutively if you are including them in one job
step. This restriction is imposed by IBM label record management routines.
// TLBL UIN,'FILE1,H,D'
// TLBL UIN,'FILE2,H,D'
// TLBL UIN,'FILE3,W'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT FILE1,H,D'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT FILE2,H,D'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT FILE3,H'
NOT
// TLBL UIN,'FILE1,H,D'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT FILE1,H,D'
// TLBL UIN,'FILE2,H,D'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT FILE2,H,D'
// TLBL UIN,'FILE3,W'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT FILE3,W'
By using the HOLD(H) TLBL option with no close tape disposition, R, U, and so
on, the rewind default for the A to Z parameters can be overridden so that the
tape does not rewind at close. You cannot have chained DSNs and unchained
DSNs on the same tape.
To stack other files on a tape you must always reference the last active file on
that tape.
The first DSN in the unchained multifile set dictates all volume criteria,
density, tape length, and so on, for that tape and subsequent files, regardless
of what is specified on the TLBL or the Catalog.
All output $TEST multifile data sets (unchained or predefined) are created as
single file data sets with a file sequence of one on separate volumes.
File sequence numbers for unchained multifile versions are relative to the start
of the volume on which the file exists. File sequence numbers for predefined
multifiles are relative to the volume that starts the whole multifile set. In
effect, the file sequence for unchained versions start over with each new tape
volume, where predefined versions continue incrementing from the first file on
the first volume of the set.
The following JCL examples show how to create multifile data sets using the
STACK= option.
Examples:
Note: REF must be used as the DTFNAME and filea must be the last active file
on that VOLSER.
// TLBL REF,'filea',STACK=A
// TLBL NEWFILE,'fileb',STACK=A
// EXEC pgm
// TLBL OUT1,'filea',STACK=B
// TLBL OUT2,'fileb',STACK=B
// TLBL OUT3,'filec',STACK=B
// TLBL OUT,'filea',STACK=*
// EXEC pgm
// TLBL REF,'filea',STACK=*
// TLBL OUT,'fileb',STACK=*
// EXEC pgm
// TLBL REF,'fileb',STACK=*
// TLBL OUT,'filec',STACK=*
// EXEC pgm
The first data set on the multifile set was cataloged with this option.
Three asterisks (***) in the TLBL's DSN indicate to CA Dynam/T that this
could be an automatic multifile (AMF) data set. CA Dynam/T replaces the three
asterisks with a three-digit number if the following conditions are satisfied:
If you are opening the file as output, CA Dynam/T generates this number
by adding one to the number of the previous file in the AMF set.
If the file is opened as input, CA Dynam/T retrieves this number from the
Catalog. The number is determined by any one of the following, in the
same order of priority shown here:
Create automatic multifile data sets with the DYNCAT DEFINE command. The
parameter MF=AUTO in the DEFINE statement indicates this is an AMF data
set. The PREVFILE parameter is not permitted. The DSN must contain three
asterisks (***), or it will be rejected. This defines the base data set name for
the AMF set. This name should permanently reside in the Catalog.
Any combination of letters and numbers can be used as with any other DSN.
The only restriction is that there must be three asterisks (***) somewhere in
the DSN; they indicate where the three-digit numbers will be inserted.
The following are valid data set names for AMF data sets:
'AMF***'
'PAYROLL BACKUP***'
'FILE***PR TRANS'
Example:
This DEFINE statement creates a multifile data set named 'AMF***'. It is the
prototype for the AMF set.
A program creating the file above using file name OUTFILE would require a
TLBL as below:
// TLBL OUTFILE,'AMF***'
The first time this job is run, CA Dynam/T creates version one of data set
AMF001. The next time, CA Dynam/T finds a valid version for AMF001; it
subsequently creates a new data set, AMF002.
If the data set AMF002 was not closed or if it was closed and later scratched
manually, this same DSN would be used the next time the job was run. In
other words, the last file on the existing AMF set is checked to see if it contains
a good version. Depending on whether it contains a valid version CA Dynam/T
does the following:
If it does contain a valid version, CA Dynam/T adds one to the DSN and
creates a new DSN as the last file on the AMF set. Each data set created
will have the same characteristics (retention, owner, and so on.) as the
base data set.
If it does not contain a valid version, CA Dynam/T uses the DSN again.
Use the DYNCAT ALTER command whenever you want to start the next file on
a separate volume:
This statement creates the next AMF data set name in sequence. For instance,
if the last DSN on the current set was AMF008, CA Dynam/T would create DSN
AMF009 and place it in the Catalog as file one of a new AMF set. The next time
the job creating the AMF DSN is run, AMF009 is used. You can then delete
DSNs AMF002 through AMF008. This frees space in the Catalog. The base
DSN, AMF***, must remain in the Catalog; it contains pointers to the data set
names currently in use.
If you manually scratch a tape other than the last DSN of an AMF set, you
must tell CA Dynam/T which DSN to use next for output.
For instance, suppose data sets AMF001 through AMF008 had been created,
but data sets AMF005 through AMF008 contained bad data and had to be
recreated, then do the following:
1. Scratch DSN AMF005 using DYNCAT DELETE. This would scratch AMF005
through AMF008 because CA Dynam/T always scratches forward on
chained multifile data sets:
This update statement tells CA Dynam/T to use DSN AMF005 for outputting
the next file of this AMF set. The same procedure must be followed when
members of the current AMF set are deleted.
Several methods are available to call for the desired input AMF data set. The
following examples assume that AMF001 through AMF014 have all been
created on the same tape. AMF014 is the latest (last) file. Each of the
following will result in DSN AMF007 being the data set requested (provided the
file is being opened for input):
Subsequent files of AMF sets are also subsequent generations; thus, cyclic
control of these data sets does not apply. You can set retention dates and use
the MF=NEW option to divide the AMF data sets into easily manageable groups
of tapes.
The DYNCAT RENAME command enables you to rename an entire AMF group
and begin the AMF group processing over again with file one and 001 as the
name.
Example:
Suppose that three versions of the AMF group PAY*** were created in
December, that it is desirable to save the December versions, and that
processing begins again in January.
PAY001 (file 1)
PAY002 (file 2)
PAY003 (file 3)
PAYDEC001 (file 1)
PAYDEC002 (file 2)
PAYDEC003 (file 3)
The versions created in December are retained. The next time the AMF name
'PAY***' is used to create a file, the data set will be created as file one of the
scratch tape, using the name PAY001. The PAYDECnnn data sets are changed
from AMF status to normal multifile status, which prevents anyone from
accidentally adding another file to the tape after PAYDEC003. You can apply
normal retention to the new data set names.
Note that RPG unlabeled tapes defined using the M operand are really
nonstandard labeled tapes and cannot be used with the FLT option.
Sorts
Tape Utilities
DUMP/RESTORE Packages
Tape files which are not opened and closed using tape DTFs can nevertheless
be placed under CA Dynam/T control through use of the TDYNASN
OPEN/CLOSE function. Do not use TDYNASN DUMMY assignments for this type
of file or for any file that uses physical IOCS without performing a logical
OPEN. For more information about TDYNASN, see the chapter "Supporting
Tape File Management."
// TLBL IJSYS04,'DSN'
CA Dynam/T does not support the REWIND and UNLOAD tape control options
because of the FORTRAN DTF type. Also, you cannot release work data sets at
CLOSE or use FORTRAN tape files that violate VSE LIOCS conventions for tape
files.
VSE Version 3 and higher support standard label tapes for backup and restore.
With RESTORE=ONLINE, no special CA Dynam processing is required. With
RESTORE=STANDALONE, LIBR performs pre-OPEN processing. The following is
an example of the necessary job control:
Note: The Dynam/T HOLD option must be specified, because LIBR will access
the tape drive after close. If the tape drive was dynamically attached by either
the DYNT/VM or 3494 interface, it will not be automatically detached at close
because of the HOLD option. After the LIBR job completes, run a TDYNASN
DETACH job to detach any dynamically attached tape drive.
STANDALONE PHASES
IF PRESENT
HEADER LIBRARY MEMBER
IF PRESENT
******** TAPE MARK #1 *********
LIBR BFID RECORD
HISTORY FILE IF PRESENT
******** TAPE MARK #2 *********
LIBR FHDR RECORD -
LIBRARY DATA RECORDS multiple occurrences if more than
LIBR EOBF RECORDS one (sub)library is processed
LIBR DRID RECORDS -
******** TAPE MARK #3 *********
******** TAPE MARK #4 *********
LIBR EOB RECORD
******** TAPE MARK #5 *********
******** TAPE MARK #6 *********
With the NOLABEL CA Dynam/T supports most variations of LIBR backup tapes through use of
Option the NOLABEL option in conjunction with TDYNASN job control statements.
Multifile data sets under CA Dynam/T's control, however, are not supported.
The example job control shows that TDYNASN JCL statements have the
following properties:
Be sure to reinitialize the tape volume the next time it is used for output when
using TAPEOPT=NOLABEL; the VOL1 label has been overwritten by LIBR.
Exceptions The information provided so far applies to both online and standalone LIBR
backups, with the following exceptions:
Consequently, when the volume is opened by LIBR (after having already been
AVR'd and opened by TDYNASN), it is not treated as a controlled data set, and
thus EOV would be uncontrolled, and second and subsequent volumes would
not be associated with data sets in the CA Dynam Catalog. Therefore, make
note of the following:
There can be no intervening labels between the TDYNASN OPEN and the
TDYNASN CLOSE steps
The following pages show various examples of the job control used to back up
and restore catalog-controlled files.
The following example shows the job control required to RESTORE an online
backup from a CA Dynam/T-controlled data set created by the job above:
This is an example of the job control required to BACKUP LIBR objects to a one
volume CA Dynam/T-controlled data set using RESTORE=STANDALONE.
// JOB BACKUP
// TLBL DUMMY,'DATASET.NAME,H' /* CAT CONTROL TAPEOPT=NOLABEL */
// EXEC PGM=TDYNASN
OPEN DUMMY,SYSXXX,OUTPUT,U /* AVR AND OPEN UNLABELLED */
/* /* SCRATCH TAPE */
// EXEC PGM=LIBR
BACKUP LIB=XXXXXXX - /* MUST BE SYSTEM LIBRARY(S) */
RESTORE=STANDALONE - /* ALL VALID LIBR BACKUP */
TAPE=SYSXXX - /* OPTIONS ARE SUPPORTED */
/*
// EXEC PGM=TDYNASN
CLOSE DUMMY,SYSXXX,OUTPUT /* UPDATE CATALOG, NO LABELS */
/* /* SINCE LAST TDYNASN */
// MTC CCC,SYSXXX /* POSITION TAPE */
/&
The following example shows the job control required for an online RESTORE
of a member from a CA Dynam/T-controlled data set created by the job above.
Note that the data set created by the above job stream must be entirely
contained on one tape volume. Multivolume data sets under CA Dynam/T's
control are not supported when using the RESTORE=STANDALONE option.
With Forced Label You may choose to use Forced Label Tape support, instead of specifying
Tape Support TAPEOPT=NOLABEL in the catalog definitions of LIBR data sets, with LIBR
files.
It lets you BACKUP and RESTORE a single (sub)library from a standard labeled
CA Dynam/T-controlled data set. For example:
Tape positioning through TLBL or catalog option will cause errors, because
positioning takes place at close, before the LIBR EOB record/file has been
written.
Trailer labels are written at close, before the LIBR EOB record. This does
not interfere with the RESTORE of the backed up library but may affect
other LIBR functions.
Multiple (sub)libraries cannot be written to one data set, because the DTF
in use has been modified to specify standard labels using Forced Label
Tape support. This means that trailer labels are written at CLOSE, which
occurs once for each (sub)library backed up.
The following example shows the job control required to RESTORE a single
(sub)library backed up to a CA Dynam/T-controlled data set as above:
1. Define a tape device in the IPL procedure that does NOT exist.
For example:
ADD CAA,3480
For example:
// EXEC CACCDBU0
ALT DTOPTIONS CPU(*) PWRCUU(CAA) REFRESH(YES)
/*
where:
,DL Deletes the label for the file at the close of the file.
or
O cmd,XMT,CAA,TLBL=xxxx
where:
CAA is the tape address that was added to the IPL procedure and
defined to CA Dynam/T with the PWRCUU parameter.
// TLBL dtfname,'dsn,Z'
To create the tape, issue the following POWER PACCOUNT command with the
dtfname as specified in the TLBL:
{PACCOUNT|J } tapeaddr,,dtfname
For more information about coding and using the DYNAM/T option record, see
the Programming Guide.
You can issue an individual SET command for each operand defined or a
single SET command specifying all of the operands.
If you specify a single SET command with multiple options, separate the
operands by a comma (no blank spaces).
[ CPCMD='command' ]
SET [ DYNAMT= {OFF|ON } ]
[ $JOBEXIT= {AFTER|BEFORE } ]
[ LABELMSG= {ON|OFF } ]
The following list describes the SET command operands more fully. They are
presented alphabetically.
DYNAMT= Indicates whether CA Dynam/T is to process in the partition in which the SET
command is issued.
The effect of this command is permanent in static partitions until the next SET
DYNAMT command is issued in the same partition or until the VSE machine is
IPLed.
If you have specified processing in the standard $JOBEXIT which will effect
CA Dynam processing, (i.e. CA Dynam option substitution for TLBL|DLBLs),
code the SET $JOBEXIT=BEFORE command.
LABELMSG= Determines whether the CADC950I message will appear for TLBL statements
containing CA Dynam option codes. This message displays the original file ID
information before processing options are removed by the CA Dynam common
Job Exit.
The CADC950I message will appear on SYSLST if '// OPTION LOG' is coded, on
SYSLOG if LOG is coded and on both SYSLST and SYSLOG if both options are
coded.
Tape Drives
The DTPOOL option record provides tape drive pooling support for CA
Dynam/T. The available tape drives are defined into pools for the installation
as a whole, by both the CPU ID and the partition, or by either the CPU ID or
the partition. When CA Dynam/T AVR is attempting to locate a tape, only the
drives in the pool are searched (in the desired order). If there is no DTPOOL
option record, AVR searches all available drives in the order in which they
were defined in the PUB table by ADD statements at IPL. You can thus exclude
certain tape units from AVR, such as dummy tape units or tape units with
limited speed or mode capability.
Tape drive pooling also facilitates the mounting of tapes because you can
change the sequence in which tapes are searched for. For instance, you can
search the drives nearest the tape library first.
Note that DTPOOL only affects CA Dynam/T during AVR scans; you can select
any drive defined in the PUB table in a cuu response to the MOUNT message.
For more information, see the DTPOOL option record in the Programming
Guide.
A multi-CPU installation that is sharing tape drives can use tape drive locking
(DTLOCK) if both of the following conditions are satisfied:
The DTLOCK option record is coded to define a common LOCK name which
can be referenced by all CPUs for a specific tape unit.
IBM does not provide a standard facility for protection of shared tape drives in
a multiple system environment. With DTLOCK, an external LOCK option record
is issued whenever CA Dynam/T is ready to access a tape drive. This assures
that the tape drive is not in use by CA Dynam/T from another CPU. If it is in
use, the drive is bypassed during AVR or considered NOT AVAILABLE if the
operator attempts to override AVR. The LOCK is released when CA Dynam/T
decides not to use the drive or processing for the file is completed.
The standard VSE LOCK option record (available on VSE r2 and above) is used,
so abnormal termination of any kind results in the LOCK being cleared by end-
of-job routines automatically. In addition, the AR command interface provides
for operator-controlled locking or unlocking of the tape drive.
Open and close files when this is not accomplished by the programs that
read and write them.
Establish ASSGNs for tape drives before executing the program that opens
the file.
This format makes the specified logical unit assignment to a dummy device.
The logical unit assignment must be correctly made before opening the file,
because some programs, such as CA SORT, can use either tape or disk
devices. A dummy ASSGN satisfies this requirement, allowing AVR to be used
at OPEN time. The default dummy devices are 7F0 through 7FF, but can be
altered by changing the DYNAM/T option record. TDYNASN uses as many of
these devices as are necessary. The dummy devices are in device-down
(DVCDN) status and ownership bits are not set on. This prevents job control
from ever trying to use such a device.
You can normally use UPSI 01 to assign all LUBS to the same dummy PUB.
However, this is not permitted with the MERGE and TP functions of CA SORT.
They verify that all input files are assigned to different devices.
Never use the // ASSGN SYSxxx,DUMMY format of TDYNASN for any program
that does I/O on a tape file without opening it (such as DITTO).
Examples:
// EXEC TDYNASN
// ASSGN SYS001,DUMMY (would be assigned to 7F0)
// ASSGN SYS002,DUMMY (would be assigned to 7F1)
// ASSGN SYS003,DUMMY (would be assigned to 7F2)
/*
// UPSI 01 (make all assigns to same dummy device)
// EXEC TDYNASN
// ASSGN SYS001,DUMMY (would be assigned to 7F0)
// ASSGN SYS002,DUMMY (would be assigned to 7F0)
// ASSGN SYS003,DUMMY (would be assigned to 7F0)
/*
Normally, all ASSGNs can be made to the same dummy device by using UPSI
01. However, when performing the CA SORT MERGE function, you must use
different dummy devices to satisfy all of the checks of the MERGE function.
Format Two The second format of the ASSGN statement assigns the first SYS number to
the same device as the second SYS number.
// ASSGN SYS004,SYS005
Example:
// EXEC TDYNASN
// ASSGN SYS004,SYS005
/*
This command locates the proper tape and makes the logical unit assignment:
ASSGN filename,SYSxxx{,INPUT|OUTPUT}[,S|U]
You must include a TLBL for the file name before executing TDYNASN.
INPUT locates the data set specified in the TLBL statement and makes the logical unit
assignment to that drive.
OUTPUT locates a scratch tape and makes the assignment to that drive.
S creates a DTF with standard labels for input or output. S is the default.
Example:
// TLBL SORTOUT,'DSN'
// TLBL SORTIN1,'DSN'
// EXEC TDYNASN
ASSGN SORTOUT,SYS001,OUTPUT
ASSGN SORTIN1,SYS002,INPUT
/*
SORTIN Files
The case of Filename SORTINx is special. TDYNASN finds the specified data set
for the first SORTINx ASSGN encountered. Then, an ASSGN for SORTIN2-9 is
equated to the first SORTIN assignment. Any time SORTIN1 is encountered, it
is assigned to the tape drive on which the specified data set is found. UPSI 1
overrides this and causes actual assignments to be made for each SORTIN file.
The following options provide a variety of methods for handling SORTIN files:
Option One Using dummy ASSGNs to permit AVR when SORT needs each input file.
Examples of this option are shown under Format One of "Using The ASSGN
Statement."
Option Two Using one tape drive for all SORTIN files, locating the drive with AVR. For
example, in this case, an ASSGN is made to the same tape drive for each
SORTIN file.
Option Three Alternating SORTIN files between two tape drives, locating the first two input
files with AVR, as shown in the example below.
Option Four Locating all input files prior to sorting. This option would have to be used for a
merge where all SORTIN tapes have to be opened at the same time, for
example,
TDYNASN performs the OPEN and CLOSE functions so that CA Dynam/T can
control tape files not opened and closed with tape DTFs. Use these functions to
control SYSIPT, SYSLST, SYSPCH, and 1400 Emulator tapes.
The OPEN and CLOSE commands have the same format as the ASSGN
command. They are effective for single volume files only. Volume switching is
not supported.
Leaves the tape positioned following the header records and tape mark
TDYNASN normally reads input from SYSIPT. When the OPEN function is used
for SYSIPT, TDYNASN must be directed to read its input from SYSRDR. The
use of UPSI 001 reassigns SYSIPT and causes the TDYNASN OPEN function to
read its input from SYSRDR instead.
CLOSE Command The CLOSE command causes the CA Dynam Catalog to be updated but does
not actually close the file; it does not write an EOF1 record and tape mark.
This can be done with an MTC job control command; the TDYNASN CLOSE
function does not release the assignment.
Note: The CLOSE command has to access the original label (TLBL) that was
opened, generally by the OPEN command. If this is not done, the CLOSE will
be unsuccessful.
Example:
// EXEC LIBR
/*
// MTC RUN,SYSIPT
/&
Note: Dynamic LUB allocation must be bypassed for the SYSPCH tape.
DETACH Command Issue the DETACH command only if the DYNVM Extension interface is active.
This command passes a request to DYNVM to detach the indicated tape drive
from the VSE pool and assign it to the VM free tape pool. The format is:
DETACH filename,SYSnnn
Example:
VTSTOP Command Issue the VTSTOP command if the HOLD option was used when creating a
VTAPE using the Dynam/T automatic VTAPE interface. The VTSTOP command
will release the assignment to the specified logical unit and then issue the
appropriate VTAPE STOP command. The format is:
VTSTOP SYSnnn
Example:
UPSI 0001 Cause TDYNASN to indicate 80-byte records when assigning/opening SYSIPT
tapes.
User Labels
User labels required by a program must always precede TDYNASN if any labels
are also required by a TDYNASN function. Otherwise, when encountering label
information after TDYNASN, job control writes over any labels encountered
prior to TDYNASN.
Output one file on the same volume, from multiple input files on separate
volumes
Output multiple files on separate volumes, from multiple input files on the
same volume
Output multiple files on the same volume, from multiple input files on
separate volumes
TDYNCOPY uses the Filename UIN for input files on SYS004 and the Filename
UOUT for output files on SYS005. If SYS005 is assigned to IGNORE, processing
for the output file is bypassed.
Storage Requirements
TDYNCOPY determines the block and record size inline. A second I/O area will
be allocated from the partition GETVIS to do the reblocking. The size of the
second I/O area will be the NEW blocksize. Valid output blocksize is up to
65535 bytes.
With the advent of HDR2 labels being maintained, the HDR2 could contain
information inconsistent with the actual tape contents. Without MODON 10
activated (OFF), TDYNCOPY issues message CADT572E and cancels. With
MODON 10 activated (ON), CADT572W is issued as a warning only message.
Optional Functions
The optional functions are indicated by // UPSI statements. You can use any
combination of UPSI settings, except for // UPSI x1xx1xxx (48).
This bit prevents the tape from being rewound at OPEN or CLOSE (unless the
TLBL option is present to force a REWIND or UNLOAD). Therefore, either
multiple single-file volumes or multifile volumes can be processed. The last
input file is unloaded at CLOSE, however, unless the TLBL option overrides it.
This bit causes the output files to be written to the same volume (or multiple
volumes, if the files are controlled by CA Dynam/T).
The stack bit concatenates all input files as one output file. This is similar to a
merge function. The absence of this bit causes each input file to be copied as a
separate output file.
This function causes TDYNCOPY to request the logical record size and new
blocking factor from the console. If either the stacking or reblocking function is
being used, all checkpoint records from the input files are bypassed and a
console message is issued. Only one set of reblocking parameters is accepted.
Run job streams which use TDYNCOPY for copying multiple files, either
both stacking and reblocking without operator intervention, or stacking or
reblocking without operator intervention.
This setting is necessary only when the input files are not CA
Dynam/T-controlled data sets. In this case, use options U or 2. Be sure to use
this setting when the multiple input files indication is set and the uncontrolled
input files are not on the same volume.
FILES=nnnn The user-specified number of files to be copied (in place of the operator
response to the CADT501D message).
Valid only if UPSI 80 (MULTIPLE INPUT FILES) is on. It must appear on the
first control statement.
LRECL=nnnn, NRECS=nnn
The values specified by the user indicate to TDYNCOPY the logical record
length and desired number of records per block (in place of the operator
responses to the CADT503D and CADT504D messages). LRECL and NRECS
must immediately follow the FILES= parameters and can only be specified
once.
UIN=REW|RUN|NOR
UOUT=REW|RUN|NOR
They indicate the desired disposition of the tape when the indicated file is
closed. If not specified, the default is to unload the tape.
UIN and UOUT apply separately to each file. If the user has specified UPSI 02
in conjunction with UPSI 80 and the FILES= operand, every time a new file is
opened, another input statement will be accepted to process options for the
file. This means that UIN and UOUT parameters for separate files must appear
on separate commands.
UIN and UOUT are valid with any other UPSI settings, as long as UPSI
xxxxxx1x is on.
Examples:
// JOB TDYNCOPY
// UPSI 00000000
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN',,,,,,2
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN',,,,,,2
// EXEC TDYNCOPY,SIZE=128K
/&
Three input files on separate volumes to be written as three output files on the
same volume
// JOB TDYNCOPY
// UPSI 11000000
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN 1',,,,,,18
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN 2',,,,,,18
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN 3'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN 1',,,,,,24
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN 2',,,,,,24
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN 3'
// EXEC TDYNCOPY,SIZE=128K
/&
Two input files on the same volume to be written as two output files on
separate volumes
// JOB TDYNCOPY
// UPSI 10000000
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN 1',,,,,,24
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN 2'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN 1',,,,,,18
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN 2'
// EXEC TDYNCOPY,SIZE=128K
/&
// JOB TDYNCOPY
// UPSI 10001000
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN 1',,,,,,18
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN'2',,,,,,18
// TLBL UIN,'INPUT DSN 3'
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN'
// EXEC TDYNCOPY,SIZE=128K
/&
Two unlabeled input files on separate volumes to be written as two data sets
on the same multifile volume
// JOB TDYNCOPY
// UPSI 11100001
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN 1',,,,,,24
// TLBL UOUT,'OUTPUT DSN 2',,,,,,2
// EXEC TDYNCOPY,SIZE=128K
/&
Note: Establish multifile input or output data sets in the Catalog if they are to
be controlled by CA Dynam/T.
A prefix
This program does not skip to any channels. It therefore needs to know the
number of blank lines to skip between printed numbers.
a 1- to 6-digit number
END=nnnnnn Specifies the ending, numeric part of the VOLSER. It must be greater than or
equal to BEGIN.
a 1- to 6-digit number
DIGITS=nnnnnn Optional. Signifies the size of the numeric part of the label. The default is 6
minus the length of the prefix.
INCrement=nnnnnn Optional. Specifies a number to add to each label number to determine the
next label number to print.
a 1- to 6-digit number
SKIP=n Optional. Indicates the number of blank lines between labels. The default is 9.
Example:
CHKPT/RSTRT Program—TDYNRST
If the program terminates normally, all files are cataloged as usual. However,
if it terminates early for any reason, and a restart is to be performed,
TDYNRST must be executed immediately before the RSTRT statement. The
operator is prompted to enter parameters that define the CA
Dynam/T-controlled files involved in the restart. When these have been
defined, TDYNRST does the following:
Verifies that the volumes specified by the operator are the correct
volumes.
Updates the label records and the Catalog entries to allow processing to
continue under CA Dynam/T control.
Establish the desired mode specification for output tapes on the ASSGN
statement. However, all other CA Dynam/T options are recognized from
the TLBL.
Make sure to specify the correct volume serial and sequence numbers when
entering the parameters; the Catalog is updated as soon as the numbers are
verified. Define each tape file to be restarted under CA Dynam/T control to
TDYNRST. When the last tape file has been defined, enter EOB/END to
terminate TDYNRST processing.
filename,volser,volseq,{I|O}
Example:
// JOB UPDATE
// ASSGN SYS010,283 CHECKPOINT FILE
// TLBL TAPEIN,'MASTER FILE' USES SYS008
// TLBL TAPEOUT,'MASTER FILE' USES SYS009
// EXEC UPDATE
/&
The data set MASTER FILE is a CA Dynam/T-controlled data set. TAPEIN uses
SYS008 and TAPEOUT uses SYS009. The checkpoint file is SYS010 on drive
283. Checkpoint number 0007 was taken in volume two of TAPEIN, serial
number 000817, and volume three of TAPEOUT, serial number 000243. The
restart JCL might be:
// JOB UPDATE
// ASSGN SYS010,283 CHECKPOINT FILE
// ASSGN SYS008,280
// TLBL TAPEIN,'MASTER FILE' USES SYS008
// ASSGN SYS009,281
// TLBL TAPEOUT,'MASTER FILE' USES SYS009
// EXEC TDYNRST
TAPEIN,817,2,I
TAPEOUT,243,3,O
/&
// JOB UPDATE
CADT550I TDYNRST BEGIN
CADT570D ENTER 'Y' FOR TDYNRST PARAMETERS
(EOB)
CADT551D ENTER TDYNRST PARAMETERS
TAPEIN,817,2,I
CADT561I FILE TAPEIN LABEL HAS BEEN UPDATED
CADT551D ENTER TDYNRST PARAMETERS
TAPEOUT,243,3,0
CADT561I FILE TAPEOUT LABEL HAS BEEN UPDATED
CADT551D ENTER TDYNRST PARAMETERS
(EOB)
CADT563I TDYNRST END
(REGULAR DOS RESTART MESSAGES)
Note: TDYNRST reads control statements from SYSIPT rather than SYSLOG
when executed with an UPSI 1.
Described later in this section are the control statements TDYNSYNC uses to
perform a variety of functions.
In order to use the XSYSTEM interface, you must define Multi:ACCESS (MACC)
queue files formatted as DOS- or OS-formatted files. The MACC queue files
serve as data transmission media, or message paths. They are defined in the
PATHID parameter of the DTPATH option record. A separate MACC queue file
must be created and initialized once for each pathid specified in the DTPATH
option record.
The MACC queue files must reside on DASD devices accessible by the FROM
and TO systems using the corresponding paths defined in the DTPATH option
record.
Message paths are accessed by the system using direct physical IOCS and
should be defined as SD files for label purposes. It is recommended that you
locate MACC queue files on physical disk volumes other than those that
contain the Catalog or Audit Trail data sets.
The DDNAME must be one of the PATHID values specified in the DTPATH
option record.
Execute the MACC INITIAL command once for each unique PATHID specified in
the DTPATH option record. When DYNCAT has completed processing, the
message paths will be ready for use.
Note: If any of the participating systems run MVS, the MACC queue files
should be allocated on MVS to ensure inclusion in the MVS Master Catalog.
The synchronization facilities accept the extracts from each system as input
and perform the analysis. All discrepancies are indicated on an exception
report, and the information needed to resolve the discrepancies is written to
two distinct update files, one for each system.
Avoid updating the Catalogs between EXTRACT and APPLY functions. The
APPLY uses the status information in effect at the time when the EXTRACT was
performed; any intermediate updates followed by an APPLY can cause serious
errors.
Each TDYNSYNC control statement starts with one of the commands shown
below in logical processing order:
CATNAME= Optional. Can be specified with other TDYNSYNC commands. It defines the
source catalog for the EXTRACT, and the target catalog for the APPLY and
REMOVE commands.
EXTRACT Produces a file (dtfname=CAT1OUT) and a report that represent all entries in
the Catalog.
SYNC Takes as input the files produced by the EXTRACTs of the two catalogs
(dtfnames of CAT1IN and CAT2IN), synchronizes the information, then
produces two output files, one for each Catalog (dtfnames CAT1OUT and
CAT2OUT). A report of catalog entries is also produced.
APPLY Takes as input one of the output files (dtfname=CAT1IN) from the SYNC
command and updates the catalog.
APPLY Command The APPLY command takes as input one of the two output files from the SYNC
processing and updates the CA Dynam Catalog with tape volume status
information. When the CA Dynam/T TDYNSYNC APPLY commands for each CA
Dynam Catalog, and the equivalent commands for each participating database
(such as DYNUPDTE for CA 1 MVS) are completed, the tape management
systems will be synchronized with respect to tape volume status.
Format:
APPLY
Examples:
Note:
The dtfname for the input file must be specified as CAT1IN, even if the file
being used as input was created using dtfname CAT2OUT from the SYNC
step.
The default dtfname of the catalog from which the volume status
information is to be extracted is CAICATL. If you are extracting data from
another catalog, use the CATNAME control statement to specify the
dtfname of the catalog.
CATNAME Command The CATNAME command is used to define the source catalog for the EXTRACT
command, and the target catalog for the APPLY and REMOVE commands.
Format:
CATNAME=dtfname
where:
dtfname
is the dtfname of the catalog. A DLBL and EXTENT must be specified for the
dtfname.
Note:
If the CATNAME control statement is used, it must be specified before the
EXTRACT, APPLY or REMOVE commands.
If the CATNAME control statement is not specified, the default dtfname for
the catalog is CAICATL.
EXTRACT Command The EXTRACT command is used to extract volume status information and
produce an output file from the input catalog. The output file is created using
dtfname=CAT1OUT.
Format:
EXTRACT
Example:
Note:
TDYNSYNC can only extract volume status data from the CA Dynam
Catalog. To extract information from the CA 1 Catalog, use the CA 1
supplied DYNEXTR utility.
The default dtfname of the catalog from which the volume status
information is to be extracted is CAICATL. If you are extracting data from
another catalog, use the CATNAME control statement to specify the
dtfname of the catalog.
REMOVE Command The REMOVE command is used to remove externally controlled volume records
from the CA Dynam Catalog. In effect, the REMOVE command reverses the
processes of the APPLY command for the specified node (CPUID).
Format:
REMOVE CPUID=cpu
where:
CPUID=cpu
Example:
// JOB REMOVE
// EXEC TDYNSYNC,SIZE=128K
REMOVE CPUID=Z
/*
/&
Note: The default dtfname of the catalog from which the volume status
information is to be extracted is CAICATL. If you are extracting data from
another catalog, use the CATNAME control statement to specify the dtfname of
the catalog.
SYNC Command The SYNC command takes as input two extract files (one from each of two
systems) and creates two output files (one for each of the systems) that
contain updates to synchronize the two tape catalogs. The input files are
assigned to dtfnames CAT1IN and CAT2IN. The output files are created using
dtfnames CAT1OUT and CAT2OUT. The output file CAT1OUT is an update file
for the catalog used to create the file CAT1IN, while the file CAT2OUT is an
update file for the catalog used to create the file CAT2IN.
Format:
SYNC
Examples:
// JOB SYNC
// TLBL CAT1IN,'DOSVSE.EXTRACT'
// DLBL CAT2IN,'OS.EXTRACT'
// EXTENT SYS005,
// ASSGN SYS005,CUU
// DLBL CAT1OUT,'DOSVSE.APPLY'
// EXTENT SYS006,
// ASSGN SYS006,CUU
// TLBL CAT2OUT,'OS.APPLY'
// EXEC TDYNSYNC,SIZE=128K
SYNC
/*
/&
In the above example CAT1IN was created using the TDYNSYNC EXTRACT
command, while CAT2IN was created using the DYNEXTR utility of CA 1 MVS.
CAT1IN is a tape file, while CAT2IN is an MVS disk data set.
Note:
Do not allow any tape activity after the EXTRACT until the APPLY function
completes.
4. Execute the DYNEXTR utility of CA 1 MVS. This creates the file CAT2OUT
and a report. Inspect the report to reconcile any unextracted volumes.
7. Execute the DYNUPDTE utility of CA 1 MVS and inspect the report for
errors.
11. Start the DYNCOMM task of CA 1 MVS to initiate communication from the
MVS side.
Note: If the XSYSTEM task fails from either system, resynchronization of the
catalogs will be required.
Report Samples
For more information about TDYNSYNC reports (Catalog APPLY report, Catalog
EXTRACT report, and Catalog SYNC report), see the chapter "CA Dynam
Report Examples."
DATA SET NAME Contains the last 17 characters of the data set name to be placed in the
volume record.
EXT OWN Specifies the CPUID of the current owner of the volume, if already owned by
an XSYSTEM participant.
VOLSER Contains the volume serial number associated with the transaction.
VOL SEQ Specifies the volume sequence number of the data set.
FIL SEQ Specifies the file sequence number of the data set.
DATA SET NAME Contains the last 17 characters of the data set name.
EXT OWN Specifies the CPUID of the current owner of the volume, if already owned by
an XSYSTEM participant.
VOLSER Contains the volume serial number associated with the data set.
VOL SEQ Specifies the volume sequence number of the data set.
FIL SEQ Specifies the file sequence number of the data set.
DATA SET NAME Contains the last 17 characters of the data set name for the volume being
compared. For ANSI version 3 tapes, this is the last 17 characters before the
generation number (GDG). This field can be blank for volumes in a
multivolume multi-data set group, or for scratch tapes that have never been
used.
STAT Indicates the status of the volume on the system it is listed under. The value
SCR represents volumes in scratch status; ACT represents volumes that are in
active status.
CREATED Represents the creation date and time of the data set currently on the volume.
SYSTEM Represents the NODEID value of the system that currently owns the volume.
This field will be blank for volumes in scratch status.
DEST Indicates the system which will receive the synchronization information for the
volume. SYS1 indicates the system represented by the data sets CAT1IN and
CAT1OUT, which is displayed on the left side of the report. SYS2 indicates the
other system. BOTH indicates that both systems are to receive information
about this volume. NONE indicates that a critical data error was detected for
the volume. The MESSAGE field contains more information.
Depending on the type of discrepancy that occurs, you can receive any of the
following messages:
Indicates that the creation date and time are not the same on both systems.
The conflict is resolved automatically by selecting the volume with the most
recent date and time.
Indicates that the data set names are not the same on both systems. The
conflict is resolved automatically by selecting the volume with the most recent
creation date and time. If both volumes have the same date and time, the
owning system is assumed to have the correct data set name and will be used
to update the other system.
Indicates conflicting ownership of the volume. Each system thinks the tape is
under its control. The conflict is resolved automatically based upon the most
recent creation date and time.
Indicates that each system thinks the other system is controlling the tape. The
conflict is resolved automatically by scratching the volume on both systems.
The information from the record with the most recent creation date and time is
used to update the volumes on each system.
Indicates that the NODEIDs (under the column SYSTEM) do not reflect the
same information about the owning system. The conflict is resolved
automatically by selecting the volume with the most recent creation date and
time. If both volumes have the same date and time, the owning system is
assumed to have the correct NODEID and will be used to update the other
system.
Indicates that the volume or owner information for the volume in question
does not contain appropriate values. This may indicate a problem in the
extract utility. If attempting to resolve this error, contact a CA Technical
Support representative for the system indicated in the message.
Indicates that the volume is active on one system and either not defined or
out-of-service (DELETE status) on the other system. The system that does not
have the volume defined is notified of the status of the volume on the owning
system.
Indicates that the volumes are not in the same status on both systems. The
conflict is resolved automatically by selecting the volume with the most recent
creation date and time. If both volumes have the same date and time, the
owning system is assumed to have the correct status, and will be used to
update the other system.
The extract for the system specified does not contain any data. Verify that the
data set is specified correctly and that it was created by the appropriate
extract utility.
The extract of the system specified does not contain any volume information.
Verify that the data set is specified correctly and that it was created by the
appropriate extract utility. If attempting to resolve this error, contact a CA
Technical Support representative for the system indicated in the message.
The extract for the system specified was not created by the appropriate
extract utility. Verify that the data set is specified correctly and that it was
created by the appropriate extract utility.
TOTAL RECORDS Displays the total number of records (excluding the identification record) that
WRITTEN were written to the CATnOUT files.
− TDYNCLEN
− TDYNUTL
− TDYNLIST
− TDYNPULL
The TAPES report lists information about data sets on tape. It provides reports
of active tapes, scratch tapes, or all tapes. Data is retrieved from the Catalog
in volser sequence. Several options available to TAPES enhance its basic
capabilities.
The TDYNCLEN batch utility program lists tapes due for cleaning based upon
the number of OPENs and the number of I/O errors recorded for the volume.
TDYNLIST and TDYNPULL generate the following pull lists, which are listings of
the tapes necessary to run a job or series of jobs:
TDYNPULL—is JCL-driven and provides a pull list for any job stream
submitted.
TAPES supersedes the TDYNUTL reports generated by the LIST ALL, LIST
VOL=ALL, and LIST SCRATCH commands.
ACCESS CATALOG
REPORT TAPES [ BANNER ]
[ CATNM ]
[ CBUFN ]
[ EROPT ]
[ MAXLINES ]
[ MAXRETR ]
[ SELECT={option[,option..]} ]
[ VOL ]
The SELECT options are described here. For more information about all other
TAPES options and their application, see the chapter "General Reporting—
DYNPRINT."
SELECT Options
The SELECT options for TAPES are all report-formatting options. Any or all of
them can be used to produce up to three reports from one command. They
are:
ALLTAPES All tape volumes are reported on, whether scratch or active. This is the default
option if the SELECT keyword is omitted.
You can closely approximate the three TDYNUTL reports mentioned above by
invoking TAPES with the command:
Source Code for The CA Earl source for the TAPES report is CA Dynam's library member
TAPES Report DYNTA.0.
Report Samples For more information, see Standard DYNPRINT Reports in the appendix “CA
Dynam Report Example.”
TDYNCLEN is a batch utility program that lists tapes due for cleaning based
upon the number of OPENs and the number of I/O errors recorded for the
volume.
You can enter keywords in any order, starting from any position.
a 1- to 3-digit number.
a 1- to 3-digit number
Examples:
ERRORS=3 OPENS=7
If you omit the control statement, the following defaults are used.
Volser
Tape status
C active tape
S scratch tapes
Note that if the tape status cannot be determined, a question mark is printed
preceded by the hexadecimal representation of the status byte according to
the CA Dynam Catalog.
Example:
// JOB TDYNCLEN
// DLBL WORK1,'WORK.01'
// EXTENT SYS001,. . .extent information. . .
// ASSGN SYS001,cuu
// EXEC TDYNCLEN,size=128k
ERRORS=3 OPENS=5 STATUS=ALL
/*
/&
After a tape has been cleaned, use the DYNCAT SCRPOOL command to reset
the number of tape errors and reflect the date cleaned in the CA Dynam
Catalog.
In addition to a pull list, you can include comments and instructions to the
operator, tape librarian, or data control clerk. They are printed in the same
sequence in which the parameter statements are processed. A second report is
also printed listing all tapes to be pulled in volume serial number sequence
along with an estimated number of required SCRATCH tapes.
TITLE= Skips to a new page. The 48 characters following the equal sign are new page
heading. Supply a TITLE statement anywhere in the input stream to start a
new page and heading.
STEP= Skips two lines and prints the 48 characters that follow the equal sign. Each
step is numbered to permit references to already created data sets currently
needed for input.
DN= Indicates a data set is being used for input or created for output. Specify a 1-
to 44-character data set name enclosed in single quotation marks.
DN parameters:
VR= An input version from 1 to 255. The data set name and
numbers for the specified version are printed. Version 1
is the default.
SCRATCH or SCRATCH=nn
NOTE= Prints the 53 characters that follow the equal sign as comments on the listing.
Use the NOTE= statement to print instructions to the operator, tape librarian,
or control clerk on the pull list.
ROUTE Prints a routing sheet to serve as a check for each section through which the
listing is routed.
Example:
TDYNPULL generates a list of the volume serial numbers and total number of
scratch tapes needed for any job stream you submit. Any combination of CA
Dynam DLBL and TLBL statements are accepted along with the standard VSE
JCL.
You can execute TDYNPULL from the console or from SYSRDR. Acceptance of
input and end of input, varies as follows, depending on where TDYNPULL is
executed from:
A report line is produced for each valid input statement that follows:
// JOB
// EXEC
// DLBL
// TLBL
TDYNPULL Processing
Compares the user-defined pull table to the dtf name and, optionally, job
name, phase name, or both. If a match is found, the user-defined input or
output status is used.
Searches the CA Dynam Catalog, reading all the versions for the data set
name. Matching is done against the CA Dynam Catalog creation job name
and phase name. If a match is found, the file is assumed to be output.
Otherwise, the file is considered to be input.
A TLBL with a dtfname of REF indicates the first stack TLBL represents a
reference to a controlled version of the data set. Otherwise the first stack
for a particular stack id will cause a scratch tape to be allocated.
Note that after a file is determined to be input, the most current version's
volser is used unless specifically overridden by TLBL options (volseq, volser,
generation).
Example:
Input JCL The following are considered for input JCL statements:
If POWER is active, you must remove the POWER JECL statements, such
as the following, before running TDYNPULL:
− * $$ JOB
− * $$ LST
− * $$ PUN
TDYNPULL Output
After all input TLBL/DLBL statements for a given step are processed, and prior
to printing the EXEC statement, TDYNPULL scans the pull table. During this
scan, TDYNPULL looks for entries marked as STD=YES. Entries that match this
step's phase or job are processed, producing a report line showing necessary
input volumes or scratch tapes. These lines are marked by the word STD to
the right of the generated TLBL statement.
Note that if an input TLBL with a matching dtf name and phase or job name is
encountered in the pull table, the pull table entry is ignored for this input job
step.
Report Lines
The TDYNPULL report line consists of a comment on the left and the JCL
statement to the right. Shown below are the comments that can appear on a
TDYNPULL report.
Comment Meaning
VOLSER VOLSER VOLSER These are the input volumes required for
this file. They are also summarized at
EOJ.
PULLTAB Parameters
Standard IBM syntax rules for assembling an option record apply. The
parameters available for the PULLTAB option record are detailed in the
following table:
I - as input
O - for output
JOB=jobname Optional. Identifies the job name you want to associate with this file. (Follow
IBM syntax rules.)
PHASE=phasename Optional. Indicates the phase name of the phase you want to associate with
this file. (Follow IBM syntax rules.)
DSN=dsn Required when specifying STD=YES. Specifies the data set name. The data set
name can contain CA Dynam/T options with a maximum length of 44
characters (59 including options).
STD= {YES|NO } Optional. Indicates whether the label information is in standard labels.
YES
NO
END=YES You must include END=YES as the last statement of the PULLTAB option
record. END=YES causes the start of the TDYNPULT phase generation.
The following job stream is used to generate and catalog the phase TDYNPULT.
At installation time, the source book called TDYNPULT is cataloged into
Sublibrary A. An example of the assembly is contained in the source book
CAYDMACS in Sublibrary Z.
Note:
Submit the more-specific entries (those with phase and job names) before
the more-generic (those without phase or job name).
If the program is executed from the console, they are issued from the
SYSLOG device.
If the program is executed from a job stream, they are read from the
SYSIPT device. You can assign SYSIPT to a card reader, magnetic tape
unit, or DASD. It must consist of 80-byte records.
The chart below lists the TDYNUTL commands and their functions:
To Use
Command
format the number of lines and line spacing on a report page FORMAT
TDYNUTL Commands
You can abbreviate all TDYNUTL commands using any number of characters.
For example, the following commands all perform the same function:
The generated report is printed in the same sequence in which the control
statements were processed, except for the following commands:
Note: All LIST functions require a sorting function. CA SRAM accomplishes this
sorting function and is cataloged as a part of TDYNUTL. CA SRAM requires
external DASD storage for the Filename, WORK1. The logical unit used is
SYS001.
DISPLAY Command
Issue the DISPLAY command to list information about selected tapes or data
sets on the operator console.
DSN= Displays the characteristics (volume serial number, creation and expiration
dates, owner ID, vault ID, etc.) of the indicated data set along with the three
most current versions of the data set on the console.
NVER= Controls the number of versions displayed on the console. Any numeric value
is valid. (default is 3).
Example:
Selected data from the tape with volume serial number 1234
The first three volumes associated with the file FILE1 in version number
sequence, listing the current version first
EXCEPTS Command
This command generates a report, in Data Set Name sequence, of all files that
were created or processed under the following exceptional circumstances:
Operator accepted an input tape version other than the one called for by
the system.
Running this report clears the condition that caused a tape to appear on this
report.
Example:
FORMAT Command
The FORMAT command sets the number of lines and the line spacing on any of
the reports generated by TDYNUTL. The FORMAT control statement is
free-form with the command FORMAT followed by two required positional
parameters. The two parameters are separated by a comma.
Positional parameter-1 Two-digit number from 10 to 99 that specifies the number of lines to be
printed on a report page.
Positional parameter-2 One-digit number from 1 to 3 that specifies the number of lines to space
between print lines.
Example:
Note: Make sure that the number of lines and the line spacing are
compatible—for instance, if double spacing and 60 lines are specified, there
will be a page overrun.
LIST Command
The LIST function creates various reports that are output to SYSLST. You
indicate the type of report through one or more of the keyword or positional
parameters. LIST has a free-form format. The operation code LIST is followed
by one or more of these keyword or positional parameters:
ALL Generates a listing of all volumes in the library in volume serial number
sequence.
DSN= Generates a listing of all or selected data sets in the library. Valid entries are:
NEW Generates two listings of all tapes that have been cataloged manually or by
the system since the last time the LIST NEW function was executed. One
listing is in volume serial number sequence, and the other is in data set name
sequence.
Important! Run the LIST NEW report only when there are no tape files being
created in other partitions.
PASSWORD= Generates a list of all data sets which are password-protected, along with the
associated password.
SCRATCH Generates a listing of all scratch tapes in the library in volume serial number
sequence.
VOL= Generates a listing of all active tapes or tapes selected by volume serial
number. The list is in volume serial number sequence. Valid entries are:
Example:
Z All tapes associated with the file FILE NAME in ascending sequence by
version number (the current version is listed first)
[ All active tapes in volume serial number sequence
] Two lists of all tapes cataloged in the library since the last time this
function was performed. One list is in volume serial number sequence and
the other one in Data Set Name sequence
^ All scratch tapes in the library in volume serial number sequence
Each of the reports produced by TDYNUTL and DYNCAT uses a similar format.
The following lists describe the fields and special comments that can appear on
the reports:
CPU Alphabetic CPU ID of the CPU on which this version was created. It is
determined by the System Adapter option record.
CUU Tape unit on which this version was created. If the version was created using
the DYNCAT ADD function, this field is blank.
DATE Creation date of this version. This is taken from the system date in the
supervisor—not the temporary COMRG date. You can modify it with the
DYNCAT ALTER function.
DAY Number of days from creation date that data set versions are to be retained.
EXP-DATE Expiration date of this version. If days retention is specified, this value is
calculated when the version is created or taken from the TLBL. You can modify
it with the DYNCAT ALTER function.
JOB-NAME Jobname in which this version of the data set was created.
LEN Length specified for the data set, tape volume, or both.
MSG Additional notes about this version; for example, MF for multifile data set and
AMF for automatic multifile data set.
NOAC Number of days to retain this version since it was last accessed as input.
PED AS-OF-DATE in effect when this version of the data set was created. This field
is blank if the following conditions are true:
PT Partition in which this version was created. If the version was created using
the DYNCAT ADD function, the partition in which DYNCAT was executed is
used.
TAPE ERRS Number of recoverable write errors that occurred on this volume when this
version was created. This field is blank if there were none.
VER Version number of this version (generation). One is the most current. An
asterisk (*) beside the version number indicates that the version is eligible for
SCRATCH and will be returned to SCRATCH status the next time the SCRATCH
function is performed.
VLT Current vault location of this version--blank if there is no vault control for this
data set.
In addition to these fields, each data set has a comment line (if a comment
has been established for it).
MANUALLY SCRATCHED
The volume was scratched using the DYNCAT DELETE function.
NOT CLOSED The volume was opened but never successfully closed.
SCRATCHED ON mm/dd/yy
The date the volume was returned to SCRATCH status.
If this movement occurs, the tape is reported in its new location until TDYNVLT
is run again. At that time, normal rotation takes place. If the change is to be
permanent (making normal rotation undesirable), be sure to indicate the PERM
specification (PERM=YES) through DYNCAT. This specification remains intact
until the version is altered with PERM=NO.
To establish the desired location for each version of a data set, you can do the
following:
If a version does not have a specified vault location, TDYNVLT uses the data
set's default vault location.
You can specify the starting version of a data set for the vault location by
including the VLTSEQ=nnn parameter with VLTLOC. Vault sequencing lets you
define which of up to 999 versions of a data set has vault control. VLTSEQ
must be used with VLTLOC on a DYNCAT ALTER command.
You can also define slot numbers within all vault locations, except vault A.
These slot numbers enable you to further control the vault locations. For each
vault, you can do the following:
Defining Slots
To define slots within vaults, use the DYNCAT VAULT control statement, as
follows:
You can define up to 10 ranges of slot numbers, but only one range per
statement. Each slot range must be uniquely associated with a VLTLOC=
parameter and a VAULT command. For example,
To place slot numbers within your CA Dynam Catalog, run the following as the
first VAULT movement after the conversion:
// JOB TDYNVLT
// DLBL WORK1,'WORK.01'
// EXTENT SYS001..........
// ASSGN SYS001,cuu
// DLBL WORK2,'WORK.02'
// EXTENT SYS002..........
// ASSGN SYS002,cuu
// EXEC TDYNVLT,SIZE=128K
MOVEMENT
VERIFY
/*
The MOVEMENT function activates the vault movement. The VERIFY function
gets a slot number for all volumes whose vault is not rotated and for whose
vault location slot support is defined. You can run this first with the DUMMY
option to avoid CA Dynam Catalog update.
Running TDYNVLT
Run TDYNVLT daily or weekly, depending on how often you transfer tapes from
one location to another. By definition, vault location A is the main tape library.
The DYNCAT SCRATCH function will scratch expired versions only if they
currently reside in location A. Therefore, if you run both programs each day,
run TDYNVLT before DYNCAT.
3. Verifies, frees, and gets slot numbers; also updates the CA Dynam Catalog
If TDYNVLT cancels for any reason during execution, run the DYNCAT BACKUP
function to verify the integrity of the Catalog: Vault movement information
may have been lost. (DYNCAT RESTORE is unnecessary if you are running
TDYNVLT with the DUMMY option, or if the CADT602I message has not been
issued.)
You can activate TDYNVLT functions with control statements. If you do not
submit any control statements, TDYNVLT will end normally unless TDYNVLT
detects that an automatic verify is required. In that case, TDYNVLT continues
as if the VERIFY control statement had been submitted.
The following JCL example for TDYNVLT shows the necessary job control:
// JOB TDYNVLT
// DLBL WORK1,'WORK.01'
// EXTENT SYS001. . .
// DLBL WORK2,'WORK.02'
// EXTENT SYS002. . .
// EXEC TDYNVLT,SIZE=128K
. . . control statements . . .
/*
/&
Note that DLBLs and EXTENTs are required for WORK1 and WORK2. These files
must use SYS001 and SYS002 respectively. Both WORK1 and WORK2 can be
allocated using VSAM/SAM.
Defining slots
Positions:
1 71 72 73 80
+--------------------------------------------------------------+ + +--------+
<operation > cc
TDYNVLT Commands
Creates a file which contains a list of all the tapes in the INVENTORY
Catalog. This file can be downloaded to a CA WORKSTATION EXTRACT
basic system.
Checks all volumes to make sure that the slot numbers are VERIFY
correct and generates new slots for a vault location (if the
location's slots are changed).
INVENTORY Command
Format:
OR
INVentory EXTRACT
INCLVLT=(x,x,.....x,x) Selects the vault locations to be reported on. If you omit this operand,
TDYNVLT reports on the following:
EXCLVLT=(x,x,.....x,x) Indicates which vault locations to leave out of the report. If you omit this
operand, TDYNVLT reports on the following:
MDSN= Determines which data set names of a multifile volume are to be listed on the
report.
The default is NO. If the report sequence is based on data set name, it is
always based on the first data set name of a multifile.
EXTRACT Creates a file (with a ddname of CAIEXTR), that contains a list of all the tapes
in the Catalog.
Note: The TDYNIBM program EJECT command can be used to read the
CAIEXTR file and eject volumes from the 3494 Tape Library. For more
information, see IBM 3494 Tape Library Interface.
Lists all tapes in each vault. TDYNVLT can generate this report for all or
specific vault locations. If the report is by volume serial number, it lists only
the first data set of a multifile, unless you specify MDSN=YES.
MOVement {EXTRACT|DUMmy|TRace }
VERify {DUMmy|TRace }
Command Parameters
EXTRACT Must be the only parameter specified. Creates a file with a ddname of
CAIEXTR, which contains a list of all the tapes in the Catalog.
Note: The TDYNIBM program EJECT command can be used to read the
CAIEXTR file and eject volumes from the 3494 Tape Library. For more
information, see IBM 3494 Tape Library Interface.
Movement Reports
Movement Summary TDYNVLT lists, by volume serial number, all tapes that have been
Report transferred. This is primarily for auditing or historical purposes.
(TDYNVLT-03)
CA Dynam/T communicates with the IBM Tape Library Dataserver using the
IBM LBSERV macro interface. IBM supports communication with the Tape
Library Dataserver on VSE natively using the VSE Library Control Device Driver
(LCDD). LCDD is an IBM VTAM application which runs in a separate VSE
partition. Alternately if VSE is running as a guest under VM the VSE Guest
Server (VGS) may be used by IBM to communicate with the Tape Library
Dataserver.
In order to activate the CA Dynam/T VSE LBSERV interface, when using either
LCDD or VGS, MODON=11 must be set ON in the CA Dynam/T System option
record. For more information about how to setup either LCDD or VGS see the
appropriate IBM documentation.
The 2-byte CA Dynam/T OWNERID is used to support the IBM Tape Library
scratch poolid. If a dataset has a CA Dynam/T OWNERID of 00 through 31, the
corresponding IBM scratch poolid (for example, SCRATCH00—SCRATCH31) is
used to allocate a scratch tape for output processing. When an active tape
with a CA Dynam/T OWNERID of 00 through 31 is scratched it is returned to
the appropriate IBM Tape Library scratch pool.
The IBM VGS service machine only supports scratch poolids SCRATCH00
through SCRATCH15 therefore the only valid CA Dynam/T OWNERIDs are 00
to 15 when using the VGS.
Communication to the IBM Tape Library Dataserver can also be done using CA
Dynam/T VM which communicates directly with the server.
For information about how to set up the IBM 3494 using CA Dynam/T VM, see
the CA Dynam/T VM documentation.
IBM supports multiple tape libraries each with its own unique name which can
be up to 8 characters long. The CA Dynam/T DTLIB option record can be used
to associate a 1 byte library id with the 8 character library name when multiple
libraries are used.
The 2-byte CA Dynam/T OWNERID can be used to specify both the library id
and the scratch poolid by setting MODON=23 ON in the CA Dynam/T system
option record. The first byte of the CA Dynam/T OWNERID is used to specify
the library id. The only valid characters are 0 (zero) through 9 and letters A
through Z. The second byte of the CA Dynam/T OWNERID is used to specify
the scratch poolid. The only valid characters are 0 (zero) through 9 and letters
A through F, where A = 10, B = 11, C = 12, D = 13, E = 14, and F = 15. A CA
Dynam/T OWNERID of FF translates to a library id of F and a scratch poolid of
SCRATCH15.
IF MODON=23 is OFF, all LBSERV calls set the library name to BLANKS (X40)
so that the default library name is always accessed even if two or more
libraries are defined in the IBM robot system.
Before the first CA Dynam/T tape mount is requested, either the IBM LCDD
partition or the IBM VGS server machine must be running. If neither is
running, the CA Dynam/T table that holds all the tape drive addresses of the
IBM tape robot system will be 0 (zero), and you cannot access the IBM tape
robot system using CA Dynam/T.
If you cannot access the IBM tape robot system and either the IBM LCDD
partition or the IBM VGS server machine is running, try reloading phase
CATNLOG0. This forces CA Dynam/T to scan the IBM robot system and update
an internal table with all the tape drive addresses found in the IBM tape robot
system.
// JOB RELOAD
// UPSI 01
// EXEC CASAUTIL
RELOAD CATNLOG0
/*
Note: The IBM LCDD or the IBM VGS VM service machine must be active
before the reload is executed.
Using CA Dynam/T MODON 11, 22, and 23 with the IBM Robot System
The following table illustrates the MODON settings required for each type of
server:
If MODON 23 is OFF, only one library in the IBM 3494 robot system is
recognized. If MODON 23 is ON, more than one library in the IBM 3494 robot
system is recognized.
SYNC Command Synchronizes the 3494 Tape library with the CA Dynam catalog. The
synchronization can be limited by specifying first and last volumes and by
specifying a specific owner of the data set. The default is to synchronize all
volumes and owner ids. The format for the SYNC command follows:
EJECT Command The EJECT command can be used to read a CAIEXTR file created by TDYNVLT
MOVEMENT EXTRACT to eject all volumes from the 3494 that are moved out of
vault A. As with the SYNC command, the EJECT command can be limited to a
range of volsers, a specific owner id, or both. The format for the EJECT
command follows:
VTAPE START,UNIT=cuu,LOC=ipaddress:portnumber,FILE='filename',WRITE
VSAM SCRATCH
READ
VTAPE STOP,UNIT=cuu
Users can use CA Dynam/T to control input and output processing of VTAPE
files. Additionally, VTAPE information can be maintained in the Catalog file and
VTAPE volumes are indicated in reports.
Input Processing
For input processing of VTAPE files, users can specify a data set name using
the DSN=data set name parameter on the VTAPE command instead of
specifying the LOC and FILE parameters.
Example:
VTAPE START,UNIT=cuu,DSN=’dataset’
Versions other than the most current can be specified on the DSN=data set
name parameter:
DSN='TAPE.(-2)'
DSN='TAPE,G=3'
Output Processing
The full IBM VTAPE command must be specified for output processing. CA
Dynam/T saves the specified VTAPE information at Job Control time. The
VTAPE information is then stored in the catalog and associated with the
volume being created at open output time for controlled tapes.
CUU Assignment The VTAPE CUU must be pre-assigned for both controlled and uncontrolled
output tapes. CA Dynam/T does not allow the operator to assign a VTAPE
CUU when responding to a mount message.
However, CA Dynam/T will AVR the VTAPE and dynamically make the
assignment, if a specific volume is requested for output in any of the following
situations:
DISP=OLD processing
VTAPE versions can be added manually to the catalog using the DYNCAT ADD
command by specifying the VTAPLOC and VTAPFILE parameters. For more
information about using the DYNCAT ADD command for VTAPE support, see
ADD Command in the chapter “Maintaining the Catalog—DYNCAT Program.”
VTAPE volumes are denoted by a (V) appended to the volser for most online
panels and batch reports.
To use the automatic virtual tape support, a list of virtual CUUs must be
defined to CA Dynam/T for use when mounting virtual volumes. The system
option record DTVIRT was created for this purpose. It can be defined and
maintained online using CUI, or in batch using program CACCDBU0. The CUUs
defined must be added as cartridge devices in the VSE IPL procedures.
The CUUs must be in a DVCUP status. No real devices can use any of the
defined virtual CUU addresses.
A default VTAPE file name and location also can be defined in the DTVIRT
system option record. This default is the file name and location passed on the
VTAPE START command if no virtual tape information is defined for the
selected virtual scratch tape. For instructions on defining virtual scratch tapes,
see the DYNCAT SCRPOOL command.
A default FakeTape file name also can be defined in the DTVIRT option record.
All VTAPE and FakeTape file names must contain the volser somewhere within
the file name, thus ensuring all virtual file names are unique. The default
VTAPE/FakeTape file name must contain the literal VOLSER. When using the
default file name, CA Dynam/T substitutes the actual volser in place of the
literal VOLSER. For example, if the default file name chosen is
CA DYNAM/T.VOLSER, when volume CA0001 is written for output, and no
overriding file name is defined for the volume, the file name passed on the
VTAPE START command or in the FakeTape CCW would be
CA DYNAM/T.CA0001.
Normally, CA Dynam/T scans all available tape drives searching for a scratch
tape to use when creating a data set on a real tape. Unlike real tapes, when a
virtual tape is requested for output, CA Dynam/T must search the Dynam
catalog for an appropriate virtual volser to specify on either the VTAPE START
command or in the special FakeTape mount CCW request. If a volume is to be
selected by CA Dynam/T for use as a virtual volume, the volser must be
defined in the Dynam catalog as a virtual scratch tape.
The virtual tape information associated with a volume remains intact unless
the volume is deleted from the catalog, or if a SCRPOOL command is issued
with new virtual tape information specified. The virtual tape information
remains associated with the volume even after the virtual volume is scratched.
To reduce the amount of I/O when searching the catalog for an eligible
virtual scratch tape, specify the VOLID parameter for data sets that are to
be written to virtual tapes. If a data set is defined with a VOLID, CA
Dynam/T performs a generic search looking only for volumes where the
first two characters match the specified VOLID. For example, if there are
no eligible virtual scratch tapes in the catalog, and no VOLID is specified,
every volume in the catalog will be accessed. However, if a VOLID is
specified, then only the volumes whose first two characters match the
VOLID will be accessed. Using the VOLID parameter limits searches only to
virtual volumes, thus reducing unnecessary catalog I/O.
To use VSAM and FakeTape files as virtual tapes, you must define them
before they can be used by CA Dynam/T. For details about defining files to
be used as virtual tapes, see IBM or FakeTape documentation.
Example
The following is an example of how to create and read a VTAPE that will reside
in a VSAM file:
* $$ JOB JNM=VTAPE,CLASS=0,DISP=D
// JOB VTAPE CREATE VIRTUAL TAPE FILE
* STEP 1 - DEFINE VTAPE VSAM CLUSTER
// EXEC IDCAMS,SIZE=AUTO
DELETE (VTAPE.FILE) PURGE CL -
CATALOG(VSAM.USER.CATALOG)
DEFINE CLUSTER (NAME(VTAPE.FILE) -
RECORDS (5 5) -
TO (99366) -
REUSE -
NONINDEXED -
SHAREOPTIONS (1) -
SPANNED -
RECORDSIZE (32758 32758) -
VOLUMES (WORK01)) -
DATA (NAME(VTAPE.FILE.@D@) -
CISZ (32768)) -
CATALOG (VSAM.USER.CATALOG)
/*
* STEP 2 - ADD LABEL FOR VSAM VTAPE FILE
// OPTION STDLABEL=DELETE
VT0001
/*
// OPTION STDLABEL=ADD
// DLBL VT0001,'VTAPE.FILE',99/366,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC
/*
* STEP 3 - DEFINE DATASET AND VIRTUAL SCRATCH TAPE TO DYNAM CATALOG
// EXEC DYNCAT
DEF 'VTAPE.DATASET' TAPE VIRTAPE=VTAPE VOLID=VT
SCRPOOL VOL=VT0001 VTAPLOC='VSAM' VTAPFILE='VOLSER'
/*
* STEP 4 - CREATE VIRTUAL TAPE
// TLBL SDDLBL,'VTAPE.DATASET'
// UPSI 10000010
// EXEC DYNTEST
50
/*
* STEP 5 - READ VIRTUAL TAPE
// TLBL SDDLBL,'VTAPE.DATASET'
// UPSI 01000000
// EXEC DYNTEST
/*
/&
$$ EOJ
Note: If the VTAPE is a VSAM file, the maximum length of the VTAPE file name
is seven characters; since that is the maximum DLBL name length. Six of the
seven characters must be the volser. In the example above, VT0001 is the
filename passed on the VTAPE START command if virtual scratch tape VT0001
is selected for use.
WRITE can only start at the beginning of a VSAM virtual tape. No rewrite or
overwrite of existing data is possible except from the beginning of a tape.
Once a VTAPE STOP command is issued, the remaining buffer contents is
written to tape, the tape is closed, and an end-of-volume (EOV) indicator is
written. This means no further data can be added to the virtual tape after the
VTAPE STOP is issued.
Therefore, in order to create a multi-file VSAM VTAPE all files must be created
using just one VTAPE START and one VTAPE STOP command. To prevent
Dynam/T from automatically issuing the VTAPE STOP command, specify the
HOLD option for each file of the multi-file set. Use the TDYNASN VTSTOP
command to issue the VTAPE STOP command after all the files of the multi-file
set are created.
The following example assumes your virtual tape CUUs have been defined in
the DTVIRT system option record, and that the necessary VSAM files have
been created. The example creates a 3 file unchained multi-file VTAPE set:
// JOB VTAPE
// EXEC DYNCAT
DEF 'TAPE.VTAPE.1' TAPE NGEN=2 VIRTAPE=VTAPE
DEF 'TAPE.VTAPE.2' TAPE NGEN=2 VIRTAPE=VTAPE
DEF 'TAPE.VTAPE.3' TAPE NGEN=2 VIRTAPE=VTAPE
/*
* CREATE FILE 1
* USE THE HOLD OPTION TO PREVENT AUTOMATIC VTAPE STOP
// TLBL SDDLBL,'TAPE.VTAPE.1,H',,,STACK=A
// UPSI 10000010
// EXEC DYNTEST
50
/*
* CREATE FILE 2
* USE THE HOLD OPTION TO PREVENT AUTOMATIC VTAPE STOP
// TLBL SDDLBL,'TAPE.VTAPE.2,H',,,STACK=A
// UPSI 10000010
// EXEC DYNTEST
50
/*
* CREATE FILE 3
* USE THE HOLD OPTION TO PREVENT AUTOMATIC VTAPE STOP
// TLBL SDDLBL,'TAPE.VTAPE.3,H',,,STACK=A
// UPSI 10000010
// EXEC DYNTEST
50
/*
* RELEASE ASSIGNMENT AND ISSUE VTAPE STOP COMMAND
// EXEC TDYNASN
VTSTOP SYS004
/*
/&
Catalog management
Device independence shared DASD for multiple CPU support
BACKUP/RESTORE utility
VTOC management with support for both indexed and nonindexed VTOCs
Catalog Management is the CA Dynam facility for accessing a file using only
the file ID supplied through VSE Job Control. With the CA Dynam Catalog
Management facility, you can define or alter the allocation attributes of disk
files without modifying JCL statements. This provides more power and
flexibility in controlling DASD file attributes.
Disk pool management lets you specify a pool of disk volumes to be used for
disk space allocation. It also provides for a balanced allocation of space across
multiple disk volumes.
With the CA Dynam/D DYNUTIL program, you can save and restore any DASD
file to and from tape.
Shared DASD for multiple CPUs enables you to share disk space allocations
from among multiple CPUs. Each CPU may or may not have CA Dynam/D
processing and accessing a common disk pack.
VTOC indexes can be built on DASD volumes as desired. These indexes are
used to even further reduce VTOC I/O and channel busy time.
Basic Components
To effectively use CA Dynam/D, you must understand the following basic
components of the system:
Catalog management
VTOC management
These components form the nucleus of CA Dynam/D and direct you to other
facilities available in the system. For example, if you want CA Dynam/D to
control disk file management and to distribute the allocation of disk space
across several disk volumes, utilize disk pool management.
Details for using the CA Dynam/D system effectively are supplied in this
chapter.
CA Dynam/D is designed to control and allocate disk space for the VSE user.
The user can request space to be allocated by CA Dynam/D in one of two
ways, depending on whether a file is defined in the CA Dynam Catalog.
To request space for a file not defined in the Catalog, use an EXTENT Job
Control statement. Indicate in that statement a relative track (or block) value
of 1 or the value specified for TRIGGER in the DYNAM/D option record. The
trigger indicates that CA Dynam/D should allocate the file.
For example,
CA Dynam/D does not allocate any EXTENT not defined with the TRIGGER
value from the DYNAM/D option record. Instead, the requested EXTENT is
passed directly to the standard operating system OPEN routine.
A Job Control exit is provided with CA Dynam/D. This exit will automatically
change the EXTENT statements in any supplied Job Control stream to force
dynamic allocation.
For a file defined in the CA Dynam Catalog File, the EXTENT statement is
omitted; space is allocated based on the specification in the Catalog entry for
that file.
For example,
Note that the disk file can be defined in the Catalog with a specific number of
tracks (CKD devices), blocks (FBA devices), cylinders, or records (logical
allocation).
CA Dynam/D allocates disk space for files at OPEN time by searching the
specified disk volumes for available contiguous space. CA Dynam/D considers
disk space to be available on a volume when one of the following conditions
prevails:
Disk space is occupied by a file whose expiration date is less than the
current date
Files with an expiration date equal to the current date (0 retention days) are
considered unexpired by CA Dynam/D. The disk space occupied by these files
will not be released by CA Dynam/D until the following day (after midnight of
the day when the file was created).
Note: For FBA allocations, CA Dynam/D rounds all user allocation requests up
to an even multiple of 8 physical blocks for optimum performance. If, for
example, 7 blocks are requested either through JCL or the Catalog, 8 blocks
are allocated by CA Dynam/D.
Secondary disk space allocation lets you automatically acquire disk space
during program execution whenever the original EXTENT of a sequential disk
(SD) file is filled. This eliminates the problem of allocating a single large,
contiguous area of disk space big enough for a maximal amount of data.
This capability is important for files which vary in size from one job execution
to another. The allocated disk space can grow according to the file size.
You can define secondary space for a file in several ways. Firstly, you can use
Automatic Secondary Allocation. In this way, you define only the size of the
primary allocation. If secondary allocations are required, they are generated
based upon constants defined to the system using the DYNAM/D option record.
Secondly, for complete control over all the allocations permitted for a file, on a
file-by-file basis, define the following:
Examples
Following are three examples of defining files to the Catalog. For more
information, see the chapter "Maintaining the Catalog—DYNCAT Program."
Method One Defining the file in the CA Dynam Catalog with a primary allocation only, and
allowing automatic secondary allocation to provide secondary extents. The
example assumes that the DYNAM/D option record has ASAAMT(30) (30%
primary allocation can be used for secondary allocation) and ASAMAX(3)
(maximum of 3 secondary allocations).
Automatic Secondary Allocation (ASA) works in the same fashion from JCL
(that is, supply only one extent). Certain restrictions apply to using ASA for
files which are opened and closed multiple times in the same program. For
these files, if a generic volume serial number is used (for example, WORK**),
it is only effective for the first open which uses the label record.
Subsequent opens will use the resolved volume serial number where the file
was actually accessed or created (possibly WORK01). ASA is not supported for
SD TYPE=WORK files (compiler work files, FORTRAN disk files, and so on), or
ISAM or DA files.
Method Two Submitting multiple EXTENT statements, all with a relative track equal to the
trigger value defined in the DYNAM/D option record for a file. For example:
Note that the secondary extents will only be used if the primary extent is
filled.
Method Three First defining a file in the CA Dynam Catalog as eligible for secondary
allocation, and then supplying a DLBL statement with no EXTENT statements.
In the following example, DISK.FILE is defined to the Catalog with 10 tracks
for primary allocation, 5 tracks for each secondary allocation, and a maximum
of 3 secondary allocations.
Catalog File
Some of the disk file characteristics you can specify in the Catalog File include
the following:
The Catalog File acts as the central source of information which CA Dynam/D
uses when creating and accessing disk files. In this way, all the information
relating to user disk files can be organized in one central location to provide
secure and efficient disk file processing.
Catalog Management
With the Catalog Management Facility of CA Dynam/D, you can easily control
DASD file allocation and access.
The CA Dynam/D system locates the DISK.FILE entry in the Catalog and
creates EXTENT information for it. If the data set is not found in the Catalog,
CA Dynam/D searches all mounted volumes in PUB order to find it.
The expiration date defined in a Catalog entry will be used at file creation
time. You can temporarily override it by specifying a new expiration date on
the DLBL statement for that file.
VOLSER Identification
CA Dynam Catalog management identifies the actual VOLSER for each extent
as it is allocated for a file. Using this real VOLSER when the file is opened for
input, the time required to locate the file is reduced, because CA Dynam/D
does not have to scan through a POOL of disk volumes.
Catalog-Controlled Files
Example,
// DLBL FILEIN,'Catalog.Controlled.File1'
// EXTENT
// DLBL FILEOUT,'Catalog.Controlled.File2'
// EXTENT
// EXEC IDCAMS,SIZE=AUTO
REPRO INFILE (FILEIN ENV(BLKSZ(500),RECFM(FB))) -
OUTFILE (FILEOUT ENV(BLKSZ(5000),RECFM(FB)))
Any data set that is created and deleted within the same job is a temporary
data set. To define a temporary data set, specify a 3—10 character data set
name including the following:
For example,
// DLBL SDDOUT,'##TEMP01'
// EXTENT ,SYS006,POOL01,1,0,1,15
If the data set name is longer than 8 characters, the name will be truncated. A
temporary data set will always be CPU- and partition-dependent. Any
expiration date or retention days specified on the DLBL statement will be
ignored.
Logical Units
We recommend that you omit logical unit specifications from JCL for all files
processed under CA Dynam/D control. In regard to Direct Access (DA) files,
the main requirement made by VSE concerns the logical units assigned to
them, if they contain multiple extents or span multiple volumes.
File Type
Restrictions are placed on the file type, especially when EXTENT statements
will be omitted so that allocation information is taken from the Catalog. Either
omit the file type from the DLBL statement, or specify it as SD.
If an ISAM or DA file is defined in the Catalog, the DLBL statement must still
indicate SD. CA Dynam/D will override the SD value to match the file type
specified in a program's DTF. You must follow this convention because VSE Job
Control will only allow a DLBL statement without an EXTENT statement for SD
files.
Example,
You can specify a system default to allocate disk space globally. This default is
specified by the DEFALOC parameter of the DYNAM/D option record, and can
be used to simplify the creation of temporary or test data sets. To create the
default specification, add the DEFALOC parameter to the DYNAM/D option
record, and specify desired allocation information in it. For example:
DEFALOC(POOL01,100)
This sets a default allocation of 100 tracks primary allocation, with automatic
secondary allocation, to be taken from POOL01. To use the system default,
code a bare DLBL with a data set name which does not exist in the catalog; CA
Dynam/D will use the default allocation information to allocate the file.
The same procedure is used to input the file. In this fashion, a programmer
who needs temporary space can get it and use it without coding the EXTENT
information or creating a catalog entry.
The example shown above causes CA Dynam/D to allocate 100 tracks from
POOL01 (the default setting) to TEST.FILE, and sets a retention period of 30
days. At the end of 30 days, the file would be automatically deleted.
VTOC indexes built on selected volumes and used for processing both
dynamic and nondynamic files, greatly reduce VTOC I/Os and channel
busy time.
VTOC Indexes
A VTOC index is a separate data set on a volume. Each index record identifies
a data set residing on the volume, with a pointer to the DSCB for that file. This
allows direct access by data set name, without resource-consuming scans. To
locate the file, the VTOC index is read into storage, and the search for the data
set name is made there.
A VTOC is normally initialized using the IBM utility, ICKDSF. This program also
can build a VTOC index for the OS user. CA Dynam, while able to process a
VTOC built with ICKDSF, cannot process a VTOC index built with this utility. If
a VTOC index is built this way, it will be ignored. (For more information about
the program ICKDSF, see the IBM publication Device Support Facilities User's
Guide and Reference.)
With the presence of a VTOC index, the following search method is used:
Looking up the data set name in the VTOC index (usually a single I/O)
Reading the format-1 record directly from the VTOC (a single, short I/O)
Thus the channel is freed for other work, and I/O to the VTOC is minimized.
A VTOC index also contains a record of all space on the volume, depending on
whether it is occupied. This information is used to allocate new data sets and
check for overlapping extents, greatly reducing the time (and resources) spent
performing these functions.
When a new VTOC record is to be created, a free (format-0) VTOC record must
be found. This operation is usually similar to the format-1 record lookup
described above, except that a search is made for a record having a key of
binary zeros. The process is subject to the same problems as the format-1
lookup described above.
In order to alleviate this situation, a VTOC index contains a bit map describing
the VTOC itself. When free VTOC records are required, they are found by
examining the VTOC allocation map, instead of the conventional search.
When you are processing an allocation request for a volume without a VTOC
index, expired files that were allocated by CA Dynam/D are automatically
deleted.
Benchmark tests have shown that the use of indexed VTOCs can significantly
improve performance and overall system throughput, even when used on
DASD volumes not under the control of CA Dynam/D.
To use VTOC indexes, all systems must be running VSE r2 and above. If
volumes having VTOC indexes are to be updated by more than one CPU, all
updating systems must be running CA Dynam VTOC management. For more
information about how to define and initialize VTOC indexes, see the DYNCAT
VTOC command in the chapter "Maintaining the Catalog DYNCAT Program."
Format:
Example,
// DLBL FNAME,'DISK.FILE(A,B,C)'
CA Dynam/D eliminates the option codes and the parentheses from the file ID
before passing the file to IBM OPEN (this occurs for both CA Dynam/D and
non-CA Dynam/D controlled files).
Syntax Conventions
The file ID cannot be greater than 59 characters, including the option code
characters.
// DLBL FN,'FILE(S,,A)'
// DLBL FN,'FILE(BCD)'
The following list describes the file ID option codes you can specify on the
DLBL statement.
B Bypass AVR
Catalogs a data set. Remember that C is not a default option and must be
specified in order to catalog a data set from Job Control.
Deletes the VTOC entry when closing an input SD (sequential disk), ISAM
(indexed sequential), or a DA (Direct Access) file.
Note that D is not the default and must be specified for deletion to take place.
The D option applies only to CA Dynam/D-controlled files.
D1 Diagnostic trace
E Enqueue File
The E option is used to enqueue files opened for input, update or output. This
file, once opened, cannot be accessed by any other job which executes in the
system or in other systems sharing the same IBM Lock file. When an
enqueued file is closed, it becomes accessible to other programs. The enqueue
facility is available to CA Dynam/D users with or without Catalog Management
support.
F Fragment allocation
If the DASD space becomes full, the user must have supplied additional extent
definitions or must have the automatic secondary allocation facility available.
Otherwise, the job will be canceled with the IBM NO MORE AVAILABLE
EXTENTS message. Note that there is no minimum space limit for the
allocation.
The largest amount of free space available on the volume will be allocated,
regardless of how small it is. If the specified volume is a CA Dynam/D pool,
the space will be allocated from the first pool volume containing free space.
If, for example, the second volume defined in the pool had enough free space
to allocate the complete request, but the first volume contained only half the
requested amount of free space, the extent would be allocated from the first
volume.
This option requests access to the file version whose generation number,
assigned in the catalog at file creation time, is specified here. For example,
Requests access to the file version relative to the most current one, which is
designated as version G-0. Specifying option code G-0 would access the most
current version; G-1 accesses the next most current one. For example,
Gen=nnn This option requests access to the absolute generation number assigned when
the version is created.
IE ISAM extend
JX Causes a controlled file to be deleted at end of job after the file is processed.
If JX is specified for an input file and the job step abnormally terminates, the
file is not deleted and the job can be rerun.
K Keep SD file
The K option causes the sequential disk file to be kept after closing the file,
even when the user program indicates deletion of the file. The K option, if
specified for sort work files, prevents CA Dynam/D from deleting the file. The
purpose of this option is to override any specification to delete a file.
L Locked file
Data set is locked for read-only usage. If L is not specified, then the file will
not be locked. The L option applies to both CA Dynam/D-controlled and
noncontrolled files.
M Messages to SYSLOG
N No truncate at CLOSE
Prevents automatic secondary allocation for this file. Unnecessary if more than
one allocation is already defined.
NF No fragmentation
O Old file
Enables the user to access existing SD files and open the file without
reallocating the file. The O option causes CA Dynam/D to search for the
specified file in the VTOC and use the existing EXTENT information. This option
is not a default option and cannot be used with files controlled using automatic
secondary allocation.
The P option prohibits the use of dynamic LUB allocation for a file. The default
is to allow dynamic LUB allocation with the following exceptions:
System logical units (for example, SYSRDR, SYSIPT, SYSLST, and so on)
DA (direct access) files having more than one extent
The files described above are always prohibited from dynamic LUB allocation.
This option is useful for conserving space during SORT or MERGE runs. When a
SORTOUT file is opened, it is assigned the same area defined for the SORTIN1
file. In this way, the SORT input and output files occupy the same area.
The S code should be specified on the DLBL statement for SORTOUT, and the
file IDs specified on the DLBL for SORTIN1 and SORTOUT must be identical.
Note that option code S causes CA Dynam/D to search for the specified file in
the VTOC. If the file cannot be found, an error message will be issued and the
job will cancel.
The S:nnn option is used to override the logical unit defined in the program's
DTF, in the Catalog, or both. It is rarely used because CA Dynam/D allocates
an available SYS number at OPEN time.
SX Causes a controlled file to be deleted at the end of a step after the file is
processed.
If SX is specified for an input file and the job step abnormally terminates, the
file is not deleted and the job can be rerun.
The T option causes the ISAM (LOAD) prime EXTENT or SD work file to be
truncated. The T code is not a default option. This option applies only to CA
Dynam/D-controlled files.
The X option causes a file to be deleted from the VTOC whenever it is closed
(for input or output).
Examples
The following examples illustrate the use of various CA Dynam/D option codes.
With CA Dynam/D, you need only define the file in the CA Dynam/D Catalog as
a generation data set and specify the number of generations to be available.
When CA Dynam/D is called to open a generation-type data set as output, the
current generation number is incremented by 1, creating a new generation
number for that output. Keep in mind that this is the file's generation number.
Generation numbers defined by G#nn are put in the last four bytes of the file
ID within the disk's VTOC. So, do not use positions 41—44 of the file ID when
defining the data set to the Catalog. The generation number, which can range
from 1—99 (with full wraparound), is entered in the following format:
G#nn
Example,
'PAY.MASTER.FILE.........................G#15'
CA Dynam 7.1 data sets can also be defined by appending .G#nnnnn to the
end of the data set name by defining the data set with GDGLONG=YES. An
input version from either format is specified by G#nn within the data set name
on the DLBL.
You can use the DYNCAT utility program to display the current generation
number and the maximum number of generations. You can also ALTER the
next generation number to be created.
You can use the DYNVTOC utility program to display the current
generation number.
You can use CUI File Management to display the current generation
number.
In addition, remove their associated version records from the Catalog before
the generation ID is updated with NEXTGEN.
CA Dynam/D will also delete any outdated generations based on the number of
generations defined in the Catalog for this file. If, for any reason, the program
abends, the current generation number remains intact and thus allows the
program to be rerun without any JCL changes. The current generation number
will remain unchanged until the next creation of the file. It is used by CA
Dynam/D to determine which version to access when the file is subsequently
processed as input.
The CA Dynam/D DASD allocation routines will assume that any expired CA
Dynam/D-created file is available for deletion. Generation data sets are always
allocated as permanent files to ensure that they are controlled exclusively by
version.
You can specify an option on the DLBL to control which file generation is to be
accessed. If you don't specify an option, CA Dynam/D will read the most
current file. (To follow the syntax rules defined for CA Dynam/D option codes,
enclose the file generation option in parentheses.) With this option, you can
request access to a version by specifying any one of the following about the
files:
Generational number
Generational Numbers
The generational number is recorded in the file ID of the disk VTOC for each
version. To request a version by its generational number, include that number
as an option in the file ID field of the DLBL statement. For example, to request
the sixth version of a file (defined as G#06 in the VTOC entry for that file), use
the following option code:
// DLBL FILE,'DISK.FILE(G#06)'
// DLBL FILE,'DISK.FILE(G=3)'
The relative generation number refers to a file as it relates to the most current
version, which is designated as G-0. To request a version by its relative
generation number, include that number as an option in the file ID field of the
DLBL statement. The option code for the relative generation number ranges
from G-0 to G-98:
G-98 Asks for the file created 99 generations ago (if it still exists)
If you request the relative version G-2 (2 generations older than the current
one), you will access the Grandfather of the latest version. Specify this option
as follows:
// DLBL FILE,'DISK.FILE(G-2)'
The following examples show the ways of using the generation data set option
to access the same file version. Assuming that six versions of the file exist,
you can access the most current version by specifying the following:
// DLBL DISKOUT,'FILE.OUT(B)'
Note: Programs such as IBM Sort/Merge and the IBM compilers check the
device type assigned to each file before opening any files. Therefore, these
files should be assigned to some DASD device. Thus, at OPEN, CA Dynam/D
AVR will change the assignments to the correct DASD devices.
The assignment should be to a device of the same type as one of the devices
to which CA Dynam/D will change the assignment, because the device type is
determined prior to OPEN, in mixed DASD installations.
CA Dynam/D first decides on which physical device the file belongs. It then
begins searching for an appropriate logical unit. The order of priority for
choosing a logical unit is as follows:
Highest logical unit in the partition, if none of the above has been specified
The search for a logical unit ends when a valid LUB is found.
You can override the DTF or cataloged SYS number by using the DLBL file ID
option code S:nnn. The SYS NUMBER OVERRIDE option code must be enclosed
within parentheses as the last part of the file ID. Use the following format:
where nnn represents the logical unit number. Only programmer LUBs are
valid.
In conjunction with the S:nnn specifications, other option codes can also be
specified within the parentheses. For example, to specify that SYS005 is to be
used as the logical unit for the file and option codes D and I are also to be in
effect, submit this DLBL statement:
LUB Availability
If a COMLUB range has been established for the partition, all LUBs in the range
are searched to locate one which is available (either already assigned to the
correct device, or unassigned—UA). If no COMLUB range has been established,
all programmer LUBs in the partition are searched, beginning with the top and
working down.
IJSYS Files
IJSYS files are never subject to COMLUB. If an assignment for one of these
files must be made, CA Dynam/D will change the assignment instead of
choosing another logical unit.
SD Work Files
When using SD work files, CA Dynam/D searches the volume or pool specified.
If the file is found, CA Dynam/D will access it; otherwise, CA Dynam/D will
allocate it.
DA Files
VSE requires you to include a specific logical unit specification on each EXTENT
statement in the JCL for a DA file. If there are multiple extents on one volume,
the logical unit specified must be the same for each extent. When the file
spans another volume, the SYS number for the first extent on the new volume
must be one number higher than the SYS number for the preceding extent.
Further extents on the new volume must again have the same SYS number as
the first extent on that volume, and so on.
When CA Dynam/D controls the file, logical unit assignments given in the JCL
are checked to ensure that they conform to these rules; they are replaced by
correct ones if they are in error. If no logical unit numbers are given in the
JCL, or if the specified ones are already either assigned to other disks or have
been replaced as described above, then dynamic LUB allocation is invoked.
When a sufficiently long consecutive series of available SYS numbers is found,
it is allocated to the file.
The Dynamic LUB Allocation facility enables you to define ranges of LUBs for
use by CA Dynam/D, whenever an assignment needs to be modified. In order
to use this facility, the COMLUB option record must be defined. For more
information about the use of the COMLUB option record, see the Programming
Guide.
This facility ensures that disk files will not be cross-assigned. For example, if a
program opens two files simultaneously on separate disk volumes with the
same SYS number, CA Dynam/D will use the specified logical unit for the first
file, and will choose another logical unit for the second file from a user-defined
range.
Thus, the two files will have unique SYS numbers pointing to different disk
volumes. This eliminates the danger of cross-assignment.
You can define a range of LUB entries for CA Dynam/D to use, or even a series
of LUB entries. For example, you can define ranges SYS030 through SYS039,
SYS050 through SYS052, and SYS058 through SYS070 as available LUB
entries.
If you specify a range of LUB entries with the COMLUB option record, then CA
Dynam/D checks each LUB entry specified and uses the first free LUB in the
range. Multiple LUB ranges can be specified for each active partition.
LUB Assignments
If all of the LUB entries specified are in use and none are assigned to the
desired disk address, an error message NO FREE LUBS AVAILABLE appears
and the job is canceled. However, if one of the LUB entries is available or is
already assigned to the correct disk address, then the original assignment is
overridden.
If the COMLUB option record is not available, CA Dynam/D will scan all LUB
entries for the partition (in descending order) to find either an available LUB or
a LUB which is assigned to the desired disk address. If such a LUB is found, it
is the one used. Otherwise, an error message appears and the job is canceled.
To Type
The DYNCAT program enables you to create an entry in the CA Dynam Catalog
which records a data file's characteristics and disk space requirements.
Alternatively, you can specify option code C on a DLBL statement, which
automatically creates (or recreates) a catalog entry when the file is closed.
The option code C takes effect only when the data file is being created. The
catalog entry created (at CLOSE) includes information such as the disk volume
the file was created on and the number of tracks allocated and used.
Note that the character C enclosed within the parentheses indicates the file is
to be cataloged when the file is closed.
Disk pool management is a feature which lets you select a volume from a
group or pool of disk volume serial numbers. Defining a pool of disk volumes
provides a better balance of disk volume usage, thereby increasing efficiency.
In addition, you can specify different disk pools for each partition defined in
the operating system.
You can also define protected areas on a disk pool volume, thus ensuring that
these areas are never used by CA Dynam/D for disk space allocation. While CA
Dynam/D will not allocate in these areas, the files therein are still scanned
during mapping, and can be deleted if found to be expired.
When defining a pool of disk volumes, you must specify the following:
A virtual volume serial number which does not exist as a physical DASD
volume
A group of real or existing volume serial numbers which are related to the
virtual serial number
Make certain that the virtual serial number you specify matches the VOLSER
number entered either in an EXTENT statement or in the CA Dynam Catalog.
In order to use the Disk Pool Management facility, the following conditions
must be satisfied:
Data file must be under the control of CA Dynam/D (relative track equal to
the CA Dynam/D trigger value or defined in the Catalog).
This rotation of disk volume usage ensures that data files are spread across
several volumes defined in the pool, thereby creating an environment of
optimum file-accessing efficiency.
When using pool rotation, CA Dynam/D begins searching for free space
starting at the volume which follows the one last used. If the previous open
began its search at the last volume in the pool, the next starting point is at the
first volume defined.
If the starting volume does not contain the required amount of available
space, or is not mounted, the search continues to the next volume. Full
wraparound from the last volume defined in the pool to the first volume is
supported.
// DLBL DTF,'DSN'
// EXTENT SYS008,POOL01,1,0,1,100
In the above example, CA Dynam/D will perform its pool management function
because relative track 1 (the trigger value) is specified and the serial number
POOL01 is defined in the disk pool table. CA Dynam/D then tries to allocate
100 tracks on disk volume SYSWK1, and, if there is insufficient space,
SYSWK2 will be used.
The COMAVR option record is used to specify the DASD devices available to
the CA Dynam system. It can be used to control access to devices by partition,
class, and by CPU, as well as globally for the entire system.
If the COMAVR option record is not defined, all DASD devices attached to the
system are assumed to be controlled by CA Dynam.
If specified, only the indicated devices are processed. Any DASD devices which
are attached to the system but not specified in the COMAVR option record are
ignored by the system, and are not processed while searching for a mounted
DASD volume.
For more information about using the COMAVR option record, see the
Programming Guide.
These commands can be issued from the operator console to allow temporary
bypass of DASD processing and to display the status of a volume.
DD STATUS volser Display the status of a volume that has been taken offline, put online, or
quiesced.
CA Dynam/D searches for a certain group of volume serial numbers, or all the
volume serial numbers defined in the PUB table. (The PUB table describes all
of the devices defined for the operating system.)
To request cross-volume allocation, enter from one to six asterisks (*) on the
EXTENT statement or in the Catalog for the volumes you want referenced. The
number of asterisks you specify within the serial number parameter will
determine the scope of the generic search.
Shown below is the format for specifying each of the six possible methods of
cross-volume allocation:
// EXTENT SYSnnn,vvvvv*
vvvv**
vvv***
vv****
v*****
******
If you specify a volume serial number (volser) of less than six characters and
ending with an asterisk, CA Dynam/D will left-justify the volser and pad
additional asterisks to construct the full six-character volser.
vvvvv vvvvv*
vvvv vvvv**
vvv vvv***
vv vv****
v v*****
To search for all volumes, enter the generic serial number ******.
For example, if you enter serial number SYSWK*, CA Dynam/D searches for a
volume serial beginning with SYSWK. Once such a disk is found, CA Dynam/D
checks if there is enough available space. If not, the next occurrence of that
VOLID beginning with these characters is located. The process continues until
sufficient space is found to meet the allocation requirements for the specified
volume serial number.
Each of the other generic volume serial numbers shown in the table will cause
CA Dynam/D to follow the same method of searching the disks and verifying
their space. The only difference is the scope of the disk search; the more
asterisks you include in the generic VOLSER, the broader the search.
Finally, the serial number ****** causes CA Dynam/D to allocate the file on
any disk, searching each disk volume in PUB or COMAVR order.
The generic serial numbers can be used as pack POOLIDs in conjunction with
Disk Pool Management.
Catalog Management
Sample JCL:
The serial number SYS*** causes CA Dynam/D to search the disks for the first
occurrence of a VOLID beginning with the characters SYS. The first disk found
with 38 contiguous tracks available was SYSWK1 at address 205. Note that the
space was allocated starting at relative track 153. A temporary assignment
was then made for logical unit SYS008 to device address 205.
This facility offers you great flexibility in allocating disk space because CA
Dynam/D will adapt its space allocation algorithm to the particular disk volume
it is processing. Thus, programmers' jobs are much less likely to be
interrupted because of insufficient disk space.
Use this facility when a request for disk space on a specific disk pack has failed
before the file or extent is opened. When a request for disk space on a specific
disk pack has failed before the file or extent is opened, the following occur:
The files listed on the VTOC are then displayed one-by-one, allowing you
to take the appropriate action.
Shown below is a table listing all possible responses you can enter on the
system console to affect a recovery action. For more information about which
specific messages they apply to, see the Message Guide.
To Type
Bypass the file, and display on SYSLOG the next file recorded BYPASS
in the VTOC
Delete the file whose file ID was last displayed on SYSLOG DELETE
Rebuild the VTOC index, if you suspect that there are still BLDINDEX
undeleted expired files on a volume containing a VTOC index
To Type
Stop the job, temporarily, by placing the partition into a wait STOP
state until you restart the job
Specify the volser (pool or nonpool) for which you want to V=volser
allocate space on the disk volume
Example This example illustrates the capability of recovery from insufficient disk space:
// JOB ALLOCATE
// DLBL SDDOUT,'DISK.FILE (I,M)'
// EXTENT SYS006,DOSV**,1,0,1,787
// EXEC PROGRAM
Partition IDs ensure the uniqueness of File IDs across multiple partitions,
Volume serial numbers for a particular partition, or both.
== Partition SYSLOG ID
@ CPUID character
This section describes the JCL defined partition and CPU independent files.
Multi-Partition Files
File Uniqueness:
// DLBL filename,'==.file-id',...
When the file is processed, CA Dynam/D will replace the two equal signs
('==') with the partition (BG, F1, F2, and so on) in which the job is running.
Files must be defined for all partitions. However, the same label information
can be used for all jobs in any partition.
Multi-CPU Files
// DLBL filename,'CPU--.file-id'
At processing time, CA Dynam/D will substitute the second '-' with the single-
letter CPU ID generated from the System adapter option record.
An important application of partition and CPU IDs is the definition of disk files
(such as sort, compiler, or library files) that can have identical file IDs in two
or more machines or partitions. CA Dynam/D eliminates the maintenance of
multiple sets of labels. Thus, the same Job Control statements can be run from
anywhere with complete file uniqueness. For example:
// JOB DYNAM
// DLBL IJSYSLN,'===.SYSLNK'
// EXTENT SYSLNK,POOL01,1,0,1,12
This is run on a machine with the serial number 32315, in the BG partition.
CPUID id=A,SERIAL=0000215043810000
CPUID id=B,SERIAL=0003231543410000
CPUID id=C,SERIAL=0002096843610000
Note: For more information about updating the System Adapter option record,
see the CA CIS Administration Guide.
'BGB.SYSLNK'
Single-Partition Volumes
You can also use the partition ID to uniquely define a volume serial number for
a particular partition. To do this, supply two hyphens ('--') as the last two
characters of the volume serial number on an EXTENT statement. For
example:
The following example illustrates the DYNCAT DEFINE statements required. For
more information about the DEFINE command, see the chapter "Maintaining
The Catalog."
// JOB DEFINE
// EXEC DYNCAT
DEFINE'BG.CPU-A.IJSY01' DISK ALLOC=(POOL01,TRK,100)
DEFINE'F3.CPU-A.IJSY01' DISK ALLOC=(POOL01,TRK,100)
DEFINE'BG.CPU-B.IJSY01' DISK ALLOC=(POOL01,TRK,100)
DEFINE'F3.CPU-B.IJSY01' DISK ALLOC=(POOL01,TRK,100)
/*
/&
Truncating Files
SD Files
In this example, the file is not truncated in EXTENT size to the amount of disk
storage actually utilized. The corresponding VTOC entry for this file remains
unmodified.
ISAM Files
For ISAM files, you can truncate the specified prime EXTENT by specifying
option code T in the DLBL statement.
Truncation will take place on FBA DASD in even multiples of 8 physical blocks
(512 bytes each physical block).
For example, if a file were to be created with an allocation of 160 blocks, and
only 147 blocks were used, the file would be truncated to block 152 rather
than 147. This restriction allows CA Dynam/D to control allocations on these
volumes with a bit map, greatly reducing system overhead.
Truncation on CKD DASD will take place to the track following the last record
of EOF.
DA Files
Deleting Files
This section describes how to delete data and work files.
You can specify in the JCL that a sequential disk (SD), direct access (DA) or
ISAM file is to be deleted when closed. The JCL entry overrides the default
option (no deletion). To request deletion, specify either of these DLBL option
codes:
When deleting a file, the VTOC entry for that file is deleted—not the actual
data on the disk.
A special case is encountered for IBM SORT work files. The IBM Sort/Merge
program does not close the SORTWK files. Therefore, CA Dynam/D will only
analyze the DLBL statements for the SORT work files when a SORTOUT
file name is closed. CA Dynam/D will then assume the D (delete) option.
If you do not specify the file name SORTOUT for the file used as the sort
output, you should include the option code W for that file; otherwise, the
SORTWK files will not be deleted. When a sort output file defined with option
code W is closed, CA Dynam/D will delete the SORTWK files used during the
job.
Sort work files used for CA SORT are always deleted if no longer needed.
In the following examples, the Catalog is not being used and DLBL and
EXTENT statements are supplied.
Example:
// DLBL DTF,'DSN',,SD
// EXTENT SYS001,VOLSER,,,1,100
Example:
// DLBL DTF,'DSN',2099/365,SD
// EXTENT SYS001,VOLSER,,,1,100
If the retention specified is zero, or the expiration is less than or equal to the
current date, the DEFRET value from the DYNAM/D option record is used.
Example:
// DLBL DTF,'DSN',67/001,SD
// EXTENT SYS001,VOLSER,,,1,100
In the following examples, the CA Dynam Catalog is being used and only a
DLBL statement is supplied:
Example:
// DLBL DTF,'DSN',,SD
Example:
// DLBL DTF,'DSN',2099/365,SD
Example:
// DLBL DTF,'DSN',0,SD
CA Dynam/D will always check for an equal file ID when allocating disk space
for an output file. If an equal file is found, and the file is nonpermanent, the
original file is immediately deleted from the VTOC without displaying an EQUAL
FILE-ID message on the operator's console.
CA Dynam/D will also attempt to find this permanent file on other volumes
(only if a pool or generic volume is specified), and the operator can either
DELETE the equal file found or IGNORE the file found.
These messages are defined in the Catalog by using the DYNCAT DEFINE or
ALTER functions. For more information, see the chapter "Maintaining the
Catalog—DYNCAT Program."
They will be issued automatically by the system at the indicated point in the
job.
For example,
would result in the following two messages for the output file:
To Issue At Specify
SORT Considerations
Many considerations apply when using CA Dynam/D with sort utility programs
other than CA SORT, CA Sort/Merge software product.
CA SORT is a SORT and MERGE program which completely replaces the IBM
Sort/Merge. CA Dynam/D and CA SORT have been designed to complement
one another. Thus, if your data center uses CA SORT 7.2 or above, CA
Dynam/D provides an interface for it.
CA SORT Interface
Provides the correct block and record size so that the CA Dynam Catalog
and the VTOC for the SORTOUT file are correctly updated.
Specifies the input file size, if you do not, and passes it to CA SORT
(SIZE=n of SORT control statement).
Truncates the SORTOUT file; all unused DASD space allocated for this file
is released when the SORTOUT file is closed.
Allocates secondary disk space only for the last of the SORTWKn files.
Deletes the SORTWKn files from the VTOC as soon they are no longer
needed.
Note: If the facility to build the SORTWKn labels is used, the allocation of
DASD space is calculated either by CA SORT (based on information you pass in
the SIZE=n parameter) or by CA Dynam/D (from VTOC information collected
from all volumes where the requested SORTINn files reside). Normally, the
information passed is correct. But to avoid running out of available extents for
SORTWKn, generate CA Dynam/D with Automatic Secondary Allocation.
// ASSGN and
IBM sort files must be assigned to the proper device type before the SORT is
invoked. Otherwise the sort message UNIT ASSGN ERROR or a channel
program error can appear, and the SORT job will cancel. For example, if the
SORT files are to be read or created on a 3380 disk volume, these files must
be assigned to a 3380 device prior to running the SORT.
CA Dynam/D does not support secondary allocation for IBM sort work files.
These files are deleted from the VTOC if all the following conditions are met:
SORTOUT is closed
DTFname of the sort work files is SORTWK
The VTOC and CA Dynam Catalog are not correctly updated, because there is
no block and record size available for the IBM sort output file. This is because
IBM's Sort/Merge defines SORTOUT as a DTFPH file.
Using Option S
Option code S will be ignored for CA SORT. The same file ID can be used
without special processing, because CA SORT opens the output file after the
input files are closed.
This option code causes CA Dynam/D to open the SORTOUT (or equivalent) file
to write over the SORTIN file if it exists. Otherwise the file will be allocated as
a normal SORTOUT file. With the IBM Sort/Merge, option code S can cause
problems and should be used with caution. For example, if the SORTOUT file
has a smaller block size than the SORTIN file, the SORTOUT file can exceed
the existing SORTIN file capacity. This causes the VSE message NO MORE
AVAILABLE EXTENTS to appear.
In addition, if multiple SORTIN files are processed, option code S should not be
specified unless the output from the SORT will fit within the extents for
SORTIN1.
The permanent option (PERM) sets values that will remain in effect until the
next IPL or until changed by another SET command with the permanent
option. (PERM is also the default for the SET command.)
You can override the permanent values on a job-by-job basis by using the
temporary option (TEMP). Any options specified with the TEMP option of the
SET command remain in effect until either another SET command is entered,
which changes the previous specifications, or END-OF-JOB. The values then
revert to the permanent settings or null values.
The job control exit can be used to convert JCL which was created to
operate on one type of DASD device to operate on a different DASD device
type. The user supplies information necessary to perform the desired
conversion.
You can issue an individual SET command for each operand defined or a
single SET command specifying all of the operands.
If you specify a single SET command with multiple options, separate the
operands by a comma (no blank spaces).
[ CPCMD='command' ]
[ CONSOLE= {ON|OFF|NULL } ]
SET [ DYNAMD= {OFF|ON } ]
[ $JOBEXIT= {AFTER|BEFORE } ]
[ LABELMSG= {ON|OFF } ]
[ {PERM|TEMP } ]
[ PRINT= {AFTER|BOTH|OFF|ON|NULL } ]
The following tables describe the SET command operands more fully. They are
presented alphabetically.
CONSOLE= Indicates whether system messages are to display on the system console.
DYNAMD= Indicates whether CA Dynam/D is to process in the partition in which the SET
command is issued.
The effect of this command is permanent in static partitions until the next SET
DYNAMD command is issued in the same partition or until the VSE machine is
IPLed.
$JOBEXIT= Specifies whether the standard job exit ($JOBEXIT) will be processed BEFORE
or AFTER the CA Dynam common job exit.
If you have specified processing in the standard $JOBEXIT which will effect CA
Dynam processing, (i.e. CA Dynam option substitution for TLBL|DLBLs), code
the SET $JOBEXIT=BEFORE command.
LABELMSG= Determines whether the CADC950I message will appear for TLBL|DLBL
statements containing CA Dynam option codes. This message displays the
original file ID information before processing options are removed by the CA
Dynam Job Exit.
PERM|TEMP PERM is the default if you specify neither PERM nor TEMP.
PRINT= Relates to the printing of CA Dynam/D informative messages. The value set
for PRINT takes precedence over any option codes defined for a file. For
example, if PRINT=OFF is specified, the I option code for a file will be ignored.
The options AFTER and BOTH determine the carriage control position for
printing messages on SYSLST. They protect CA Dynam/D messages from
being overwritten by user programs which issue WRITE statements without
ADVANCE instructions.
CA Dynam/D provides the DYNOPEN utility program to let you restart trigger-
driven and catalog-controlled single or multi-extent files. However, multi-
extent files created through the automatic secondary allocation facility cannot
be successfully restarted. Generation data sets can also be restarted if you use
the DYNCAT utility program prior to restarting, as described below.
For more information about using DYNOPEN, see the chapter "Supporting Disk
File Management."
Restart Processing
The logical unit must be specified as the same logical unit that was
assigned when the checkpoints were taken. During RESTART processing,
the logical unit is checked against the checkpoint record, and if they are
not the same, an IBM error message is issued.
Before restarting a checkpointed generation data set, you must manually add
that version to the Catalog prior to running DYNOPEN. It must be added
manually because the Catalog update which normally occurs during CLOSE
processing might not have occurred if the job terminated abnormally. You
must use the DYNCAT ADD function to add that version.
Move entire disk volumes or data sets between tape and disk.
Pre-open disk files so that utility programs can take advantage of the
facilities of CA Dynam/D.
Two types of control statements (VTOC and VOL) are needed to run the
CAINTDK program. Each has its own format and set of syntax rules, as
described in the following topics.
Start the VTOC command in position one, followed by at least one space.
STRTADR= {nnnnnn|cccchh }
Defines the beginning address of the VTOC extent, PBN if FBA, or CCCCHH if
CKD. It can overlap the old extent.
EXTENTS=nnnnn Indicates the number of Format 4 and Format 5 records for FBA; number of
tracks desired in new VTOC for CKD.
CISIZE=nnnnn Optional operand. Specifies the CISIZE in bytes desired for the new VTOC for
FBA. The recommended size is 2048. This operand is ignored for CKD. The
default is 1024.
OLDVOLID=xxxxxx Optional operand. Identifies the volume serial number of the DASD volume to
be reformatted. If omitted, the default is whatever volser is found on the
assigned volume.
SYSNO=nnn Optional operand. Defines the logical unit to be used to read the old VTOC and
write a new one. The logical unit must be assigned to the proper device. If not
specified, SYS001 is the default.
The VOL control statement uses the fixed format shown below. Start the VOL
command in position one.
VOLnxxxxxx,ownerid
xxxxxx Identifies the volume to be modified. We recommend using all six characters.
(For more information, see the IBM Initialize Disk Utility Manual.)
Ownerid Optional operand. Specifies the code that identifies the owner to be entered
into the volume label. 1—14 alphanumeric characters; embedded blanks
acceptable.
Example
// JOB CAINTDK
// ASSGN SYS001,1E8 /* DASD VOLUME TO BE MODIFIED */
// EXEC CAINTDK
VTOC STRTADR=002,EXTENTS=600,CISIZE=2048,SYSNO=001,OLDVOLID=OLDFBA
VOL1NEWFBA,USERS-NAME
/*
/&
Converting EXTENTs—DYNCONV
The DYNCONV program lets you convert the EXTENT statements in a job
stream to accommodate the value of the CA Dynam/D trigger. It produces a
listing of the old and new EXTENT statements.
If you want to modify only the relative track/block value to the CA Dynam/D
trigger value, omit the CONVERT control statement. However, if you supply a
CONVERT statement for a job stream whose EXTENTs already specify the CA
Dynam/D trigger, the allocation value conversion is still performed.
Apply the following rules when using the DYNCONV control statement:
OLDDEV=nnnn Specifies either the device type, for which the input job stream is set up, or a
device conversion value to be used for the conversion calculations.
For device type values, you can specify 2311, 2314, 3310, 3330, 3340, 3350,
3370, 3375, 3380, 3390 or 9345. For any other FBA devices specify 3370.
NEWDEV=nnnn Specifies either the device type on which the output job stream is to be used,
or a conversion constant value to be used for the conversion calculations. You
can use any of the values listed above.
PERCENT=nnn Optional operand. Specifies a percentage of the primary extent allocation that
is to be used for the generated secondary extents.
If the JCL is being converted to operate on a new device type (OLDDEV and
NEWDEV parameters), the calculated percentage is based on the allocation
value of the primary extent after the device conversion calculations have been
performed.
Denote the end of the input by including a *END statement in the input job
stream.
The conversion ratio is computed by dividing the old device value by the
new device value.
Example 1:
Convert a job stream that operates on 3330 devices to run on 3310 FBA
devices. The computed conversion ratio is 25.45:1 (13030 / 512).
Input:
Output:
Example 2:
You have determined that a 2:1 allocation ratio is required for the files in a job
stream. The files are already controlled by CA Dynam/D.
Input:
Output:
Example 3:
Input:
Output:
// JOB UPDATE
// DLBL MASTER,'MASTER FILE INPUT',2099/365
// EXTENT SYS010,111111,1,0,1,38
// DLBL RPTS,'UPDATE REPORT FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS010,111111,1,0,1,19
// ASSGN SYS010,DISK,VOL=111111,SHR
// EXEC UPDPROG
/*
/&
// JOB PRINT UPDATE RPTS
// DLBL RPTS,'UPDATE REPORT FILE'
// EXTENT SYS010,111111,0,1,1,19
// ASSGN SYS010,DISK,VOL=111111,SHR
// EXEC REPORTS
/&
Pre-Open Processing—DYNOPEN
The DYNOPEN utility program lets you pre-open a disk data set. It performs
basic CA Dynam/D and Catalog Management services for files that are to be
processed by other utility programs (such as IBM's DITTO or IDCAMS utilities).
It also supports programs that do not issue opens when restarting from
checkpoint.
These other utility programs access the label information and validate the
logical unit assignment of files to be processed before the files are actually
opened. DITTO and IDCAMS require the use of DYNOPEN. Without the use of
DYNOPEN, these types of programs can cancel because CA Dynam/D has not
been invoked to perform its open processing.
DYNOPEN can also be used to resolve labels for the IBM SORT product, SM2.
SM2 performs pre-open checking of volume serial number and extents for
input files, which is not compatible with CA Dynam/D catalog-controlled files,
POOL volume serial numbers, and AVR facilities, unless DYNOPEN is used.
The DYNOPEN program uses only one type of control statement, the OPEN
statement. Apply the following syntax rules to this statement:
DYNOPEN normally reads input from SYSIPT. When the OPEN function is used
for SYSIPT, DYNOPEN must be directed to read its input from SYSRDR. The
use of UPSI 001 reassigns SYSIPT and causes the DYNOPEN OPEN function to
read its input from SYSRDR instead.
FILE=dtfname Defines the dtfname to be used for the file. This name must be the same as
the dtfname specified on the file's DLBL statement.
DISK= Optional operand. Defines the disk device type of the file. Valid parameters are
2311, 2314, 3310, 3330, 3340, 3350, 3370, 3375, 3380, 3390, and 9345. The
default is 3330.
MODE= Optional operand. Specifies if the file is to be input or output. INPUT causes
the existing file to be located. A specification of OUTPUT causes the file to be
allocated. This parameter defaults to INPUT.
UNIT=SYSxxx Optional operand. Defines the logical unit to be used for the file. It can be
specified as either a programmer or system logical unit:
DYNOPEN normally reads its input from SYSIPT. The use of UPSI 001
causes DYNOPEN to read its input from SYSRDR instead.
// DLBL MASTER,'PAYROLL.MASTER'
// EXEC DYNOPEN
OPEN FILE=MASTER UNIT=SYS011 MODE=INPUT TYPE=SD
/*
// DLBL ISFILE,'ACCT.FILE',10
// EXEC DYNOPEN
OPEN FILE=ISFILE MODE=OUTPUT TYPE=IS DISK=3340 UNIT=SYS002
/*
// JOB EXAMPLE1
// DLBL UIN,'TEST.INPUT'
// EXTENT SYS040,335000,1,0,1,3
// EXTENT SYS040,335000,1,3,1,2
// DLBL UOUT,'TEST.OUTPUT'
// EXTENT SYS041,335001,1,0,1,3
// EXTENT SYS041,335001,1,1,1,2
// ASSGN SYS007,181
// TLBL CHKPT
// MTC REW,SYS007
// EXEC DYNOPEN,SIZE=DYNOPEN
OPEN FILE=UIN,UNIT=SYS040,MODE=INPUT
OPEN FILE=UOUT,UNIT=SYS041,MODE=INPUT
/*
// RSTRT SYS007,10,CHKPT
/*
/&
* $$ EOJ
// JOB EXAMPLE2
* ADD CHECKPOINTED GDG #3 AS CURRENT VERSION FOR RESTART *
// EXEC DYNCAT,SIZE=128K
ADD 'TEST.OUTPUT.CAT' DISK VOL=335001 GDSID=03 VER=001
/*
// DLBL UIN,'TEST.INPUT.CAT'
// DLBL UOUT,'TEST.OUTPUT.CAT'
// ASSGN SYS007,181
// TLBL CHKPT
// MTC REW,SYS007
// EXEC DYNOPEN,SIZE=DYNOPEN
OPEN FILE=UIN,UNIT=SYS040,MODE=INPUT
OPEN FILE=UOUT,UNIT=SYS041,MODE=INPUT
/*
// RSTRT SYS007,10,CHKPT
/*
/&
* $$ EOJ
Overview of DYNUTIL
display Data files in hexadecimal or character format; the home address and count
fields of disk records
open/close The tape file with such options as rewind, no rewind, as well as rewind and
unload
restore A specific file or entire disk volume from tape to disk or a group of files
(generic) to disk
Error and warning messages issued by DYNUTIL are highlighted with the word
ERROR or WARNING on the far right side of the message.
You can enter DYNUTIL commands from the operator console, if desired. If a
command function cancels, the next command is processed by DYNUTIL. You
can define all commands in a SYSIPT file, which is device-independent. Error
messages are directed to SYSLST, which is also device-independent.
The Job Control statement // UPSI can be specified to designate the following
parameters for running DYNUTIL:
UPSI 1000000 DYNUTIL commands can be entered from the operator's console.
UPSI 0100000 If DYNUTIL cannot locate the volume specified in a VOL= parameter, it is to
search for a matching pool definition.
UPSI 00100000 The DYNUTIL program cancels in the event any function experiences an error.
UPSI 00010000 The DYNUTIL program cancels with a dump in the event any function
experiences an error.
UPSI 00001000 The DYNUTIL program will not access the Catalog to obtain GDG information if
this bit is on, unless the CATALOG parameter is also used.
UPSI 00000100 When the DYNUTIL DELETE command is specified for a GDG data set, the file
will be deleted, but the CADD567 message will not be issued.
UPSI 00000001 Reserved for internal use. Must be 0 for normal execution of DYNUTIL.
DYNUTIL Commands
CLOSE Close the DYNUTIL tape file with the selected options. (Optional command—
overrides defaults for file CLOSE.)
LISTTAPE List the data set name of each file found on DYNUTIL-created tapes.
OPEN Open the DYNUTIL tape file with the selected options. (Optional command—
overrides defaults for file OPEN.)
TAPE Rewind, rewind/unload, and back and forward space a DYNUTIL-created tape.
Default Information
ALTER Command
The ALTER command changes the expiration date, file ID of files, or both. You
can also data-secure or remove data security for a file.
Required Parameter
'file-id' Identifies the file to be altered. Use the 44-character file identification for the
desired file. You can omit trailing blanks.
'file-id*' Indicates that all files starting with the file ID specified are to be altered.
Required Parameter
CATALOG Causes the Catalog to be searched to locate the data set. This greatly
improves efficiency because only the volume recorded in the Catalog as
containing the file will be searched.
VOL=volser Defines the six-character volume serial number of the disk volume to be
searched for the desired file. It can be a generic volser. For example,
VOL=WRK*** searches all volumes whose VOL1 begins with WRK.
POOL=poolid Defines the six-character serial number of the disk pool to be searched for the
desired file. The poolid specified must be defined as a virtual volume with the
COMPOOL option record.
Optional Parameter
EXPDATE=yy/ddd|yyyy/ddd
Changes the file's expiration date to the one you specify here (yy or yyyy is
the year, and ddd is a day of that year). To designate the file as expired,
specify an expiration date that is less than the current one. To extend a file's
retention period, increase the expiration date.
DSFON|DSFOFF Optional parameter. Enables/disables the data-secure feature for the file.
PARTIAL Optional parameter for SD files only. Controls the alteration of disk files that
have multiple extents existing on multiple volumes. If either VOL= or POOL=
is specified for a file residing on multiple volumes, the ALTER will not complete
without the PARTIAL parameter. PARTIAL allows ALTER to complete even if
only a portion of the file resides on the specified volumes. If you omit
PARTIAL, only complete files will be altered (unless PARTIAL(NO) is defined in
the DYNAM/D option record).
Y ALTER executes.
RENAME='new-file' Optional parameter. Redefines the file ID currently in the VTOC. The new file
ID must be enclosed within apostrophes. Do not specify RENAME= when using
a generic file ID; it could create duplicate file IDs in a VTOC.
Note: Error messages CADD566 and CADD567 are produced when DSFON is
specified and a file is found that has an expiration date of 2099/366 (PERM) or
is a data-secured file. The operator can respond with IGNORE, CANCEL or
BYPASS to these messages. For more information, see the Message Guide.
Examples:
CLOSE Command
The CLOSE command selects options for the tape file at close and writes the
EOF record. It must be specified to close the current tape data set before
opening a different tape (OPEN); otherwise, it is optional.
dtfname Identifies the file name or DTFname of the tape file to be closed.
Optional Parameters
The following parameters are optional. REW, RUN, and NORWD are mutually
exclusive.
RELEASE Releases the logical unit assignment for the tape. The default is not to release
the assignment.
At the end of DYNUTIL processing (EOJ), any tape file that is currently
open is automatically closed with the default options.
Examples:
Y Restores files beginning with the characters PAY from a different tape volume.
// JOB DUMPREST
// TLBL TAPE1
// ASSGN SYS009,281 TAPE ASSIGNMENT
// TLBL TAPE2
// ASSGN SYS019,283
// EXEC DYNUTIL
OPEN TAPE1 (OUTPUT REW SYS009)
DUMP VOL=WORK01
CLOSE TAPE1
OPEN TAPE1 (SYS009 REW INPUT)
RESTORE VOL=WORK01 EXPIRE=98/001 X
CLOSE TAPE1 (RUN)
OPEN TAPE2 (REW SYS019)
RESTORE 'PAY*' Y
CLOSE TAPE2
/*
/&
DELETE Command
The DELETE command deletes (completely eliminates) file IDs from the VTOC
of a disk volume.
DELETE FILELBL=dtfname
Required Parameter
'file-id' Specifies the 44-character file identification of the file to be deleted. You can
omit trailing blanks.
'file-id*' Represents the files whose VTOC entries are to be deleted. All file IDs
beginning with the characters specified here are deleted.
FILELBL=dtfname Specifies that the file is to be accessed using the label information found on
the DLBL of the indicated dtfname. Do NOT include any other parameters
when specifying FILELBL=dtfname.
If you use FILELBL with DLBL and EXTENT statements, you must include the
DYNAM TRIGGER value in the EXTENT statement.
Note: Error messages CADD566 and CADD567 are produced when file-id* is
specified and a file is found that is a permanent or data-secured file. The
operator can respond with IGNORE, CANCEL, or BYPASS to these messages.
For more information, see the Message Guide.
Optional Parameter
CATALOG Causes the Catalog to be searched to locate the data set. This greatly
improves efficiency because only the volume recorded in the Catalog as
containing the file will be searched. If the file is not found in the volume
indicated by the Catalog, it will not be deleted.
POOL=poolid Identifies the six-character serial number of the disk pool to be searched to
locate the desired file. The poolid specified must be defined as a virtual volume
using the COMPOOL option record
VOL=volser Defines the six-character volume serial number of the disk volume containing
the file to be deleted. It can be specified as a generic volume serial number
when suffixed by asterisks.
EXPIRE Optional parameter. Deletes all expired files on the indicated volume.
PARTIAL Optional parameter for SD files only. Controls the deletion of disk files that
have multiple extents existing on multiple volumes or files that have never
been closed. If either VOL= or POOL= is specified for a file residing on multiple
volumes, the DELETE will not complete without the PARTIAL parameter.
PARTIAL allows DELETE to complete even if only a portion of the file resides on
the specified volumes. If you omit PARTIAL, only complete files will be deleted
(unless PARTIAL(NO) is set in the DYNAM/D option record).
Y DELETE executes.
PURGE Optional parameter valid with CATALOG only. This causes the catalog version
records, associated with the files being deleted by the DYNUTIL DELETE
function, to also be deleted.
Note: Use DYNPRINT VTOC to determine whether a file is not closed or has
multiple extents on other volumes.
Examples:
Delete all payroll files (file-IDs that begin with PAY) that are contained in the
pool PAPOOL.
DISPLAY Command
'file-id' Identifies the file to be displayed. Supply the 44-character file identification
code; you can omit trailing blanks.
VOL=volser Identifies the six-character volume serial number of the disk volume on which
the file resides. You can specify a generic volume serial number.
CATALOG Specifies that only the Catalog is to be searched for the file.
POOL=poolid Specifies a virtual serial number that has been defined as a CA Dynam/D disk
pool using the COMPOOL option record.
VOL=volid Identifies the six-character volume serial number of the disk volume on which
the file resides. This can be specified as a generic volume serial number when
suffixed with asterisks.
EXTENT=(cc1,hh1,cc cc1,hh1 specifies the cylinder and head address at which to begin the
2,hh2) display.
cc2,hh2 specifies the ending disk address. If you do not supply the ending
address, cc2,hh2 is set to cc1,hh1, displaying only one track.
PBN=(pbn1,pbn2, cisize)
pbn1 specifies the physical block number at which to begin the display.
pbn2 specifies the ending pbn. If you do not supply the ending address, pbn2
is set to pbn1, displaying only one CI.
cisize specifies the control interval size. If you omit it, 512 is used.
If you supply a cisize, the pbn2 operand is required (can be equal to pbn1 if
you want to display only one CI).
Note: PBN can also be used for CKD devices and is then interpreted as a
relative track number.
The Option List shown that follows applies to both file-id and VOL=. You can
specify any or all operands in this list.
ALL Indicates that the operands CHAR, HA, COUNT, and HEX are all to be used.
CHARSET= {48|60| Defines the printer character set to be used for the display.
ALL }
HA Specifies that the home address and record zero are to be displayed from each
track.
LRECL=nnnnn Defines the number of bytes in each logical record of a blocked file.
SKIP Specifies that the SYSLST output is to be suppressed can be used to read the
home addresses for disk validity checking.
Both HEX and CHAR can be specified to produce both a hexadecimal and
translated character format display (DEFAULT).
Example
DUMP Command
The DUMP command copies a disk file to tape. (For more information about
copying it back to disk, see the RESTORE command.)
Formats:
Required parameter
'file-id' Identifies the specific file ID for transfer to tape. You can select a specific
generation by identifying the relative generation number or absolute
generation number in parentheses, respectively (G-nn) or (G#nn). If a specific
generation is not specified, then the most current generation is accessed.
Note: If you specify file-id or file-id*, you must also specify a VOL=volid or
POOL=poolid.
VOL=volser Indicates the disk volume from which all files are selected for transfer to tape.
The volser must be specified as a six-character real volume serial number (a
pool or generic volume serial number is not allowed here). This is a full volume
dump.
CATALOG Specifies to DYNUTIL that only files with existing catalog versions should be
dumped. Specifying CATALOG on the dump action dumps all files with a
matching file-ID if they are found in the CATALOG only. DYNUTIL supports the
catalog option when used with the DUMP command.
POOL=poolid Specifies the six-character serial number that identifies a pool of disk volumes
from which to dump the indicated files. The pool is defined in the COMPOOL
option record.
VOL=volid Specifies the six-character serial number of the disk volume, such as SYSWK4,
or collection of disk volumes, such as SYS***, from which to dump the
indicated files.
Optional Parameter
The optional parameters below are valid only if the CATALOG option is not
used.
EXPIRE=yy/ddd|yyyy/ddd
Dumps only files whose expiration date equals or exceeds the specified
expiration date (yy or yyyy is the year, and ddd is a day of that year).
PERM Dumps only files with an expiration date equal to the date specified by the
AUTODTE parameter of the DYNAM/D option record.
RETAIN Dumps only files with an expiration date equal to the date specified by the
MANDTE parameter of the DYNAM/D option record.
UNEXPIRED Dumps only those files whose expiration date equals or exceeds today's date.
When dumping a specific file ID, all forms of partition, CPU independence, or
both, that are acceptable to CA Dynam/D can be used in control statements.
For more information, see Defining Independent Files.
Examples
DUMP VOL=CKD019
Given a DYNAM/D option record with AUTODTE(2099360), dump all files with
an expiration date of 2099/360:
Dump all files with an expiration date equal to or greater than January 23,
2000.
LISTTAPE Command
The LISTTAPE command lists the data set names of all files found on tapes
created by DYNUTIL.
Example
// JOB LISTTAPE
// ASSGN SYS006,281
// TLBL RESTORE,'file-id'
// EXEC DYNUTIL,SIZE=128K
LISTTAPE
/*
/&
OPEN Command
The OPEN command selects options for the tape file to be dumped/restored.
This command is only necessary to override default options for processing the
tape. Otherwise, the open will take place on the first DUMP, RESTORE, REORG,
or LISTTAPE command encountered, using the default file name and logical
unit. For more information, see Overview Of DYNUTIL.
dtfname Identifies the file name or DTFname of the tape file to be opened. A TLBL
statement must be included in the job stream for this file name.
Optional Parameters
The following parameters are optional. REW and NORWD are mutually
exclusive.
SYSnnn Specifies the logical unit to be used in assigning the tape. If omitted, the
default is SYS005 for dtfname DUMP and SYS006 for all other dtfnames.
HDRINFO Prints information related to the standard labeled tape on SYSLOG. If this is
desired, you must specify HDRINFO, because it is not the default.
INPUT Opens the tape file for input prior to the RESTORE, REORG, or LISTTAPE
function. It is the default.
OUTPUT Opens the tape file for output prior to the DUMP function. Overrides the
default, INPUT.
The OPEN and CLOSE commands are provided to allow user control of tape
data sets. This allows usage of any number of tape files during a single
execution of DYNUTIL.
If you issue an OPEN immediately following a CLOSE (rewind), you can get
message CADT004 requesting a volume mount. This occurs because OPEN
AVR processing starts while the REWIND is still in progress. Wait until the
rewind is complete and then reply END/ENTER.
Note: For more information about a way to circumvent this problem globally,
see the STOP option of the DYNAM/T option record.
Examples
Y Restores files beginning with the characters PAY from a different tape volume.
// JOB DUMPREST
// TLBL TAPE1
// ASSGN SYS009,281 TAPE ASSIGNMENT
// TLBL TAPE2
// ASSGN SYS019,283
// EXEC DYNUTIL
OPEN TAPE1 (OUTPUT REW SYS009)
DUMP VOL=WORK01
CLOSE TAPE1
OPEN TAPE1 (SYS009 REW INPUT)
RESTORE VOL=WORK01 EXPIRE=98/001 X
CLOSE TAPE1 (RUN)
OPEN TAPE2 (REW SYS019)
RESTORE 'PAY*' Y
CLOSE TAPE2
/*
/&
REORG Command
You can perform six distinctive types of REORGs, each having a different
purpose and format. They are listed in the following table:
To Use
Method
Do a basic REORG 1
Method 1: This is the basic REORG. Files are restored to the original volume regardless of
whether they are GDS files. In this format, the required file-id parameter and
the CATALOG/NONCATAL options let you select files from the tape to be
processed. The NEWDSN= option is permitted and allows files to be restored
under a new or modified name using the REORG command
Method 2 Use this method to migrate files to another volume or device type. Required
for this method are the file-id and VOL= and/or POOL= parameters;
CONVERT/NONCATAL and NEWDSN= are optional. The file-id allows selection,
as does the NONCATAL option. The VOL=/POOL= parameter identifies the
target volumes for the REORG. CONVERT also causes the file allocation
information in the Catalog to be modified as appropriate for the new device
type. NEWDSN= allows renaming.
Method 3 Essentially, the same as Method 1, but this method restricts processing to
generation-type files only. All of these parameters are required for this
method. Renaming is not supported.
Method 4 Use this method when the target file is to be a new version of an existing GDS.
The selected input file does not have to be a GDS version. Each of these
parameters is required here except NEWDSN=, the option that allows
renaming.
Method 5 When the target file is to replace an existing version of an existing GDS, use
this method. The selected input file does not have to be a GDS version. Each
of these parameters, including NEWDSN=, is required for this format.
NEWDSN= identifies the version to replace, and can also be used to support
renaming.
Required Parameters
file-id(G-nn) or file-id(G#nn).
Note that the following forms are not valid together with GDS=NEW or
GDS=REPLACE.
'file-id*' Identifies a group of files to be processed, all with file-id as the initial
characters. If any generation-type file is encompassed in the specification, all
generations on the tape are selected.
CATALOG Only those selected files that are in the Catalog at the time the REORG
command is invoked are processed. This option applies to Method 1. If neither
CATALOG nor NONCATAL is specified in Method 1, all files selected by the file-
id, file-id* or '*' parameter are processed.
CONCATEX When specified will force DYNUTIL to create just one extent when a multi-
extent file is being restored using the REORG command. The number of tracks
specified on the single extent will be calculated by adding up all the tracks
specified for all the extents.
CONVERT Specifies that the allocation control information in the Catalog (for selected,
catalog-controlled files) is to be converted to reflect the new specific or generic
volid or pool-id. If the new location reflects a change in device type, the
amounts of space to be allocated are recalculated accordingly.
For generation-type files, CONVERT processing takes place only once, when
the current (most recent) version of the file is restored using the REORG
command.
By default, the file-id on the DLBL is ignored and the file-id from the tape is
used. If the DLBL implies Catalog control but the selected file-id is not catalog-
controlled, the REORG will not take place.
Note that GDS=NEW and GDS=REPLACE are not permitted together with file-
id* or '*'.
NEWDSN= Specifies a different file-id (other than the one by which the file is selected
from the input tape) created by the REORG. Additionally, when used with
GDS=REPLACE, specifies the target version.
'dsn' The selected file is restored under the name dsn using
the REORG command If GDS=NEW is specified, the
selected file is restored as the newest version of dsn, and
the oldest version is deleted. If GDS=REPLACE is
specified, the selected file is restored to replace the
current version of dsn.
'*(G-nn)' The selected file uses the REORG command to replace the
nnth relative version of itself.
'*(G#nn)' The selected file uses the REORG command to replace the
version of itself having absolute generation number nn.
'dsn(G-nn)' The selected file uses the REORG command to replace the
nnth relative version of the GDS called dsn.
'dsn(G#nn)' The selected file uses the REORG command to replace the
version of the GDS called dsn that has absolute version
number nn.
'dsn*(G-nn)'
NONAMECH Specifies that the file uses the REORG command using the file-id on the DLBL,
to rename the file from the input tape.
NONCATAL Only those selected files that are NOT in the Catalog at the time of the REORG
will be processed. This option applies to Method 1 and Method 2. If neither
CATALOG nor NONCATAL is specified in Method 1, all files selected by the
file-id, file-id* or '*' parameter are processed.
POOL=pool-id Specifies a CA Dynam/D pool-id to which the selected files are restored using
the REORG command.
VOL=volser Specifies the disk or disks to which the selected files are restored using the
REORG command. Can be a specific volid (six alphanumeric characters) or a
generic one (less than six alphanumeric characters padded out to six with
trailing asterisks).
If REORG is run from SYSIPT, many of the messages it issues appear only
on SYSLST. When it is run from the console, all messages appear on both
SYSLST and SYSLOG. All CA Dynam/D messages resulting from REORG
activity are issued in accordance with the options specified in the
DYNAM/D option record.
REORG Processing
When files dumped from an FBA device are restored to a non-FBA device
using the REORG command, they must have the CISIZE in the original
Format-1 label. The files without the CISIZE are bypassed with a
diagnostic message.
DYNUTIL searches the input tape in the forward direction only. If you issue
multiple REORG commands in one job, be sure the files you request in the
REORG command selection criteria are in the same order as they appear
on the tape. Otherwise, you must close and reopen the tape between
REORG commands.
Examples
Restore all sequential files on the input tape using the REORG command. All
files will be written back to the volume they were backed up from:
REORG '*'
Using the REORG command, restore files whose names begin with SALARY
moving them to volume ADMIN1:
Using the REORG command, restore a file using its Catalog definition:
Using the REORG command, restore a file moving it into the PAYROL pool:
// JOB RENAME
// TLBL RESTORE,'dsn'
// ASSGN SYS006,tape
// DLBL NEWFILE,'OLD.PAYROLL.MASTER'
// EXTENT ,POOL01,1,0,1,40
// EXEC DYNUTIL,SIZE=128K
REORG 'PAYROLL.MASTER' FILELBL=NEWFILE NONAMECH
/*
/&
Select a file PAYROLL.MASTER from a backup tape and use the REORG
command to restore it to disk, change its name to OLD.PAYROLL.MASTER, and
use CA Dynam Catalog control to locate and create the target file:
// JOB RENAME
// TLBL RESTORE,'dsn'
// ASSGN SYS006,tape
// DLBL NEWFILE,'OLD.PAYROLL.MASTER'
// EXEC DYNUTIL,SIZE=128K
REORG 'PAYROLL.MASTER' FILELBL=NEWFILE NONAMECH
/*
/&
Examples
Assume the Catalog contains a GDS called STOCK with NGEN=3. Assume
further that there is a GDS called ALT.STOCK with NGEN=3, and two non-GDS
files called NOT.A.GDS and ALSO.NOT.A.GDS. The contents of the backup tape
are as follows:
Using the REORG command, restore the current version from the tape as a
new current version:
Note that if (G#14) had already been created, DYNUTIL would issue a
message that the requested file was not on the tape, and no processing would
take place.
Using the REORG command, restore the (G-2) version from the tape as the
new current version; in this example (G#14) has already been created, so (G-
2) is (G#12):
Using the REORG command, restore the (G#11) version from the tape as the
new current version:
Using the REORG command, restore the (G#11) version from the tape in its
original sequence:
Note that if G#14 had already been created, DYNUTIL would issue a message
that the requested target file was no longer current, and no processing would
take place.
Using the REORG command, restore all versions from the tape in their original
sequence:
Note that G#14 is not processed because it is not found on the tape, and
G#11 is bypassed because it is no longer current.
Using the REORG command, restore the (G#12) and (G#13) versions in
reversed sequence:
Note that the REORG commands could not be given in the reverse order unless
the tape were closed and reopened between them; DYNUTIL only searches the
tape in the forward direction.
Using the REORG command, restore the (G#12) version as the (G-1) version
of ALT.STOCK:
Using the REORG command, restore the file NOT.A.GDS as the current version
of STOCK:
Note that GDS= is required in the command because the target file is a GDS,
even though the file selected from the tape is not.
Note that GDS= is omitted from the command because the target file is not a
GDS even though the file selected from the tape is.
STOCK(G#14) has been created but you find it contains corrupted data and
you want to restore the situation at the time of the backup so you can rerun
the production job:
Note:
The absolute generation numbers have now all slipped forward by one. But
to the production job JCL, which uses relative generation numbers, the
situation is indistinguishable from what applied when the DUMP tape was
created.
This reconstruction could be done using more than one backup tape if that
were necessary. For more information, see the OPEN and CLOSE
commands.
RESTORE Command
The RESTORE command copies back to disk those files that were previously
dumped to tape with DYNUTIL's DUMP command.
'file-id' file-id* Identifies the specific file ID or group of file IDs to be selected from the
tape volume and restored. Each file is restored to its original extents.
For generation data sets, you must specify the desired generation by
indicating its absolute generation number in parentheses, such as (G#nn).
VOL=volser Restores all files from the tape to the specified disk volume. The volser must
be specified as a six-character real volume serial number. A pool or generic
volume serial number is not allowed. This is a full volume RESTORE command.
Optional Parameters
These operands are optional and mutually exclusive except OLDVOL and
REPLACE, which are also optional but can be used with any one of the others.
If the UNEXPIRED command is combined with PERM, RETAIN, or EXPIRE, then
the UNEXPIRED command takes precedence. When PERM, RETAIN, and
EXPIRE are specified together, only those files satisfying all three conditions
are restored. If none of these operands (EXPIRE, PERM, RETAIN, UNEXPIRED)
are specified, DYNUTIL selects all files for transfer to tape.
EXPIRE=yy/ddd|yyyy/ddd
Restores only those files whose expiration date equals or exceeds the specified
expiration date (yy or yyyy is the year, and ddd is a day of that year).
PERM Restores only files with an expiration date equal to the date specified in the
AUTODTE parameter of the DYNAM/D option record.
RETAIN Restores only files with an expiration date equal to the date specified in the
MANDTE parameter of the DYNAM/D option record.
UNEXPIRED Restores only those files whose expiration date is the same as or exceeds the
current date.
OLDVOL=xxxxxx Restores files to the same physical location that they occupied on the old
volume. The original volume serial number from which the disk files were
dumped is indicated by xxxxxx. It is used only when the DUMP disk volume
serial number differs from the RESTORE disk volume serial number. It can only
be used for a full volume RESTORE; the input tape must be a full volume
DUMP tape. And, the old and new DASD devices must be of the same type.
REPLACE Causes each file on the tape to automatically overwrite the disk file of an equal
file ID. If you omit this parameter and an equal file ID exists on the VTOC, the
following message is issued and the file is not changed:
Restoring a single file ID, file-id, or group of file IDs, file-id*, to a different
disk volume is not supported by the RESTORE command. In these cases,
use the REORG command.
If the file ID to be restored already exists on the volume and the REPLACE
command has been omitted, then the error message CADD548 is issued
and the file is not restored.
Examples
RESTORE 'MASTER'
RESTORE 'DAILY.*'
RESTORE VOL=CAIDSK
Restore all files to a different disk volume of the same device type:
DUMP VOL=T3380A
RESTORE VOL=T3380G OLDVOL=T3380A
TAPE Command
The TAPE command rewinds, rewinds and unloads, backspaces and forward
spaces a tape.
SYSnnn Specifies the logical unit you want assigned to the tape drive. If omitted, the
default is SYS005 for a DUMP function and SYS006 for a RESTORE function.
Note:
You should issue the TAPE command only while the target logical unit is
closed (prior to the first OPEN or after a CLOSE and before the next
OPEN).
Examples
LISTTAPE
CLOSE RESTORE (SYS006 NORWD)
TAPE SYS006 FSF
OPEN RESTORE (SYS006 NORWD INPUT)
LISTTAPE
LISTTAPE from the fourth and then the second DUMP files.
TRACE Command
The TRACE command prints a snap dump in trace fashion after certain
operations within DYNUTIL. The DATA operand produces large quantities of
output and should be used only at the request of CA Technical Support
personnel.
{ DISKIO }
{ TAPEIO }
{ VTOCIO }
{ ALL }
{ OFF }
DATA Provides SNAP dumps of the data buffers for each I/O.
The SPACEUSE report informs you of the relative efficiency with which disk
space is being used. It helps optimize space utilization and system
performance by identifying badly blocked or allocated files. Data is retrieved
from system VTOCs in VTOC sequence by volume.
The VTOCS report provides information about disk occupancy. Data can relate
to all mounted volumes, to all volumes in a pool, to generic volumes, or to a
specific real volume. One scan of all selected VTOCs can produce multiple
reports. Data is retrieved from system VTOCs in VTOC sequence by volume.
To enhance their capabilities, several options are available for each of these
reports. Complete descriptions are provided on the following pages.
Print in five different sort orders, including those that highlight files that
were badly blocked or badly allocated.
Limit the report to an arbitrary number of files, to include only the worst
offenders.
ACCESS VTOC
REPORT SPACEUSE [ BANNER ]
[ EROPT ]
[ MAXLINES ]
[ MAXRETR ]
[ SELECT= {option[,option..] } ]
[ VOL ]
The SELECT options are described here. For more information about all other
SPACEUSE options and their application, see the chapter "General Reporting—
DYNPRINT."
SELECT Options The SELECT options for SPACEUSE are all sort-order options. Any or all of
them can be used to produce up to five reports from one command. They are:
FIDEXT Files are reported by file-id. Within each file-id, files are reported in order of
the first extent sequence number of an extent in, or overlapping, each real
volid or defined pool space. This is the default option if the SELECT option is
omitted.
REALLOC Files are reported by descending absolute percentage error in the original
allocation request.
VOLFID Files are reported by real volid and, within each volume, by file-id. If a file
spans more than one defined pool space on a volume, a line is reported for
each space summarizing the extents in, or overlapping, that space.
SELECT=ALL prints all of the first four reports, omitting the VTOCSEQ report.
By invoking SPACEUSE with the following command, you can create a report
that you can compare with a DYNSPACE report:
The CA Earl source for the SPACEUSE report is the CA Dynam library member
DYNSP.0.
Report Headings The report headings are generally self-explanatory, but note the following:
ALLOCATION INFO The computations for this group are only attempted for files that are complete
on the real volume in question and which have had the original allocation
request information recorded in the format-1 record. (This is true for files
created under CA Dynam/D control.)
BLOCKSIZE OPT. This is computed by calculating the largest blocksize that will fit on a track or
control interval for the device in question and is consistent with the file's
record length.
EXTENTS: 1ST SQ# This is the extent sequence number for the first extent on the real volume
being reported on.
EXTENTS: # on VOL This is the number of extents that are on the real volume for the file being
reported on.
< if the extent sequence number of the first extent for this volume or pool
space is not 0. This can occur if the first extent was created with an
EXTENT statement containing a nonzero sequence number (allowed by
VSE). Otherwise it is a correct indication that the file has prior extents on
another real volume.
> if the format-1 record complete on this volume flag is not set. This can
occur if the file was never closed, and also for certain system utility or
PIOCS files. Otherwise it is a correct indication that the file has subsequent
extents on another real volume.
FT This is a decoded value derived from the file type indicator bytes in the VTOC
format-1 record. Generally, the codes are the same as those used on a DLBL,
but VSAM is abbreviated as VS; -- is displayed if the bits as set do not
correspond to one of the known file types (VS, SD, IS, or DA), which can occur
with initialized but never-opened utility files or in general for PIOCS files.
GAINED SPACE Reported in units appropriate to the device in question (tracks for CKD devices
and blocks for FBA). First, the number of logical records for that file is
ascertained, and then the number of optimal blocks required. From that, the
number of units is computed and subtracted from the actual number of units
used, to arrive at the number that can be gained.
This figure is correct for a file whose extents are partly outside the pool space
being reported on, but the potential gain shown applies to the whole amount
of space reported as TRACKS/BLOCKS ACTUAL (see below) even if that is not
all in the pool space.
Note that for sorting on the REBLOCK report the savings are converted into
bytes to make figures for different device types comparable. This can result in
some unexpected figures in this column, but the sort order is nonetheless
correct.
On the REALLOC report the sort variable is the absolute value of whichever of
the percentages mentioned above has been calculated, so that over- and
under-allocated files are presented together in the output.
RF This is a decoded value derived from the record format byte in the VTOC
format-1 record. The formats F, FB, V, VB, S, SB, and UN are decoded. If the
bits as set do not correspond to one of these codes then -- is shown. This
often occurs with PIOCS files and also with continuations of files beyond the
first real volume.
TRACKS/BLOCKS This is reported for all files or portions of a file, It shows the total amount of
ACTUAL space used on the real volume in question, regardless of whether it is in the
defined pool space.
On the VOLFID report, a summary line is printed for each volume, showing the
total space used in the pool spaces on that volume. In that total, the nonpool
space used by overlapping extents has been deducted, so that the total is
correct for the pool.
Report Samples For more information about disk space usage analysis reports, see the chapter
"CA Dynam Report Examples."
Print the report in five different sort orders, corresponding to the variables
most commonly of interest.
VTOCS supersedes the older DYNVTOC report. Using the DYNPRINT report
control language, up to five VTOCS reports can be produced from a single scan
of the VTOCs, enhancing performance. VTOCS does not support the extra info
and double-spacing options.
ACCESS VTOC
REPORT VTOCS [ BANNER ]
[ EROPT ]
[ MAXLINES ]
[ MAXRETR ]
[ SELECT={option[,option..]} ]
[ VOL ]
The SELECT options are described here. For more information about all other
VTOCS options and their application, see the chapter "General Reporting—
DYNPRINT."
SELECT Options The SELECT options for VTOCS are grouped into sort-order options and report-
formatting options. Any or all of them can be used in one command, to
produce up to five reports with the desired choice of reported information.
Sort-order options:
FIDEXT Extents are reported by file-id and, within each file-id, in order of extent
sequence number. This is the default option if SELECT is omitted.
CREATE Extents are reported by ascending creation date of the file they belong to.
EXPIRE Extents are reported by ascending expiration date of the file they belong to.
VOLLOC Extents are reported by real volid and, within each volume, by physical
address. Extents having no overlap with any pool space on a volume, are not
reported (except for the VTOC extent).
Report-formatting options:
FREEXT Causes free extents to be reported. Affects the VOLLOC report only.
NODSNS Causes only free extents to be reported. Affects the VOLLOC report only, and
is ignored unless FREEXT is also given.
SELECT=ALL invokes the first four sort-order options, omitting the VTOCSEQ
report, and without either FREEXT or NODSNS. These last two options can be
used together with the ALL option, as in:
SELECT ALL,FREEXT
Most of the DYNVTOC reporting options can be simulated with the correct
combination of VTOCS SELECT options, and many additional combinations are
allowed. The most basic DYNVTOC report (on a single volume) can be
approximated with:
Source Code for The CA Earl source for the VTOCS report is the CA Dynam library member
VTOCS Report DYNVT.0.
Report Headings The report headings are generally self-explanatory, but note the following:
CREATE Reports the creation date as found in the file's format-1 record. If the date
there is uninitialized (zero), this item contains --/--/--.
EXPIRE Displays the expiration date as found in the file's format-1 record.
If the date is equal to or later than 2099/366, this item contains —PERM—.
EXTENT SEQ Indicates that the report is unchanged from the extent segment in the format-
1, format-3, or format-4 record. If the complete on this volume flag is not set
for the file, a plus (+) appears next to this item. This means that the file has
continuation extents on another volume, that it was never closed, or that it
was created by PIOCS and the flag was not set by the access module.
EXTENT TYPE Indicates that the type is decoded from the corresponding binary field in the
format-1, format-3, or format-4 record. Values include the following:
FILE TYPE Specifies a decoded value derived from the file type indicator bytes in the
VTOC format-1 record. --- is reported if the bits as set do not correspond to
one of the known file types (VSAM, SAM, ISAM or DAM), which can occur with
initialized but never-opened utility files or in general for PIOCS files.
LOW/HIGH EXTENT Specifies the physical position at which the extent starts and ends. For CKD
devices it is in CCC-HH format and for FBA, in BBBBB format.
REL TRK/BLK: NUMBER Reflects only the space within a pool if a pool space is being reported on. If the
number reported is less than the true number belonging to the extent, the
pool-overflow flag # is shown next to the reported figure.
STAT This column can contain one or both of the following codes:
VOL SEQ Indicates that the report is unchanged and remains as it was in the file's
format-1 record. If the field is uninitialized (zero), this field is blank on the
report.
Introducing CA Dynam/FI
CA Dynam/FI provides a comprehensive file independence facility for VSE
users. It is an integral part of the CA Dynam file management system, and
shares many common components with CA Dynam/T and CA Dynam/D.
"File independence" offers the VSE user the facility to define a sequential
access file in a program and then redefine this file at execution time (changing
device types, block sizes, and so on) without having to make any changes to
the program.
Catalog management
Unit record simulation allows any unit record device (card reader, printer, card
punch) to be simulated as a tape, sequential disk or VSAM file.
The job exit facility is used to activate CA Dynam/FI options. It lets you
optimize block size, change record format, change unlabeled tape files to
labeled tape files, and specify double buffering.
The audit trail facility records functions performed by CA Dynam/FI and can be
used to prepare reports on these functions.
When a file's attributes are being modified, CA Dynam/FI replaces the user
program's DTF at OPEN with a new DTF in the partition GETVIS area. This file
type is compatible with the new file parameters defined at execution time. All
logical input/output requests are trapped and routed to the new DTF by CA
Dynam/FI.
Input file concatenation allows multiple input files to be read using one
OPEN/CLOSE.
DTFCN Console I/O devices SYSLOG only For more information, see
ASSGN Statement.
DTFDA Direct access (DAM) Specific requests for FBA devices For
processing more information, see VCKD.
DTFPH Physical access I/O FBA DTFDA only For more information,
see VCKD.
Physical Files
The following physical files are supported by CA Dynam/FI:
Tape (DTFMT)
VSAM (ACB/RPL)
VSAM files may not be changed to disk or tape using FI. Disk or tape files,
however, may be changed to VSAM files by FI.
Special Considerations
BLKSIZE=MAX can only be used for fixed blocked records. When used with
other record formats, it causes all CA Dynam/FI functions to be
suppressed.
Supported DTFDA files are converted to DTFPH files and imperative macros are
converted to Physical IOCS channel program sequences.
Control characters for DTFCN (console) files (SYSLOG support) are always
removed.
Unsupported DTFs
DTFCD DTFs that specify a device type of 2560 or 5425 are not supported
by CA Dynam/FI.
Unit record simulation lets you temporarily assign a system file to disk. This
eliminates potential errors caused when a job abends and permanently
assigned system files are not released. Furthermore, blocksize can be
optimized, reducing I/O.
Since DTFCD and DTFPR contain no file name (DTF name), CA Dynam/FI
generates a file name based on the logical unit name specified. The file name
'FISYSxx' is used, where 'xx' is derived from the logical unit specification in the
user program DTF. This logical unit may be overridden using JCL or the CA
Dynam Catalog, but the original logical unit specification is used when deriving
the file name.
For example, if a user program specifies SYS004 as the logical unit for printed
output, the following JCL would change that printer DTF to a disk DTF.
// DLBL FISYS04,'PRINT.OUTPUT.DISK.DATA',7,SD
// EXTENT SYS004,3350WK,1,0,19,50
// ASSGN SYS004,DISK,VOL=3350WK,SHR
Notice that the logical unit (SYS004) is appended to the special name FISYS in
order to derive a DTF name that matches with the label information.
Example
// DLBL FISYS04,'PRINT.OUTPUT.DISK.DATA',7,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,FIOPT=(DB),SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,3350WK,1,0,19,50
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=3350WK,SHR
DTFDI is the type of DTF normally used by IBM utilities, compilers, other utility
software, and sometimes by user-written Assembler programs, to process unit
record I/O. It always specifies a system logical unit (SYSIPT,SYSLST, and so
on). CA Dynam/FI can normally process the unit record I/O of these programs.
For DTFDI, and for DTFCP that use a system logical unit, the unit record
file names are always as follows:
Always use an overriding programmer logical unit with SYSIPT, SYSLST and
SYSPCH files; choose one that is unused by the program which will utilize the
converted JCL. This prevents the problems associated with the opening and
closing of system logical units when these logical units are assigned to disk.
Example
// DLBL IJSYSLS,'PRINTED.LIST.OUTPUT',2,SD
// EXTENT SYSLST,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
ASSGN SYSLST,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR (opens SYSLST)
// EXEC FCOBOL,SIZE=256K
.
.
CLOSE SYSLST,D (required to close SYSLST) JCL to
utilize CA Dynam/FI:
// DLBL FISYSLS,'PRINTED.LIST.OUTPUT',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC FCOBOL,SIZE=256K
.
.
CA Dynam/FI fully supports the CICS command level preprocessor, despite the
inconsistent way in which the preprocessor performs I/O. BLKSZ=OPT support
provides major performance improvement and improved I/O utilization.
// DLBL FISYSPH,'SYSPCH.FILE',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC DFHECP1$
.
.
COBOL PROGRAM
/*
// DLBL FISYSIN,'SYSPCH.FILE',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC FCOBOL
/* Sample JCL for ASSEMBLER:
// DLBL FISYSPH,'SYSPCH.FILE',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC DFHFA1$
.
.
ASSEMBLER PROGRAM
/*
// DLBL FISYSIN,'SYSPCH.FILE',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008,LRECL=80
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC ASSEMBLY
/*
For other programs the LRECL=80 parameter may be specified, but it is not
required.
CA Dynam/FI fully supports the CICS macro level preprocessor, despite the
inconsistent way in which the preprocessor performs I/O. BLKSZ=OPT support
provides major performance improvement and improved I/O utilization.
// DLBL DFHPR30,'SYSPCH.FILE',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC DFHPRPR
.
.
COBOL PROGRAM
/*
// DLBL FISYSIN,'SYSPCH.FILE',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008,LRECL=80
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// DLBL FISYSPH,'SYSPCH.FILE.2',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC ASSEMBLY
/*
// DLBL FISYSIN,'SYSPCH.FILE.2',2,SD,BLKSZ=OPT,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC FCOBOL
/*
Note: IBM requires a second DFHPRPR step with a UPSI of 10001000 to copy
the file and strip the first character. However, this step must be removed when
using CA Dynam/FI.
FISYSnn SYS0nn DTFs (COBOL unit record DTFs are this type.)
SYSRDR files are not supported because VSE Job Control does not use LIOCS
to process its SYSRDR files. (Note that RPG II uses SYSRDR to process card
files.)
Control characters for DTFPR (printer) files are inserted if not present, and
control characters for DTFCD (punch) files are removed if present. CA
Dynam/FI only supports printer files using ASA or machine control characters.
When the simulation is invoked for files not conforming to this rule,
unpredictable results occur.
The LIOCS functions provided by the CNTRL and PRTOV macros are not
supported. Therefore, programs which depend upon CNTRL and PRTOV
support cannot use this simulation. (This includes the COBOL 'EOP' condition.)
DTFCPs that use system logical units, and process unit record I/O, can
normally be processed by CA Dynam/FI; DTFCPs that use programmer logical
units, such as SYS001, cannot. This means that compiler and Assembler work
files may not be processed by CA Dynam/FI.
For this facility to work, both CA Dynam/FI and CA SRAM must be active and
supported. The Programming Guide explains how this is done. For more
information, see the DYNAM/FI installation option record.
On the DLBL or TLBL statement, indicate whether you are sorting on input
(SORTIN) or on output (SORTOUT) and what sort key fields are to be used.
The sort key field(s) may be defined on the xLBL statement or may reside in
the Catalog as a sort key name (SKNAME). A cataloged sort key name
provides greater flexibility:
A sort key is only defined once and easily maintained with DYNCAT.
For more information about defining and maintaining SKNAMEs, see the
DYNCAT utility.
On the DLBL or TLBL statement you may also indicate the file name and logical
unit for the sort work file (SORTWRK). If you omit the SORTWRK parameter,
the file name WORK01 on SYS001 is assumed.
CA SRAM normally uses the upper unused portion of the partition to allocate
storage for each task and its own overhead. If this procedure conflicts with the
user program (for example, PL/I and RPG II also dynamically use partition
storage), a CA SRAM SRTCORE call must be issued. CA Dynam/FI obtains the
necessary storage from the partition GETVIS area and issues the SRTCORE call
based on the size you have indicated for the specific sorting task (using
SRTCORE on the xLBL statement) and/or what you have requested as a total
amount of storage (using SORTCORE on the SET statement).
Note that the SET SORTCORE statement indicates the total amount of storage
you want CA Dynam/FI to request for all sorting tasks. The SRTCORE
parameter on the xLBL statement indicates the amount of storage requested
for a particular task.
Examples
Sort the file TAPEOUT on output. The sort key record shows that the sorted
field starts at the first position, has a length of 20, is character data, and will
be sorted in descending order. The file name of the work file is WORK1 and is
on logical unit SYS040. 40000 bytes of GETVIS storage have been requested
for the sort and its overhead.
// TLBL TAPEOUT,'OUTPUT.FILE',,SORTOUT=(1,20,C,D), X
SORTWRK=(WORK1,SYS040),SRTCORE=40000
If a cataloged sort key name (KEY1) and sort work file defaults (WORK1 on
SYS001) were used, and no SRTCORE call were needed, the above example
could be rewritten as:
// TLBL TAPEOUT,'OUTPUT.FILE',,SORTOUT=KEY1
Sort the file FILEOUT on output. Since PL1001 is a user-written PL/I program,
a SET SORTCORE statement precedes execution of the program. 50000 bytes
of storage have been requested for all sorting tasks in this job and 30000
bytes have been requested for the task for FILEOUT.
/*
SET SORTCORE=50000
// ASSGN SYS012,DISK,VOL=3350WK,SHR
// ASSGN SYS013,DISK,VOL=3350WK,SHR
// ASSGN SYS040,DISK,VOL=3380WK,SHR
// DLBL WORK1,'WORK.FILE'
// EXTENT SYS040,3380WK,1,0,1,150
// DLBL FILEIN,'FILE.IN'
// EXTENT SYS012,3350WK,1,0,1,10
// DLBL FILEOUT,'FILE.OUT',,,SORTOUT=(1,50,CH,A),SRTCORE=30000, X
SORTWRK=(WORK1,SYS040)
// EXTENT SYS013,3350WK,1,0,1,10
// EXEC PL1001
/*
CA Dynam provides a Job Control exit which enhances the existing VSE TLBL
and DLBL statements.
CA Dynam/FI operands must follow all standard VSE Job Control operands. For
example, the following is invalid since the CA Dynam/FI operand BLKSZ=160
precedes the VSE Job Control retention period operand 2099/365:
TLBL Statement
// TLBL filename,'dataset-name', [ retention ]
[ ,IBM TLBL options ]
[ ,BLKSZ= {nnnnn|OPTimize } ]
[ ,CONCAT ]
[ ,CONCAT= {ALL|nn } ]
[ ,FIOPT=(options) ]
[ ,IGNORE ]
[ ,LRECL=nnnnn ]
[ ,NODISK ]
[ ,NOFI ]
[ ,RECFM=xx ]
[ ,SRTCORE=nnnnnn ]
[ ,SORTIN= {(keys)|keyname } ]
[ ,SORTOUT= {(keys)|keyname } ]
[ ,SORTWRK=(filename,SYSnnn) ]
[ ,SYSxxx ]
'dataset-name' Indicates the standard IBM data set name (enclosed in single quotation
marks).
retention Indicates the standard IBM retention period specification. If the retention
period is omitted, the comma following this field must be supplied. This is
because CA Dynam/FI does not begin searching for its operands until the
fourth positional parameter.
If you use a keyword directly after this field, the second comma may be
omitted when you omit retention. The following is correct:
// TLBL TEST,'DSN',BLKSZ=OPT,NODISK
IBM TLBL Options Indicates the IBM TLBL optional parameters. (See the previous description of
"retention.")
CA Dynam/FI Operands
BLKSZ= Specifies the block size for the file. It is either a decimal number between 1
and 65535, or the keyword OPTIMIZE (or OPT). If you use OPTIMIZE, CA
Dynam/FI recalculates the block size for the physical unit on which the data
set resides.
Default: Block size defined in the Catalog or else block size in the user's
program.
When CONCAT is specified, a single open can be used to read two (or more)
input files. Specify CONCAT on the label of each file to be concatenated,
except for the last one to be read.
CONCAT=ALL, CONCAT=nn
CONTACT=ALL may be specified to concatenate all versions of a data set. Use
CONCAT=nn to concatenate the first nn versions of a data set.
FIOPT=(options) Specifies CA Dynam/FI options. Options may be listed in any order, separated
by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
NOCNTRL Ignores CNTRL requests for this file. For more information
about CNTRL macro, see the IBM Supervisor And I/O
Macro manual.
NORELSE Ignores RELSE requests for this file. For more information
about RELSE macro, see the IBM Supervisor And I/O
Macro manual.
NOTM Does not write tape mark at close. Default: Tape mark
written at close
RELEASE Releases the logical assignment for the file at close (only
for temporary programmer logical units). Default: No
release of the assignment
IGNore Signals that ignore processing is in effect. The file is not opened. For input, an
EOF (end-of-file record) will be returned at the first GET/READ. For output, all
PUTs/WRITEs will be discarded.
Default: Record length defined in the Catalog or else record length in the
user's program
NODISK Prevents the operator from switching to DISK for this generation of the tape
file. Overrides the Catalog specification of FI for this data set.
NOFI Ignores CA Dynam/FI processing for this file (used with programs such as
DITTO, which modifies its DTF after OPEN processing is complete).
RECFM=xx Specifies the record format for the file. Record formats supported follow:
F Fixed
FB Fixed-blocked
V Variable
VB Variable-blocked
U Undefined
SRTCORE=nnnnnn Specifies the amount of storage, in bytes, which CA SRAM is to use for this
particular task. (Multiple tasks are permitted.) System performance may be
enhanced by providing a specific storage size.
SORTIN=, SORTOUT= Requests CA SRAM for dynamic file sorting, and defines both when the file is
to be sorted (input, output, or both) and the sort key fields to be used for
each. The sort fields may be specified in the normal CA SRAM key definition
vector format, or as the name of a predefined Catalog sort key entry.
A ascending sequence
D descending sequence
SORTWRK= Specifies the file name (maximum of 5 characters) of the label information to
be used as the CA SRAM work file. The file name value is limited to a
maximum of 5 characters. SYSnnn is the logical unit to be used in accessing
the file. If more than one dynamically sorted file is processed in a single
program, this parameter must be used to define the CA SRAM work files.
Naturally, more than one task cannot use the same DASD work space at the
same time.
Default: (WORK1,SYS001)
SYSxxx Specifies an explicit logical unit. Use this option if you're using unit record
simulation when the program DTF is DTFDI.
Examples
Changes the block size to 8000 bytes (BLKSZ=8000) and the tape labeling to
standard label processing (SL).
// TLBL FILEA,'FILE-ID',0,BLKSZ=8000,FIOPT=(SL)
// TLBL FILEB,'FILE-ID',0,BLKSZ=OPT,FIOPT=(RUN,DB)
Forces the use of logical unit SYS018 (SYS018), changes the record format to
fixed-blocked (FB) and the record length to 80 bytes (LRECL=80).
// TLBL FILEC,'FILE-ID',,SYS018,RECFM=FB,LRECL=80
DLBL Statement
// DLBL filename,'dataset-name' [ ,retention ]
[ ,type ]
[ ,IBM DLBL options ]
[ ,BLKSZ= {nnnnn|OPTimize } ]
[ ,CONCAT ]
[ ,CONCAT= {ALL|nn } ]
[ ,FIOPT=(options) ]
[ ,FIVSAM|,NOFIVSAM ]
[ ,IGNORE ]
[ ,LRECL=nnnnn ]
[ ,MAXCI=nnnnn ]
[ ,NOFI ]
[ ,NOTAPE ]
[ ,RECFM=xx ]
[ ,SRTCORE=nnnnnn ]
[ ,SORTIN= {(keys)|keyname } ]
[ ,SORTOUT= {(keys)|keyname } ]
[ ,SORTWRK=(filename,SYSnnn) ]
[ ,SYSxxx ]
type Indicates the standard IBM access method type specification. If the DLBL type
and/or retention are omitted, the commas following those fields must be
supplied. CA Dynam/FI does not begin searching for its options until the fifth
positional parameter.
But, if the first CA Dynam/FI operand is a keyword, you may omit commas
when you omit retention and/or type, as shown:
// DLBL FILE,'TEST',BLKSZ=OPT,NOTAPE
IBM DLBL options Indicate the IBM DLBL optional parameters. (See previous note in relation to
"type.")
CA Dynam/FI Operands
BLKSZ= Specifies the block size for the file. It is either a decimal number between 1
and 65535, or the keyword OPTIMIZE (or OPT). If you specify OPTIMIZE, CA
Dynam/FI recalculates the block size for the physical unit on which the data
set resides. Note that this may not be the maximum block size for the device.
Before a file can be used as input with this specification, it must first be
created with the BLKSZ=OPT option. If a file is created with CA Dynam/FI OPT
blocking, then when the file is processed for input, either OPT or the correct
numeric block size must be used. If you specify neither, unpredictable results
can occur.
Default: Block size defined in the Catalog or else block size in the user's
program
When CONCAT is specified, a single open can be used to read two (or more)
input files. Specify CONCAT on the label of each file to be concatenated,
except for the last one to be read.
FIOPT=(options) Specifies CA Dynam/FI options. Options may be listed in any order, separated
by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
NOCNTRL Ignores CNTRL requests for this file. For more information
about the CNTRL macro, see the IBM Supervisor And I/O
Macro manual.
NORELSE Ignores RELSE requests for this file. For more information
about the RELSE macro, see the IBM Supervisor And I/O
Macro manual.
FIVSAM, NOFIVSAM Specifies whether CA Dynam/FI is allowed to convert the file to a VSAM file if a
VSAM DLBL record is found. This parameter overrides the default set in the
DYNAM/FI option record. (Note that if FIVSAM is specified, CA Dynam/FI,
rather than VSAM/SAM, performs the modification from SD to VSAM by
creating ACB/RPL.)
IGNore Signals that ignore processing is in effect. The file is not opened. For input, an
EOF (end-of-file record) will be returned at the first GET/READ. For output, all
PUTs/WRITEs will be discarded.
This option is not supported for DTFDA (VCKD) or for CA SORT input/output
files.
Default: Record length defined in the Catalog or else record length in the
user's program.
MAXCI=nnnnn Specifies the maximum CI size to be used for FBA devices to calculate a new
CISIZE with BLKSZ=OPT. When BLKSZ=OPT and the device pointed to is FBA,
the block size is not changed but the DTF CISIZE field gets a computed value
based on MAXCI parameters. nnnnn must be a valid FBA CI size or zero. If this
operand is specified but the device pointed to is not FBA, it will be ignored.
NOFI Ignores CA Dynam/FI processing for this file (used with programs such as
DITTO, which modifies its DTF after OPEN processing is complete).
NOTAPE Prevents the operator from switching to TAPE for this generation of the disk
file. Overrides the Catalog specification of FI for this data set.
RECFM=xx Specifies the record format for the file. Record formats supported are:
F Fixed
FB Fixed-blocked
V Variable
VB Variable-blocked
U Undefined
SRTCORE=nnnnnn Specifies the amount of storage, in bytes, which CA SRAM is to use for this
particular task. (Multiple tasks are permitted.) System performance may be
enhanced by providing a specific storage size.
SORTIN=, SORTOUT= Requests CA SRAM for dynamic file sorting, and defines both when the file is
to be sorted (input, output, or both) and the sort key fields to be used for
each. The sort fields may be specified in the normal CA SRAM key definition
vector format, or as the name of a predefined Catalog sort key entry.
A ascending sequence
D descending sequence
SORTWRK= Specifies the file name (maximum of 5 characters) of the label information
which is to be used as the CA SRAM work file. SYSnnn is the logical unit to be
used in accessing the file. If more than one dynamically sorted file is
processed in a single program, this parameter must be used to define the CA
SRAM work files. Naturally, more than one task cannot use the same work file
at the same time.
Default: (WORK1,SYS001)
SYSxxx Specifies an explicit logical unit. Use this option if using unit record simulation
when the program DTF is DTFDI.
Note that the logical unit specified in an EXTENT statement, if present, takes
precedence over the SYSxxx specified here. For CA Dynam/D users, the S
parameter on a DLBL statement will take precedence over any other logical
unit specification when Catalog management is invoked.
Default: The program defined logical unit, or the logical unit specified in the
EXTENT statements.
Examples
// DLBL FILEB,'DISK-B',,SD,FIOPT=(RELEASE)
// EXTENT SYS008,111111,1,0,1,100
Set the block size to 1210 bytes (BLKSZ=1210), verify the output (VERIFY),
and use SYS007 as the logical unit (SYS007).
// DLBL FISYSLS,'FILE-C',,SD,BLKSZ=1210,FIOPT=(VERIFY),SYS007
// EXTENT SYS007,111111,1,0,1,19
You may indicate sort key records and file independence options for data sets
in the CA Dynam Catalog. Use the DYNCAT ALTER and DEFINE commands. For
more information, see Maintaining the Catalog.
In order for CA Dynam/FI to use the cataloged data set information, you must
specify YES for these parameters:
DYNAMFI(YES) for the particular data set in the Catalog to indicate that CA
Dynam/FI may access the catalog information.
− smaller than the LRECL specified, the record is padded with blanks.
Entry-sequence on output
Example
Storage Requirements
The logical record length (LRECL) and the physical block size (BLKSZ) can
affect each other, depending on the record format specified. CA Dynam/FI will,
if necessary, alter either or both the LRECL and BLKSZ, depending on both the
old and new record format. The exact conditions and actions taken are
described below.
Note that if the user specifies an LRECL or BLKSZ value through Job Control or
the Catalog, then CA Dynam/FI uses these values just as they are. However, if
either the LRECL or BLKSZ value is not specified through Job Control or the
Catalog, then one or more of the following can occur:
− DTFCD (punch) files are deleted from records, then record length is
decreased one byte.
If changing from:
− Old format was fixed (blocked or unblocked), then block size equals
old blocking factor (old block size divided by old LRECL) multiplied by
record (current LRECL).
− Old format was not fixed, then block size is rounded down to nearest
multiple of record length. (If the block size is less than record length,
record length is used.)
The block size value of 850 is rounded down to the next even multiple
of the LRECL. Thus, new block size = 800.
// JOB CONCATEX
/*
/* PROCESS MONTHLY A/P TRANSACTIONS
/*
/* INPUT: 1 CONCATENATED DATASET
/* CONSISTING OF 2 TAPE DATASETS
/* AND 2 DISK DATASETS
/*
// TLBL INPUT,'TRANS.TAPE.OLDEST',,CONCAT
// TLBL INPUT,'TRANS.TAPE.OLDER',,CONCAT
// DLBL INPUT,'TRANS.DISK.OLD',,,CONCAT
// DLBL INPUT,'TRANS.DISK'
// EXEC APMTHLY
/&
Where other CA Dynam products are installed, the concatenated data sets may
be either controlled, uncontrolled, or a mixture of the two. All processing
options supported by the other products in the CA Dynam family are supported
for use in conjunction with concatenation.
Additional Examples
The input tape file is FISYSIN and the output tape file is FISYSLS. The output
file generated is a standard labeled tape. Logical unit SYS001 is used for the
SYSIN file and SYS002 for the SYSLST file.
// JOB TEST1
// TLBL FISYSIN,'CARD-INPUT',,SYS001
// TLBL FISYSLS,'PRINT-OUTPUT',,SYS002,FIOPT=(SL)
// ASSGN SYS001,TAPE
// ASSGN SYS002,TAPE
// EXEC COBTEST,SIZE=100K
Example
Recalculate the block size of an output disk file. Note that the block size of the
disk file is calculated based upon the OPTBLKS value defined in the DYNAM/FI
option record at installation time. For fixed-length records, the block size value
is always a multiple of the record size value specified.
// DLBL OUTPUT,'DISK-FILE',,SD,BLKSZ=OPT
Reblock a tape file and set the options. The file below is reblocked on a tape to
8000 bytes, and double buffering is specified (DB). In addition, a rewind and
unload operation is performed on the tape when it is closed (RUN).
// TLBL OUTPUT,'TAPE-FILE',,BLKSZ=8000,FIOPT=(RUN,DB)
Create a tape file and change the logical unit. Logical unit SYS018 is used to
override the logical unit specified in the user's program.
// TLBL TAPDISK,'TAPE-DISK',,SYS018
Read a disk file created with reblocked size. Note that if the block size operand
were omitted, the block size value would default to the one in the user's
program. In many cases, however, this can cause a wrong-length record error
to occur.
// DLBL DISK,'MASTER',,SD,BLKSZ=OPT
Change from printer output (DTFDI or DTFPR) to disk output. Any one of the
DLBL/EXTENT pairs will produce the same result: output will be to disk.
// DLBL FISYSLS,'TEST.FILE1',2099/365,,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,335000,1,0,1,10
/*
// DLBL FISYSLS,'TEST.FILE2',2099/365,,
// EXTENT SYS008,335000,1,0,1,10
/*
// DLBL FISYSLS,'TEST.FILE3',2099/365,,SYS008
// EXTENT ,335000,1,0,1,10
The defaults for the preceding operands are specified in the DYNAM/FI option
record.
DYNAMFI= Enables or disables CA Dynam/FI processing in the partition in which the SET
command is issued.
The effect of this command is permanent in static partitions until the next SET
DYNAMFI command is issued in the same partition or until the VSE machine is
IPLed.
$JOBEXIT= Specifies whether the standard job exit ($JOBEXIT) will be processed BEFORE
or AFTER the CA Dynam common Job Exit.
PARTID= Positional parameter. Specifies the partition for this statement. If used, it must
be the first operand specified. The asterisk (*) or any valid two-character
partition ID may be specified.
The presence of the PARTID parameter indicates that the SET command is
permanent; that is, it remains in effect until another SET command overrides
it or an IPL is performed. For dynamic partitions, permanent options are reset
when the class (POWER/VSE job) terminates.
All actions for a partition are either permanent or temporary based upon this
operand. If omitted, any action previously set as permanent will lose that
status and will be reset at end-of-job. The SET statement, also, will remain in
effect only until end-of-job.
AUDIT= Turns off AUDIT recording or turns it back on provided audit support was
specified in the DYNAM/FI option record. The occurrence of this command will
be recorded in the Audit File and reported on by the Audit system.
EXECSIZE= Changes the default size parameter that the CA Dynam/FI job exit puts on
EXEC statements. (Note that the format of this operand in the SET statement
is different from that in the DYNAM/FI option record.)
Because CA Dynam/FI appends the SIZE parameter to the end of the EXEC
statement, any of the VSE EXEC statement options that normally follow SIZE
(for example, GO) may not be used if CA Dynam/FI determines EXEC size.
SEARCH= Determines the degree of support for DTFCD/DTFPR (UR), DTFDI (DI) and
DTFCP (CP). The operands UR, DI and CP, when specified, allow full support
for the corresponding file class while the operands NOUR, NODI and NOCP
suppress support. This parameter overrides the installation option defined for
the DI, CP, and UR parameters in the DYNAM/FI option record.
SORTCORE= Requests dynamic file sorting facility (CA SRAM) of CA Dynam/FI to reserve a
block of storage from the partition GETVIS area for CA SRAM use instead of
letting CA SRAM use the upper portion of the partition for its work area. The
value of nnnnnn should be large enough to include storage requirements for all
CA SRAM tasks concurrently active in the partition plus a reserve for CA SRAM
overhead. For more information, see the CA SRAM documentation set.
SYSxxx Indicates the standard logical unit name for the file(s) to be intercepted by
DYNAM/FI at I/O, and rerouted to or from SYSLOG. If more than one file has
this particular logical unit in its DTF, each one will receive SYSLOG routing.
SYSLOG support is available only for the following unit record devices:
I/O intercepts remain in effect for the duration of the VSE job unless reset
by another ASSGN for SYSxxx to a device other than SYSLOG. For
example:
If you want SYSLOG support in subsequent jobs, you must reissue the
following:
// ASSGN SYSxxx,SYSLOG
SYSLOG Indicates that all DTFs with the logical unit specified for SYSxxx will have their
I/O operations rerouted to or from SYSLOG. For this action to be effective, you
must formally OPEN the file and initiate all I/O with logical IOCS imperative
macros. You should also use a CLOSE macro.
Input Data All SYSIPT read requests are preceded by a prompting message with the
following format:
Output Data All SYSPCH and SYSLST writes to SYSLOG have the data line prefixed by:
D/FI-SYSLST: or,
D/FI-SYSPCH:
If the combined length of this prefix (13 characters) plus the length of the
data is greater than 256 characters, the data portion of the line will be
truncated to this maximum. If the combined length exceeds the length of one
console/screen line, wraparound will occur.
You can route the output of a DTFMT or DTFSD to the console (if the output is
in displayable characters). The following example shows how to do this.
// DLBL FILEOUT,,,,SYSPCH
ASSGN SYSPCH,SYSLOG
CA Dynam/FI first overrides the DTFSD logical unit with SYSPCH. The second
line reroutes SYSPCH output to SYSLOG.
You should be very careful when routing SYSPCH or SYSLST output to the
console. This is because a program can go into an "output loop" or produce a
great volume of output. It can be frustrating trying to stop a program from a
console that is constantly busy.
Example
Uppercase lines are printed by the system; lowercase lines are entered by the
operator. Explanatory comments are shown to the right, enclosed in
parentheses.
r rdr,pause
AR 0015 1C39I COMMAND PASSED TO VSE/POWER
F1 0001 1R88I OK : 1 ENTRY PROCESSED BY R RDR,PAUSE
BG 0001 1Q47I BG PAUSE 02219 FROM VSECQA8,
TIME=14:52:30
BG 0000 // JOB PAUSE
DATE 10/26/2007, CLOCK 14/52/30
BG-0000 // PAUSE
0 assgn sysipt,syslog (route SYSIPT reads to SYSLOG)
BG-0000
0 assgn syslst,syslog (route SYSLST writes to SYSLOG)
BG-0000
0 // exec dfhcsdup
BG 0000 1S54I PHASE DFHCSDUP IS TO BE FETCHED FROM PRD1.BASE
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
BG 0000 CADF-SYSLST:
Requirements
The Catalog entry must contain all information to create either a tape or
disk file. This includes all options that affect CA Dynam/D, CA Dynam/T,
and CA Dynam/FI.
Operation
Replace the existing TLBL or DLBL with a label record of the opposite type.
Since the replacement label record has only the minimal required information,
the Catalog record must have all disk allocation values as well as all tape
options. In effect, all files eligible for switching must be completely catalog-
driven. DEFALLOC may be used in the absence of disk allocation values.
Restrictions
As with any processing procedure that enhances system operation, there are
certain restrictions. In addition to the requirements specified above, the
following conditions must be met:
The NOFI operand must not be specified on the TLBL or DLBL statement.
If operator switching is requested and all of the above conditions are not met,
an appropriate message will be issued to the operator.
If you use CA Dynam/D and CA Dynam/T products, you should be aware that
the Catalog file you currently access will be also be used by CA Dynam/FI. The
entire CA Dynam family uses the same Catalog file. The CUI File Management
transaction and DYNCAT utility programs are used to control and maintain the
CA Dynam/FI characteristics relating to tape and disk data sets; DYNACC, and
DYNPRINT can be used to access the FI information in the Catalog.
For control and allocation by CA Dynam/D and CA Dynam/T, data sets are
defined to the Catalog as the following:
FI data sets
CA Dynam/FI options may be associated with each, and a data set may be
switched from one device type to the other (as a default) by using the DYNCAT
ALTER command (or the CUI File Management transaction) to change its file
type characteristic. This means that disk allocation information and tape
density information may be associated with the same data set. To create the
following, ensure that you adhere to the specifications described here:
Data set on tape – supply a TLBL and specify that it is a TAPE data set in
the Catalog. CA Dynam/FI assures that the DTF type is changed to tape,
and CA Dynam/T controls it.
Same data set on disk – supply a DLBL statement and specify that the
data set is a DISK data set in the Catalog.
If you define the data set as FI in the Catalog, you must also define attributes
to permit both CA Dynam/D and CA Dynam/T control in the Catalog. In this
case, the resulting DTF type will be determined by the label type (TLBL or
DLBL). In addition, when presented with a scratch tape mount message or
while in DASD space recovery, the operator may direct that the file be written
on the other device type.
Since the entire CA Dynam family uses the same Catalog file, duplicate data
set names with different file attributes may not exist in the Catalog. Any data
set defined in the Catalog as disk will be processed as an uncontrolled file by
CA Dynam/T. Tape options which are defined by CA Dynam/T users on the
TLBL (such as rewinding and unloading a tape at close) take precedence over
any conflicting CA Dynam/FI-defined options.
== ==WORK BGWORK
If you use CA Dynam/D, note that CA Dynam/FI searches the Catalog even
when you provide DLBL statements with EXTENT statements.
For example, if both the CA Dynam/FI option REW and the CA Dynam/T option
RUN are specified for the same file, the RUN option (rewind and unload tape at
close) will prevail. The only exception to this rule is the CA Dynam/FI option
RELEASE (release a logical assignment at close) which is performed after the
CLOSE processing has completed. This overrides any conflicting CA Dynam/T
or CA Dynam/D options.
CA Dynam/FI replaces variables in the data set name such as '==' and 'CPU--'
(for partition- and CPU-independence) before attempting to access the Catalog
for an entry. Therefore, the Catalog entry must exist in its resolved form.
Since different partitions or systems may be using these data set names for
differing file structures, this is necessary for CA Dynam/FI to return the
attributes of each file.
Report writers
VSAM utilities
You should use the DFEXCL option record to prevent programs of this nature
from interfacing with CA Dynam/FI.
CA Dynam/FI relies upon the use of logical IOCS for file processing. By
trapping and modifying LIOCS requests, CA Dynam/FI is able to function. As a
rule, sort packages do not use LIOCS for processing and generally use
skeleton DTFs or a DTFPH. This incompatibility between methods of operation
makes it impossible for CA Dynam/FI to override the parameters specified for
the sort.
The record format and file structure information in the sort parameter
statements is used by the sort product internally for handling the data and
sorting the records. As a result, the label information and parameter values
specified for the sort product must reflect the true characteristics of the files to
be used (i.e., the file characteristics after modification by CA Dynam/FI).
CA SORT
When you use CA SORT with CA Dynam/FI, be sure that CA SORT rules and
conventions are followed. These include such things as:
The record format may not change during the SORT from input to output
(unless by user exit).
The logical record lengths must be the same for all SORTIN and SORTOUT
files when fixed-length records are used.
Version attributes (record length, block size, and so on) for cataloged data
sets are updated by CA Dynam/FI when requested to do so by CA SORT,
normally after the sort output file has been closed. This is necessary because
the file table used by CA SORT (DTFPH) does not have provisions for record
format, block size or record length. As a result, the version attributes would be
incomplete unless a facility such as CA Dynam/FI was available to update
them. The cataloged data set must have DYNAM/FI=YES for the update
processing to be effective.
CA SRAM
CA SRAM modules are normally loaded into the upper unused portion of the
partition. This may conflict with the user's program. For example, PL/I also
uses this upper portion of the partition. If there is a chance that a conflict may
occur, use the CA Dynam/FI SET SORTCORE statement. It reserves a block of
storage from the partition GETVIS for working space and overhead for SRAM.
For more information about calculating the storage requirement, see the CA
SRAM documentation set.
This section lists miscellaneous items of special interest if you are planning to
use CA Dynam/FI to modify the attributes of files processed by existing
programs or are designing new programs.
Some user programs open files that are only occasionally or never used. These
files are often assigned to IGNORE to prevent a tape volume or disk space
from being dedicated to the unused file. Since normal OPEN/CLOSE processing
does not require label information to be present for files assigned to IGN, the
DLBL or TLBL statements for the file may no longer be in the job stream.
When this condition exists, and CA Dynam/FI locates a label record on the
partition or system standard label area for the same DTFNAME, unpredictable
results may occur.
For example, if a program opened an output tape file with the DTFNAME
'MASTER,' the logical unit assigned to IGN and no TLBL included in the job
stream, CA Dynam/FI might find DLBL and EXTENT information for a disk file
with the same DTFNAME on the system standard labels. In this condition, a
disk DTF would be constructed by CA Dynam/FI using the logical unit specified
in the EXTENT statement. This OPEN would then fail due to 'INVALID LOGICAL
UNIT' if, for example, the logical unit was assigned to the card reader.
To correct the situation, simply include the proper label information in the job
stream. CA Dynam/FI determines that no DTF modifications are necessary,
and the file is ignored.
If the only CA Dynam/FI option specified for a file is an overriding logical unit
number on a DLBL statement, the new logical unit should be different from the
one specified on the file's EXTENT statement. If the units are the same, FI may
not create a virtual DTF for the file. CA Dynam/FI will appear "not to work" for
the file.
TRUNCS Support
All output files under the control of CA Dynam/FI are created with TRUNCS
support. This may, under some conditions, cause the end-of-file record to be
written on the last track of a file where it normally would not have been
placed. If the file is then read using a program which does not require any CA
Dynam/FI file changes and the logic module used to read the file does not
specify 'TRUNCS=YES', the last block of data and the end-of-file record may
not be read.
Physical I/O
Programs and products that use physical I/O (PIOCS) are incompatible with CA
Dynam/FI.
Checkpointing
CA Dynam/FI will always set up the I/O register (IOREG) if one is specified in
the program DTF. Programs that indicate an IOREG but ignore the information
passed in it will have unexpected results.
CA Dynam/FI does not support PL/1 programs that have a DTF with one
IOAREA and unblocked record format. The PL/1 compiler establishes DTFs with
IOREG specified. If the DTF has one IOAREA and unblocked record format,
however, the IOREG values are ignored. In order to force usage of the IOREG
values, the PL/1 option 'BUFFERS=2' must be specified.
Due to the nature of changes made to control blocks during file independence,
it may be advantageous at times not to have DYNAM/FI processing active. The
following chart reviews the ways that you may "turn off" DYNAM/FI. Each of
the commands is explained in detail elsewhere in this manual.
VCKD allows programs that utilize Direct Access Method, at the logical IOCS
level, to execute on FBA devices without conversion to another access method.
With VCKD, it is not necessary to make any program modifications in order to
process direct access (DA) file-dependent programs using FBA devices. After
installation, VCKD is completely transparent to the user. In addition, all
programming languages and teleprocessing monitors are supported.
For more information about the standard syntax notation used, see the
chapter "Introduction."
Utility Programs
Clear Disk utility to format a Direct Access file that resides on an FBA disk
device
CKD DA disk file analyzer to assist in the allocation of the new FBA DA file
Record Formats
Data Records
Key reference
System Restrictions
VCKD has been designed to be transparent and flexible from the user's point
of view. Nevertheless, the system's design does impose a few restrictions.
Trailer labels
If a user program utilizes extent processing, then the program must process
every extent.
For VCKD support to be active for a file, the programmer logical unit (SYS
number) must be assigned to an FBA disk before the file is opened.
Each partition that runs programs using VCKD must contain enough GETVIS
area to contain all input/output buffers and VCKD control blocks.
Activating VCKD
The activation procedure for VCKD is relatively simple and straightforward. All
required processing phases and supporting utilities are installed automatically
with the installation of CA Dynam/FI. Just follow these steps to activate the
Direct Access File Independence Facility for a particular file.
2. Allocate the new FBA DA file and create the required JCL. For more
information, see Allocating FBA Disk Files.
3. Create the new FBA file. For more information, see Creating FBA Disk
Files.
4. Ensure that each partition has enough GETVIS area to contain all VCKD
I/O buffers and file control blocks.
VCKD file parameters define the characteristics of the direct access file now
residing on the FBA disk. Each parameter is defined within the data set name
portion of the DLBL statement of the file. The specified parameters actually
become part of the data set name and must be specified at file creation.
CYL=xxx Defines the file's cylinder offset to be used by VCKD. ("xxx" is the cylinder
number of the original CKD file.) Programs that access the file using the old
CKD extents (for example, programs that have hard-coded the cylinder/head
address) can continue to function without program modification. VCKD
internally converts the address and maintains address compatibility.
KL=xxx Provides support for programs accessing DA files containing keys when the
following parameters have been omitted from the Assembler DTF or COBOL
select statements:
The parameter tells VCKD that the file was created with keys and that VCKD
should allow any program omitting the above parameters to receive only the
data portion of each record.
Examples
// DLBL FBAFILE,'NEW.FBA.FILE.MAP=R',,DA
// DLBL FBAFILE,'NEW.FBA.FILE.CYL=210',,DA
// DLBL FBAFILE,'NEW.FBA.FILE.KL=4',,DA
VCKD provides two data-mapping techniques for Direct Access files: full-track
mapping and record mapping.
Full-track mapping combines all the key and data records from the original
CKD track into one control interval. All I/O to the file is then performed at
the track level. If the file contains physical keys, track mapping must be
specified.
Record mapping creates a separate control interval for each data record on
the original CKD track. I/O for the file is then performed at the record
level. Record mapping provides faster access to records and reduced
storage requirements. However, it is supported only for fixed-length
records.
Specify the mapping technique as a parameter within the file name of a DLBL
JCL statement. This parameter has the following format:
If MAP= is not specified, the default is full-track mapping. A file that has been
created for record mapping cannot be accessed as track-mapped.
Examples
// DLBL FBAFILE,'NEW.FBA.FILE',,DA
There are two methods of determining the number of FBA blocks to allocate
for the new FBA DA file: direct calculation, and VCKD Disk Analyzer Program
(VCKDANAL) use.
Direct Calculation
VCKD emulates each CKD track as "n" FBA blocks. The actual number of
FBA blocks that make up each CKD track is based upon the CKD device
type, key and data lengths, and the number of records per track.
In general, the number of FBA blocks to allocate for each CKD track can be
calculated using the following formula:
Note that the number of allocated FBA blocks on the EXTENT statement
must be an even multiple of the number of FBA blocks that define an
emulated CKD track. Therefore, 1500 FBA blocks will define 100 CKD
tracks.
For example, on a 3340 device, a record size of 2552 bytes produces three
blocks per track totaling a maximum of 7656 bytes. Therefore, VCKD will
allocate 15 FBA blocks for each CKD track. The allocation is calculated as
follows:
Using VCKDANAL
Another method to obtain the number of blocks to allocate for each CKD
track is to run the VCKD disk file analyzer program VCKDANAL. This
program will read the first track of your CKD DA file and compute the
required number of FBA blocks to allocate for each track. For more
information, see VCKDANAL.
You can use any of the following methods to create the new Direct Access file
on the FBA disk:
Format the FBA disk extent using the VCKD Clear Disk Program
(VCKDCLDK). Then restore the file with a user-written backup/restore
program that utilizes DTFDA LIOCS.
Restore the file with a user-written program that performs WRITE RZERO
and WRITE AFTER formatting writes.
Use the VCKD backup/restore program (VCKDBKRS) to copy the CKD file
to tape. Then restore the tape to the FBA disk.
CA Dynam does not have to be enabled to convert the original CKD files to
tape or from tape to FBA files, but the VCKDBKRS program must be available.
Note that keywords are executed in the order specified on the statement.
BACKUP= Specifies the device type of the file to be copied to tape. Valid entries are
2311, 2314, 3330, 3340, and 3350.
MAP= Indicates track- or record-mapping. For more information, see Mapping FBA
Disk Files.
CLEAR= Identifies fill character enclosed in single quotation marks (C'c' for EBCDIC,
X'xx' for hexadecimal). If specified during backup, any unused space between
the last record and the end of the control interval will be filled with the
indicated character. If specified during restore, all assigned FBA blocks will be
cleared with the indicated character before restoring the backup tape. CLEAR
should always be specified during a restore run. The clear character does not
have to be the same for the backup and restore of the same file.
MAXSIZE= Specifies the maximum record size for variable-length records within the file.
EOF=Y Causes an EOF record to be placed after the last control interval when the
backup file is restored.
File Names
Device Assignments
SYS002 must be assigned to the tape.
The EXTENT statement can reflect any SYS number for the CKDDISK and
FBADISK files.
Examples
Backs up a CKD disk file to tape and restores it to an FBA disk using various
options.
// JOB VCKDBK BACKUP CKD DISK TO TAPE AND RESTORE ON AN FBA DISK
// TLBL DATAPE,'CKD.DA.TAPE'
// DLBL CKDDISK,'CKD.FILE',2099/365,DA
// EXTENT SYS003,CKDDSK,1,0,19,10
// ASSGN SYS003,DISK,VOL=CKDDSK,SHR
// ASSGN SYS002,X'281'
// EXEC VCKDBKRS
BACKUP=3330,CLEAR=X'FF',MAP=T,EOF=Y,RESTORE,MAXSIZE=650
/*
/&
// EXEC VCKDBKRS
RESTORE
/*
/&
The VCKD Clear Disk Utility (VCKDCLDK) program allows the user to format a
Direct Access file that will reside on an FBA disk device. If a user program does
not perform at a DA file using a WRITE RZERO or WRITE AFTER formatting
write, then VCKDCLDK must be executed. The utility control statements are
compatible with the IBM CLRDK program.
This program uses two different control statements: // UCL and // END. Apply
the following rules:
C'c'|X'xx' Identifies EBCDIC (C) or hexadecimal (X) fill character enclosed in single
quotation marks (default is x'00').
E=(eeee)|RECORD Specifies emulated CKD device type. Valid entries are: 2311, 2314, 3330,
3340, and 3350, enclosed in parentheses. RECORD indicates record-mapping
support. If this operand is omitted, the default is 2311.
Example
The VCKD disk analyzer program (VCKDANAL) reads the first track of a file
and determines the required number of FBA blocks to allocate for each track.
In addition, all extents are read to calculate the total number of FBA blocks
required for the complete file. VCKD does not have to be enabled in order for
VCKDANAL to analyze the CKD file. However, if the CKD disks are connected to
another CPU, then VCKDANAL must be installed on that system.
ANAL=xxxx[,MAXSIZE=nnnnn]
ANAL=xxxx Specifies the device type (xxxx) to be analyzed. Valid entries are 2311, 2314,
3330, 3340 and 3350.
MAXSIZE=nnnnn Optional operand. Specifies the maximum record size (nnnnn) for variable-
length and undefined records within the file.
JCL Requirements
File name CKDDISK is the DLBL name for the DA file on the CKD disk.
Device The EXTENT statement can reflect any SYS number for CKDDISK.
Example
Catalog File
The CA Dynam Catalog management facility lets you control the attributes of
tape and disk files. The Catalog file contains information about data set
attributes (block size, record length, and so on). This information is either
automatically or manually cataloged using the DYNCAT utility program or the
CUI FILE Management online screens. By using the utilities, you can define file
attributes separate from job control.
The same Catalog is shared by CA Dynam/D, /T, and /FI. The Catalog need
only be created once. The locations of the Catalog and Audit files are saved
when they are accessed for the first time following IPL. Only one file of each
type may be used in a particular system, and it must not be moved except
through the appropriate DYNCAT and AUDTUTIL functions, which cause the
saved location to be updated.
File attributes defined in the Catalog are used in addition to the options
defined in job control. CA Dynam/FI overrides the Catalog information with
definitions found on TLBL and DLBL statements.
CATALOG(YES|NO) (set in the DYNAM/FI option record, for all data sets),
and
CA Dynam/FI uses the data set attributes to ensure that new versions of a
data set are created with the desired block size, record format, and so on. The
version attributes are used to properly process existing versions of a data set.
CA Dynam/FI will always access the most current version (version 1) of a data
set unless a CA Dynam/T or /D generation option is specified on the
TLBL/DLBL. In other words, if you want to access catalog information for a
version other than version 1, you must use a CA Dynam/T or /D generation
option on the TLBL/DLBL. For example, the following JCL accesses generation
information for versions 2 of DISK.FILE and TAPE.FILE.
// DLBL DISKIN,'DISK.FILE(G-1)'
// TLBL TAPEIN,'TAPE.FILE.(-1)'
// TLBL TAPEIN,'TAPE.FILE',,,,,2
All CA Dynam panels that have been modified to meet the new VSE standards
are referred to as File Management panels; however, they perform the same
basic functions as the previously used CA Dynam VSE panels (with some
exceptions as noted).
Note: The CUI transaction is the main component of CAICUI. It controls other
CA product transactions and maintains product resource definitions. For more
information about using and customizing your CAICUI session, see the CA CIS
Administrator Guide.
PF Keys
You can use the following PF keys to move around File Management panels.
They are supplied with File Management and take effect upon initialization:
3/15 QUIT Quit the current panel and return to the previous
panel level
7/19 BACkward Scroll the current panel backward one full panel length
8/20 FORward Scroll the current panel forward one full panel length
These default PF keys are panel-specific; that is, they are specifically assigned
to every panel to correspond to that panel's particular functionality. For
example, some panels contain only one panel of information and do not scroll
backward and forward. Therefore, they are not supplied with PF keys [PF7] /
[PF19] (Backward) and [PF8] / [PF20] (Forward). Other panels belong to a
"series" of related panels that are all on the same "level." These panels,
therefore, are supplied with PF keys [PF5] / [PF17] (Switch Backward) and
[PF6] / [PF20] (Switch Forward) to scroll through the series. Panels that do
not belong to a series are not assigned these PF keys.
When using File Management, there are three types of commands that are
available: long, short or special.
Long Commands
Global commands are issued from any panel running under the CUI
transaction. Control is transferred to a different panel.
You can use global commands to move around File Management panels or
to customize your CUI transaction. For example, you can use the DYNAM
MENU global command to transfer to the File Management main menu
panel (CAYD-0000) from anywhere within the CUI transaction, or you can
use the CUI QUERY STATUS global command to transfer to the CAICUI
Session Status Selection Panel (CUI-S000).
Immediate commands are issued from any panel running under the CUI
transaction Control remains with the current panel.
Local commands are available only on specific panels and affect only the
panel from which they are issued.
Short Commands
Special Commands
Special commands are also available within the File Management system,
including fastpath command processing. Using fastpath is equivalent to
entering global long commands to call certain panels for display. For more
information about using special commands, see the CA CIS Administration
Guide.
DYNCAT Command
DYNCAT is an immediate command that executes the CA Dynam DYNCAT
command from the File Management online environment. Simply prefix all CA
Dynam DYNCAT commands with the keyword DYNCAT. It can be issued by
System Administrators only.
The File Management DYNCAT command can be issued from the command line
of any panel running under the CUI transaction; however, because of the
length of many CA Dynam DYNCAT commands, it may have to be issued from
the CAICUI Command Mode Panel (CUI-S600). This panel features an
extended command line to facilitate the processing of lengthy commands, and
requires no continuation characters.
Note: Panel IDs can only be defined to your CAICUI main menu by a System
Administrator on the CAICUI Menu Selection/Security Panel (CUI-2300). The
panel IDs defined on this panel determine what products, or portions of
products, your CAICUI user ID can access. They also determine what is
displayed on your CAICUI Primary Selection Panel. If a product's main menu
panel ID is not defined to your CAICUI user ID, it will not be displayed on your
CAICUI Primary Selection Panel, and you will not be able to access that
product. For more information about defining CAICUI menus, see the CA CIS
Administrator Guide.
Enter desired option number or any valid command and press the ENTER key.
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7=Backward 8=Forward 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
To select the File Management option from this panel, enter its menu number
(in this case, 5) and press Enter, or tab down and press Enter. After you
become more familiar with the CUI transaction, you can optionally use CAICUI
global or special commands to immediately transfer to the panels of your
choice. For example, enter DYNAM MENU on the command line to
immediately transfer to the File Management Panel (CAYD-0000), or enter
DYNAM QUERY STATUS to immediately transfer to the System Status
Information Panel (CAYD-1400). You can also use fastpath command
processing (For more information, see the CA CIS Administration Guide.)
Local Commands
The following commands are available with the CAICUI Primary Selection Panel
(CUI-MENU). Type any of the following commands on the command line and
press Enter to execute these functions:
Selecting File Management from the CAICUI Primary Selection Panel (CUI-
MENU)
Enter desired option number or any valid command and press ENTER:
1. System Options
2. Data Set Maintenance
3. Tape Volume Maintenance
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7= 8= 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
To select a menu option, enter the desired menu number and press Enter, or
tab down to the desired option and press Enter. You can optionally enter a
CAICUI command on the command line, and press Enter to select and display
the panel of your choice.
Select Option To
Select Option To
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
System Options
For more information about System Options, see the Programming Guide.
For more information about field parameters, defaults and limitations, while
updating data set attributes, see the DEFINE and ALTER command descriptions
in the chapter "Maintaining The Catalog - DYNCAT Program."
This panel lets you select data sets from the CA Dynam Catalog for display. Do
the following to display this panel:
Enter DYNAM SELect DSN from anywhere within the CUI transaction
Enter desired selection criteria or any valid command and press the ENTER key.
Relation Selection
Data Set: __ ____________________________________________
Type: __ ____ Data set type (Disk,Tape,FI)
Disk Type: __ __ Disk filetype (SD, DA, IS)
User ID: __ __ (character A-Z,0-9)
Owner ID: __ __ (character A-Z,0-9)
System ID: __ __ (character A-Z,0-9)
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7= 8= 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
Enter data specific to the desired data set in the selection and relation
fields. When you press Enter, a browse is initiated to search the CA Dynam
Catalog for a data set that matches the selection/relation criteria you
specified. If found, the data set is displayed on a directory panel; if no
matching data set is found, a blank directory panel is displayed.
Enter data specific to the generic group of data sets in the selection and
relation fields. Generic criteria is specified by entering an asterisk (*) as a
suffix to a root word (for example, enter ACC* in the Data Set selection
field to display all data sets in the Catalog whose names begin with ACC).
When you press Enter, a browse is initiated to search the CA Dynam
Catalog for any data sets that match the specified selection/relation
criteria. If found, any and all data sets that match are alphabetically
displayed on a directory panel. If no matching data sets are found, a blank
directory panel is displayed.
You can also select a group of generic data sets that end in a specific
character or combination of characters that have a specific character or
combination of characters imbedded within the data set name ('wild
cards'). To select all data sets ending in the characters PROD, enter
*PROD in the Data Set selection field. To select all data sets that have
PROD anywhere in the data set name, enter *PROD* in the Data Set
selection field.
Data Set Specifies the specific or generic name of the desired data set(s).
Disk Type Specifies the disk file type. SD, DA, and IS are valid entries.
Owner ID Specifies the ownership code associated with the data set.
Relations
Note: Only EQ/= or NE/^= can be entered in the Type relation field.
This panel displays an alphabetical list of data sets as selected on the Data Set
Selection Panel (CAYD-2000). It can contain a specific data set, a specific
group of data sets, or all of the data sets contained in the CA Dynam Catalog,
depending upon what selection/relation criteria were specified on the Data Set
Selection Panel. This panel is displayed by doing the following:
Pressing Enter on the Data Set Selection Panel (CAYD-2000), whether any
selection/relation criteria was specified
Cmd -------------- Data Set Name --------------- Type Disk User Owner System
___ ACC.PAYABLE.BACKUP TAPE AP AP
___ ACCOUNT.PAYABLE.FILE DISK AP AP
___ PAYROLL.BACKUP TAPE PD PD
___ PAYROLL.MASTER.FILE DISK PD PD
___ WORK.FILE.DATASET FI
___ EMP.FILE DISK SD
___ TAX.DEDUCTIONS DISK DA
___ DEPT.EXPENSE.FILE DISK IS
===> __ = = = =
____________________________________________ ____ __ __ __
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7=Backward 8=Forward 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
Data Set Name Displays the names of the data sets that meet the specified criteria. Also a
selection field.
User Displays the user ID associated with the data set. Also a selection field.
Owner Displays the ownership code associated with the data set. Also a selection
field.
System Displays the system ID associated with the data set. Also a selection field.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line in the upper left-
hand corner of the panel and press Enter to execute these functions:
ADD Transfer to the Data Set Detail Panel (CAYD-2110) and add a new data set to
the Catalog.
Short Commands
Enter any of the following commands in the short command area (Cmd) on the
same line as the desired data set to execute these functions:
AUX Transfer to the Auxiliary Record Panel (CAYD-2140), which displays the
comments and auxiliary messages defined for the selected data set.
DSP Transfer to the Data Set Detail Panel (CAYD-2110), which displays in detail all
the attributes of the selected data set. If no other short commands have been
entered, you can display the same information by positioning the cursor
anywhere on the same line of the desired data set and pressing Enter.
LST Transfer to the Disk, Tape or FI Version List panel, which displays a list of the
active versions for the selected disk, tape or FI data set.
DLP Delete with Purge option. Deletes the DATASET record from the catalog and
then deletes (purges) the associated disk files from the disk volumes that they
reside on. If the disk file no longer exists on the disk volume pointed to in the
catalog, a message is issued but the version record will have already been
deleted.
You can overtype or enter any selection and/or relation criteria in the
unlabeled selection and relation fields at the bottom of the panel to redisplay a
directory list that matches the new criteria. Use these relational abbreviations
and symbols:
Note: Only EQ/= or NE/^= can be entered in the Type relation field.
This panel displays in detail the attributes of a selected data set. It is the first
in a series of 9 panels and is displayed by doing the following:
Executing the DSP short command on the Data Set Directory Panel
(CAYD-2100)
Vault Locations(001-025):
Display another data set (see the Data Set field description)
Define a new data set (see the Data Set field description)
Additional attributes of this data set are displayed on the other panels in this
series. You can update all of the fields on this panel (except Opens, File No.
and Next File) by tabbing to the desired field and overtyping the information
contained there. When you press Enter, the changes are recorded by the
Catalog update facility.
Data Set The name of the currently displayed data set, up to 44 characters.
You can use this field to select an existing data set for display, or to define a
new data set using the displayed data set as a model.
1. To select an existing data set for display, type its name in this field and
press Enter. The CA Dynam Catalog is browsed for the specified data set.
If found, it is displayed. If not found, a copy of the displayed data set is
created, using the specified name as the new data set name.
2. To define a new data set using the displayed data set as a model, type the
name of the data set to be created in this field and press Enter. A copy of
the currently displayed data set is created under the new name. You can
then modify its fields (except Opens, File No. and Next File) as desired.
Type The type of the data set. Choose either DISK, TAPE or FI. If FI is specified, the
data set may be either a disk or tape that is available for dynamic device
switching.
If you select DISK, you will be transferred to the Data Set Disk Option
Panel (CAYD-2120) when you switch forward to the next panel in the
series.
If you select TAPE, you will be transferred to the Data Set Option Panel
(CAYD-2130) when you switch forward to the next panel in the series.
If you select FI, you will be transferred to either of the two panels
mentioned above.
Disk Filetype Displays the file type if disk is selected as the type of data set. SD, DA, or IS
(for ISAM) is displayed if disk was selected as the type of data set.
Ngens The number of disk data set generations to be saved. This may be a value
from 0 to 999
Owner ID The 1 or 2 character ownership code for the data set, or NO to clear.
Density The recording density of this data set (TAPE only) or NO to clear. Valid entries
are:
User ID The 1- or 2-character user ID that will appear in each version record for
reporting purposes, or NO to clear.
AMF Indicates whether this automatic multifile tape data set is to be on a new
volume (NEW) or reset to a specific number (nnn). NO specifies that multifile
support is not used.
Block Size The block size, from 0 to 65535, of this data set (DISK & FI only).
System ID The 1- or 2-character system ID of this data set for reporting purposes, or NO
to clear.
Catalog OPEN Indicates whether newly opened output versions of this tape data set will be
considered valid versions when opened. YES catalogs the data set at OPEN, NO
catalogs at CLOSE.
Record Length The logical record length of the file, from 0 to 65535.
PED Cycle The number of versions, from 0 to 999, being retained by the period-ending
date.
Work Data Set Indicate whether this is a tape work data set, either YES or NO.
Record Format The record format of the data set. Valid entries are:
U undefined records
NO removes specification
No Access The number of days, after last access, to retain a version of this data set
before it is eligible for scratch. A value from 0 to 9999.
Def Vault The default vault location for any version of the data set that does not
explicitly specify a vault location.
DYNAM/FI Indicate whether this data set is eligible for modification by CA Dynam/FI.
Specify YES or NO. NO will not allow CA Dynam/FI to access Catalog
information for this data set.
Tape Length The tape length of the data set volume. Specify:
XS extra short
S short
MS medium short
M medium
ML medium long
L long
NO removes specification
Opens The number of opens for this data set (display only).
File No The sequence number of this file if it is part of a chained or predefined multifile
data set (display only).
Sysno Override Specifies whether a logical unit override is defined for a data set in the
catalog. Valid entries are:
Next Disk The next disk generation ID number for CA Dynam/D-controlled disk
generation data sets.
Previous File The data set name of the previous file if this is a chained or predefined
multifile tape data set.
Long GDG Specifies whether .G#nnnnnn will be placed in the last 9 bytes of the data set
name for a generation data set. nnnnnn can be any value from 000001 to
065535. NO means the old format of G#nn is used.
Next File The data set name of the next file if this is a chained or predefined multifile
tape data set (display only).
Volume The volume serial number, from 1 to 6 characters, where the extent will
reside.
Alloc Unit The unit of allocation to be made for the extent. Specify:
Primary The number of units, from 0 to 999999, to be used for primary allocation of
this data set. This value is required.
Secondary The number of units, from 0 to 999999, to be used for secondary allocation of
this data set.
Number of Sec The number of secondary allocations to be made for this data set, from 0 to
255.
Vault Locations The vault location scheme for versions of this data set (TAPE only). Any
number of vault locations up to 999 can be specified. Separate the locations
by commas. Use the PF7 and PF8 keys to scroll through the list. Specify NO to
clear.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
This panel displays in detail the attributes of a selected DISK or FI data set. It
is the second in a series of 9 panels and is displayed by doing the following:
Display another data set (see the Data Set field description)
Issue local commands
Additional attributes of this data set are displayed on the other panels in this
series. You can update all of the fields on this panel by tabbing to the desired
field and overtyping the information contained there. When you press Enter,
the changes are recorded by the Catalog update facility.
Field Descriptions
You can use this field to select an existing data set for display. Type the name
of the desired data set in this field and press Enter. The CA Dynam Catalog is
then browsed for that data set. If found, it is displayed. If not, an error
message is issued. You cannot create a new data set from this panel.
Delete INPUT File at Indicates whether the VTOC entry should be deleted when closing an INPUT
CLOSE SD.
Fragmentation Indicates whether to force CA Dynam/D to fragment space allocation for the
allocation file.
Enqueue file Indicates whether to enqueue files opened for input, update or output.
Messages to SYSLST Indicates whether messages produced by CA Dynam/D will be directed to the
printer, SYSLST.
Old file Indicates whether you can access an existing SD file and open it without
having to reallocate it.
Keep SD Work File Indicates whether to keep the SD work file after closing the file.
Lock File Read Only Indicates whether the data set is locked for read-only usage.
Message to SYSLOG Indicates whether messages produced by CA Dynam/D will be directed to the
console, SYSLOG.
Same Ext. Indicates whether SORTIN and SORTOUT space can be assigned to the same
SORTIN/SORTOUT area.
Truncate ISAM/Workfile
Indicates whether the ISAM work files will be truncated.
Delete file at CLOSE Indicates whether to delete files from VTOC at CLOSE.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
This panel displays in detail the attributes of a selected TAPE or FI data set. It
is the third in a series of 9 panels and is displayed by doing the following:
Tape Options:
Display another data set (see the Data Set field description)
Additional attributes of this data set are displayed on the other panels in this
series. You can update all of the fields on this panel by tabbing to the desired
field and overtyping the information contained there. When you press Enter,
the changes are recorded by the Catalog update facility.
Field Descriptions
You can use this field to select an existing data set for display. Type the name
of the desired data set in this field and press Enter. You cannot create a new
data set from this panel.
Automatic Scratch Indicates whether this data set will be automatically scratched at CLOSE.
Drop Label at CLOSE Indicates whether the TLBL will be erased at CLOSE.
Hold Assign at CLOSE Indicates whether the ASSGN statement will be held at CLOSE.
Modify DTFNAME at Indicates whether the DTF name will be modified at OPEN.
OPEN
OPEN Disposition Indicates whether tapes are rewound (RWD) at OPEN or not rewound
(NORWD).
CLOSE Disposition Indicates whether tapes are rewound (RWD), not rewound (NORWD), or
rewound and unloaded (UNL) at CLOSE.
Release Work Data Set Indicates whether work data sets will be scratched at CLOSE.
Record to Journal Indicates whether audit recording will be performed for this data set.
Buffering Technique Displays the type of buffering supported. SB indicates single buffering, and DB
indicates double buffering.
Label Processing Displays the type of label processing supported. SL indicates standard label
processing, and UL indicates unlabeled processing.
Verification of OUTPUT Indicates whether output verification is supported. YES enables the VERIFY
option in the DTF.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
This panel displays the comments and auxiliary messages currently defined for
the selected data set. It is the fourth in a series of 9 panels and is displayed by
doing the following:
Executing the AUX short command from the Data Set Directory Panel
(CAYD-2100)
KEKL1: L/H
KEKL2: L/H
Select another data set (see the Data Set field description)
Update, add, or delete the KEKL information defined for the displayed data
set
Additional attributes of this data set are displayed on the other panels in this
series. You can update or add any of the information contained in the fields on
this panel by tabbing to the desired field and overtyping the information
contained there. When you press Enter, the changes are recorded by the
Catalog update facility.
You can delete information by simply overtyping the entire field with spaces
and pressing Enter.
You can use this field to select another data set for display. Type the name of
the desired data set in this field and press Enter. You cannot create a new data
set from this panel.
Comment The 100-character comment field to be used for reporting purposes only.
Alarm Indicate whether the console above is to sound when this message is issued.
OPEN Output Indicate whether the message issued at OPEN output is to be sent to the
Destination CONSOLE, the PRINTER or BOTH.
Alarm Indicate whether the console above is to sound when this message is issued.
Alarm Indicate whether the console above is to sound when this message is issued.
CLOSE Output Indicate whether the message issued at CLOSE output is to be sent to the
Destination CONSOLE, the PRINTER or BOTH.
Alarm Indicate whether the console above is to sound when this message is issued.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
This panel displays a list of the active data set versions for DISK data sets
only. It is the fifth in a series of nine panels and is displayed by doing the
following:
Executing the LST short command from the Data Set Directory Panel
(CAYD-2100) for a DISK data set
This is a display-only panel. You cannot update any of the displayed attribute
information. You may, however, change the data set name to view the
attributes of another data set. Additional attributes of the data set being
displayed, are also displayed on other panels in this series.
Data Set Displays the name of the currently displayed disk data set.
Initial Volser Displays the initial volume serial number of the version.
Job Name Displays the name of the job that created the version.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
Short Commands
Enter the following command in the short command area (Cmd) on the same
line as the desired version to execute this function:
DSP Transfer to the DISK Version Detail Panel (CAYD-2180), which displays the
attributes of the selected version in detail. If no other short commands have
been entered, you can display the same information by positioning the cursor
anywhere on the same line of the desired version and pressing Enter.
DLP Delete with Purge option. Deletes the version record from the catalog and then
deletes (purges) the associated disk file from the disk volume where it resides.
If the disk file no longer exists on the disk volume pointed to in the catalog, a
message will be issued but the version record will have already been deleted.
This panel displays a list of the active data set versions for TAPE data sets
only. It is the sixth in a series of 9 panels and is displayed by doing the
following:
Executing the LST short command from the Data Set Directory Panel
(CAYD-2100) for a TAPE data set
This is a display-only panel. You cannot update any of the displayed attribute
information. You may, however, change the data set name to view the
attributes of another data set. Additional attributes of the data set being
displayed are also displayed on other panels in this series.
Data Set Displays the name of the currently displayed tape data set.
Vol Seq Displays the volume sequence number assigned to the version.
Initial Volser Displays the initial volume serial number of the version. VTAPE-created
volumes are indicated by a (V).
Job Name Displays the name of the job that created the version.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
Short Commands
Enter the following command in the short command area (Cmd) on the same
line as the desired version to execute this function:
DSP Transfer to the TAPE Version Detail Panel (CAYD-2190), which displays the
attributes of the selected version in detail. If no other short commands have
been entered, you can display the same information by positioning the cursor
anywhere on the same line of the desired version and pressing Enter.
This panel displays a list of the active data set versions for FI data sets only. It
is the seventh in a series of 9 panels and is displayed by the following:
Executing the LST short command from the Data Set Directory Panel
(CAYD-2100) for an FI data set
Entering DYNAM DISplay FIList 'dsname' from anywhere within the CUI
transaction
This is a display-only panel. You cannot update any of the displayed attribute
information. You may, however, change the data set name to view the
attributes of another data set. Additional attributes of the data set being
displayed are also displayed on other panels in this series.
Data Set Displays the name of the currently displayed FI data set.
Initial Volser Displays the initial volume serial number of the version. VTAPE-created
volumes are indicated by a (V).
Job Name Displays the name of the job that created the version.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
Short Commands
Enter the following command in the short command area (Cmd) on the same
line as the desired version to execute this function:
DSP Transfer to the DISK or TAPE Version Detail Panel, which displays the
attributes of the selected version in detail. If no other short commands have
been entered, you can display the same information by positioning the cursor
anywhere on the same line of the desired version and pressing Enter.
DLP Delete with Purge option. Deletes the version record from the catalog and then
deletes (purges) the associated disk file (if the version is a disk version) from
the disk volume where it resides. If the disk file no longer exists on the disk
volume pointed to in the catalog, a message will be issued but the version
record will have already been deleted.
Executing the DSP short command for a DISK or an FI data set on the Disk
Version List Panel (CAYD-2150) or the FI Version List Panel (CAYD-2170)
Extent Volser
000 POOL01
You can use this field to select another data set for display. Type the name of
the desired data set in this field and press Enter. You cannot create a new data
set from this panel.
You can use this field to select another version for display. Type the number of
the desired version in this field and press Enter. You cannot create a new
version from this panel.
Access The information assigned to the version when it was last accessed.
Job Name The name of the job that created the version or was running when the version
was last accessed.
Job Step The name of job step performed when the version was created or last
accessed.
CPU The ID of the CPU used when the version was created or last accessed.
Part The ID of the partition used when the version was created or last accessed.
Extent The sequence number assigned to the volume when it was created or last
accessed.
Volser The volume serial number assigned to the version when it was created or last
accessed.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line, and press Enter to
execute these functions:
Executing the DSP short command for a TAPE or FI data set on the Tape
Version List Panel (CAYD-2160) or the FI Version List Panel (CAYD-2170)
Vol Volser Date Time CUU Mode Fils O/Err I/Err Cleaned Opens Vlt
001 234234 08/09/2000 10:27 0000 1 0 0 00/00/00 0 A
You can use this field to select another data set for display. Type the name of
the desired data set in this field and press Enter. The CA Dynam Catalog is
then browsed for that data set. If found, it is displayed. If not, an error
message is issued. You cannot create a new data set from this panel.
You can use this field to select another version for display. Type the number of
the desired version in this field and press Enter. The CA Dynam Catalog is then
browsed for that version. If found, it is displayed. If not, an error message is
issued. You cannot create a new data set from this panel.
Virtual Tape Indicates whether the version exists on VTAPE (VTP), Faketape (FTP) or does
not exist on a virtual tape (NO).
Access The information assigned to the version when it was last accessed.
Job Name The name of the job that created the version or was running when the version
last accessed.
Job Step The name of job step performed when the version was created or last
accessed.
CPU The ID of the CPU where the version was created or last accessed.
Part The ID of the partition where the version was created or last accessed.
Vol The sequence number assigned to the volume when it was created.
Volser The volume serial number assigned when the volume was created.
CUU The device address upon which the volume was created.
O/Err The number of output errors that have occurred on the volume.
I/Err The number of input errors that have occurred on the volume.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line, and press Enter to
execute these functions:
This panel lets you select tape volumes from the CA Dynam Catalog for
display. It is displayed by doing the following:
Entering DYNAM SELect TAPE from anywhere within the CUI transaction
Enter desired selection criteria or any valid command and press the ENTER key.
Relation Selection
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7= 8 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
Enter data specific to the desired tape volume in the selection and relation
fields. When you press Enter, a browse is initiated to search the CA Dynam
Catalog for a tape volume that matches the selection/relation criteria you
specified. If found, the tape volume is displayed on a directory panel; if no
matching tape volume is found, a blank directory panel is displayed.
Enter data specific to the generic group of tape volumes in the selection
and relation fields. Generic criteria is specified by entering an asterisk (*)
as a suffix to a root word (for example, enter MULTI* in the Volser
selection field to display all the volsers in the Catalog whose names begin
with MULTI). When you press Enter, a browse is initiated to search the CA
Dynam Catalog for any tape volumes that match the specified
selection/relation criteria. If found, any and all tape volumes that match
are alphabetically displayed on a directory panel. If no matching tape
volumes are found, a blank directory panel is displayed.
You can also select generically, volsers that end in a specific character or
combination of characters or volsers that have a specific character or
combination of characters imbedded with the volume serial number ('wild
cards'). To select all volsers ending in the characters A00, enter *A00 in
the Volser selection field. To select all volsers that have A00 anywhere in
the volser, enter *A00* in the Volser selection field.
Selection Field
Descriptions The following section describes selection fields.
Status Specify a tape volume status. Choose SCRATCH, ACT-MAN, C-$TEST, C-LOCK,
NO-CLSD, DELETED, LOCKED, or ACTIVE.
Last Cleaned Specify the date on which the desired tape volume or group of tape volumes
was last cleaned.
Note: Only EQ/= or NE/^= can be entered in the Length, Density and Status
relation fields.
Cmd Volser Len Own Density Initial Cleaned Opens Errors Status
===> = = = = = = = = =
______ __ __ ____ ________ ________ _____ ______ _______
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7=Backward 8=Forward 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
Volser The volume serial number of the tape volume. Also a selection field. VTAPE
created volumes are indicated by a (V). FakeTape created volumes are
indicated by (F).
Own The ownership code of the tape volume owner. Also a selection field.
Density The recording density of the tape volume. Also a selection field.
Initial The date the tape volume was initialized. Also a selection field.
Cleaned The date the tape volume was last cleaned. Also a selection field.
Errors The number of open errors that occurred. Also a selection field.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
Short Commands
Enter any of the following commands in the short command area (Cmd) on the
same line as the desired tape volume to execute these functions:
DAT Transfer to the Data Sets on Volume Panel (CAYD-3120), which displays a list
of all the data sets residing on the selected tape volume.
DSP Transfer to the Tape Volume Detail Panel (CAYD-3110), which displays the
attributes of the selected tape volume in detail. If no other short commands
have been entered, you can display the same information by positioning the
cursor anywhere on the same line of the desired tape volume and pressing
Enter.
You can overtype or enter any selection and/or relation criteria in the
unlabeled selection and relation fields at the bottom of the panel to redisplay a
directory list that matches the new criteria. Use the following relational
abbreviations and symbols:
Note: Only EQ/= or NE/^= can be entered in the Length, Density and Status
relation fields.
This panel displays in detail the attributes of a selected tape volume. It is the
first in a series of two panels and is displayed by doing the following:
Executing the DSP short command on the Tape Directory Panel (CAYD-
3100)
Additional attributes of this volume are displayed on the other panel in this
series. You can update certain fields on this panel by tabbing to the desired
field and overtyping the information contained there. When you press Enter,
the changes are recorded by the Catalog update facility.
Volser The volume serial number of the currently displayed tape volume.
You can use this field to select another tape volume for display. Type the
name of the desired tape volume in this field and press Enter. The
CA Dynam Catalog is then browsed for that tape volume. If found, it is
displayed. If not, an error message is issued. You cannot create a new tape
volume from this panel.
Clean The maximum number of tape errors to be allowed before the volume is
flagged to be cleaned.
Initialized Date The date on which the tape volume was initialized.
TLMS Serv TLMS ONLY. The status of the volume's service indicator. Service=in is normal
and, therefore, displayed as blank. Only=out will be displayed if the tape is not
in service.
Ext. Status The extended status information of the tape volume, if any.
TLMS Scr TLMS ONLY. The status of the scratch indicator for the volume. A status of
scratch=n will be displayed, indicating an active TLMS volume; otherwise, it is
blank.
Last Cleaned Date The date on which the tape volume was last cleaned.
Last Scratched Date The date on which the tape volume was last scratched.
Re-Initialized Date The date on which the tape volume was reinitialized.
Output Opens The number of output opens for this tape volume.
Input Opens The number of input opens for this tape volume.
I/O Errors The number of INPUT/OUTPUT errors for this tape volume.
Created The information assigned to the tape volume when it was created.
Access The information assigned to the tape volume when it was last accessed.
Date The date the tape volume was created or last accessed.
Time The time the tape volume was created or last accessed.
Job Name The name of the job that created the tape volume or was running when the
tape volume was last accessed.
Job Step The name of job step performed when the tape volume was created or last
accessed.
CPU The ID of the CPU where the volume was created or last accessed.
Part The ID of the partition used when the tape volume was created or last
accessed.
VTAPE Location The location of the virtual volume. This field will be blank if the volume is not a
virtual tape.
Virtape The type of virtual volume. The following values are displayed:
VTAPE File The virtual file name of the volume. This field will be blank if the volume is not
a virtual tape.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
This panel displays one line of information for each data set residing on a
particular tape volume. It is the second in a series of 2 panels and is displayed
by doing the following:
Executing the DAT short command on the Tape Directory Panel (CAYD-
3100)
Volume: MULTI1
File Seq --------------- Data Set Name --------------
00001 MULTI.FILE1
00002 MULTI.FILE2
00003 MULTI.FILE3
00004 MULTI.FILE4
This is a display-only panel. You cannot update any information on this panel
except for the Volume field. Additional attributes of this tape volume are
displayed on the other panel in this series. You can use this panel to do the
following:
Volume The volume serial number of the currently displayed tape volume.
You can use this field to select another tape volume for display. Type the
name of the desired tape volume in this field and press Enter. The CA Dynam
Catalog is then browsed for that tape volume. If found, it is displayed. If not,
an error message is issued. You cannot create a new tape volume from this
panel.
Local Commands
Type any of the following commands on the command line and press Enter to
execute these functions:
SYSIPT may be assigned to a card reader, magnetic tape unit, or DASD, and
must consist of 80-byte records. (For MVS users, the control statements will
be accepted from the operator console if the program is executed with
SYSPARM=CONSOLE, or they may be submitted from either SYSIN or any
sequential or partitioned dataset.)
Output is usually directed to the printer. However, you can use CA Dynam/FI
unit record simulation to direct the output file to disk, as in the example
below.
// DLBL FISYSLS,'OUTPUT.FILE',7,SD,,SYS008
// EXTENT SYS008,SCRTCH,1,0,256,10
// ASSGN SYS008,DISK,VOL=SCRTCH,SHR
// EXEC DYNCAT,SIZE=128K
.
.
Positions:
1 71 72 73 80
+-------------------------------------------------+ +--------+
< operation operands > cc
<*comments >
A blank must separate any complete operand and the continuation mark in
column 72.
For example, for the DEFINE command, DEFine shows that the minimum
specification allowed is DEF, but DEFI, DEFIN, and DEFINE are also
permitted.
Command field must be the first field in a control statement and cannot be
continued. It describes the type of statement.
Operand field must be separated from the command field by at least one
blank character. The operand field consists of one or more parameters
(operands), separated by commas. This field may continue into
subsequent statements, if necessary. Each operand consists of a keyword
(name that identifies the operand type--may be more than one word) and,
optionally, values associated with the operand as follows:
− keyword
− keyword=value
− keyword='literal string'
mm/dd/yy
mm/dd/yyyy
dd/mm/yy
dd/mm/yyyy
yyddd
yyyyddd
All dates in this section are shown in American format (mm/dd/yy), but
will be accepted in European format (dd/mm/yy) if the operating system is
so generated and if DATE(DDMM) is specified in the DYNAM/COMMON
option record.
DYNCAT Functions
DYNCAT performs the functions summarized in the following table:
To Use Command
To Use Command
ACTION CANCEL|NOCANCEL
ERR|NOERR
LOG|NOLOG
ADD Statement Required to manually add a dataset version to the Catalog or to define an
externally owned tape volume.
[AUDIT ]
[,NOCNTRL ]
[,NOTM ]
FIopt=( [,NOTRUNC ] )|NO
[,RELEASE|NORELSE]
[,SB|DB ]
[,SL|UL ]
[,VERIFY ]
GDGLONG= {YES|NO }
[ KEKL1='kekl1,[L|H]' ]
[ KEKL2='kekl2,[L|H]' ]
INDex=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
JOBname='jobname'
LENgth= {XS|S|MS|M|ML|L|NO }
LOCK|UNLOCK
LRECL=nnnnn
MF= {NEW|nnn|NO }
MINDEX=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
NEWPSWD='password'|"
NEXTGEN=nn
NGEN=nnn
NOACC=nnnn
OIMSG= {'text,r'|NO }
OOMSG= {'text,r'|NO }
OPEN= {NORWD|RWD|NO }
OVRfl=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
OWner= {cc|NO }
PASSword='password'
PED=date
PEDCYC=nnn
PERM= {YES|NO }
PRIme=(sequence,volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
RECFM= {F|FB|V|VB|U|NO }
RETain= {nnnn|NO }
SYsid= {cc|NO }
SYSNO={nnn|NO}
TAPE|DISK|FI
[AUTOSCR|NOAUTOSC]
[,DROP|NODROP ]
[,HOLD|NOHOLD ]
TAPEopt=( [,LABEL|NOLABEL ] )|NO
[,MODIFY|NOMODIFY]
[,RELEASE|NORELSE]
[,ROTATE|NOROTATE]
USerid= {cc|NO }
VERsion=nnn|VOLser=(xxxxxx)|GDSid=nn
VLTloc=(A,B,C,...,Z) [VLTSEQ=nnn]
VOLID=cc
WORK= {YES|NO }
ALTer volser
CLean= {nnn|YES }
DENsity= {cccc|NO }
LENgth= {cc|NO }
OWner= {cc|NO }
SCRatch= {YES|NO }
SERvice= {IN|OUT }
BACKUP RECOVER
[,SL|UL ]
[,VERIFY ]
GDGLONG= {YES|NO }
[ KEKL1='kekl1,[L|H]' ]
[ KEKL2='kekl2,[L|H]' ]
INDex=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
LENgth= {XS|S|MS|M|ML|L|NO }
LRECL=nnnnn
MF=AUTO
MINDEX=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
MODEL='data set name'
NGEN=nnn
NOACC=nnnn
OIMSG=('text,r')
OOMSG=('text,r')
OPEN= {NORWD|RWD }
OVRfl=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
OWner={cc|NO}
PASSWORD='password'
PED=date
PEDCYC=nnn
PrevFile='data set name'
PRIme=(sequence,volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
RECFM= {F|FB|V|VB|U }
RETain=nnnn
SYsid=cc
SYSNO={nnn|NO}
TAPE|DISK|FI
[AUTOSCR ]
[,DROP ]
[,HOLD ]
TAPEopt=( [,MODIFY ] )
[,NOLABEL]
[,RELEASE]
[,ROTATE ]
USerid=cc
VLTloc=(A,B,C,...,Z)
VOLID=cc
WORK= {YES|NO }
DEFine SKNAME='skname'
FIELDS=(nnnn,nnnn,format, {A|D }...)
FORMAT= {CH|BI|ZD|PD|FI|FL|CSL
|CTO|CST|CLO|AQ}
LRECL=nnnnn
RECFM= {F|V }
DELETE Statement Required to delete one or all versions of a dataset from the Catalog.
DELete SKNAME='skname'
DELete VOLser=xxxxxx
EXTERNAL= {YES|NO }
DEQUEUE Statement Statement has no operands. Required to dequeue the Catalog if it was left
enqueued by an abended job.
DEQueue
END Statement Statement has no operands. Required statement; must be the last statement.
END
INITIAL DATAsets=nnnnnn
CISIZE=nnnn
id='text'
PASSword='password'
SHARE= {YES|NO|VSELOCK }
SORTkeys=nnnnnn
VOLumes=nnnnnn
INT|INTR unitnumber
CLean=nnn
CUU=cuu1,…
DENsity=cccc
FIRSTVOL=aaannn
LASTVOL=aaannn
LENgth= {XS|S|MS|M|ML|L }
NEW
OWner={cc|NO}
VOLser=(xxxxxx)
LISTcat SKR=['skname'|ALL]
LISTcat VCR|CCR
LISTcat VOL=[volser|ALL]
MACC Statement Required in order to dequeue or to format the CA TLMS and CA Dynam
XSYSTEM M/ACC files.
RESTORE Statement Required to restore the Catalog from a backup tape. Can be issued without
operands.
RESTORE
RESTORE REORG [DATASETS=nnnnnn ]
[ID='text' ]
[MERGE ]
[PASSword='password' ]
[SHARE= {YES|NO|VSELOCK }]
[SORTKEYS=nnnnnn ]
[VOLUMES=nnnnnn ]
SCRatch NODEQ
NOLIST
VAULT= {YES|NO }
SCRPOOL Statement Required to define a pool of scratch tapes or to modify the characteristics of a
scratch tape.
SCRPOOL VOLser=(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...,xxxxxx)
CLean= {nnn|YES }
DENsity= {cccc|NO }
FIRSTVOL=nnnnnn
LASTVOL=nnnnnn
LENgth= {XS|S|MS|M|ML|L|NO }
OWner=cc
STATUS Statement Statement has no operands. Required to display Catalog utilization statistics.
STATUS
VAULT VLTloc=c
DESC='description'
SLOTS=(x1,y1)|DELETE=(x1,y1)
VTOC INITIAL|DELETE
VOLser=xxxxxx
DYNCAT Commands
ACTION Command
Use the ACTION command to describe the processing options that are to be in
effect during this run of DYNCAT. More than one ACTION statement may
appear in the input stream. Only the option(s) specified will be modified. The
rest will remain unchanged. This command does not update the Catalog.
Format
ACTION [ CANCEL|NOCANCEL ]
[ ERR|NOERR ]
[ LOG|NOLOG ]
CANCEL|NOCANCEL Optional parameter. Indicates whether the job will be canceled if an error is
encountered in the input stream.
LOG|NOLOG Optional parameter. Specifies whether each control statement will be logged
on the console as it is processed.
The following example sets the LOG and CANCEL options for the first part of
the run, then changes to NOCANCEL for the remainder of the run. Note that
the ERR option was not affected by either ACTION statement. Also the LOG
option set by the first ACTION statement was not affected by the second
ACTION statement.
ADD Command
Use the ADD command to place tape files under control of CA Dynam/T after
they have been created. You can use the ADD command to add versions to
datasets or volumes to versions that are already in the Catalog file or to define
externally owned tape volumes. You can also use this command to add VTAPE
versions to the Catalog file.
[ PED=date ]
[ PERM= {YES|NO } ]
[ VERsion=nnn ]
[ VLTloc=c ]
[ VTAPLOC=’location’ ]
[ VTAPFILE=’filename_first’ ]
[ VTAPFILC=’filename_last’ ]
'data set name' Required positional parameter. Specifies the dataset to which volumes are to
be added. Valid entries are:
VOLser= Required operand. Specifies the volume serial number(s) to be added to this
dataset. Valid entries are:
NO is the default.
If using APPEND=YES, you may only use the following optional parameters:
DISK, VERSION.
CREate= Optional parameter. Specifies the date on which this file was created. Valid
entry is:
mm/dd/yy
mm/dd/yyyy
dd/mm/yy
dd/mm/yyyy
yyddd
yyyyddd
DISK Optional parameter. Specifies the version added is to be a disk version. If you
are appending volumes (APPEND=YES) to an existing disk version, you must
specify DISK.
EXPdate= Optional parameter. Specifies the date on which this version is to expire. Valid
entries are:
mm/dd/yy
mm/dd/yyyy
dd/mm/yy
dd/mm/yyyy
yyddd
yyyyddd
EXTOwner= Optional parameter. Indicates the owner ID of volumes. Also indicates that
volume(s) being added is externally owned. No other optional parameters may
be used with EXTOwner. The dsn specified will be considered the "last dsn on
volume." A dataset record will not be created for the dataset. Valid entry is:
Specify this parameter when you want to catalog tape volumes "owned" by
another system. CA Dynam/T will consider these volumes uncontrolled.
Information that an external volume is being defined is not passed to the
external system. It is the responsibility of the owning system to maintain its
own volumes. However, information about CA Dynam/VSE-owned volumes is
passed to the other system.
FILE=nn Optional parameter. Specifies the file sequence from the beginning of the
current tape. FILE=nn must be specified for unchained, multifile datasets. If
FILE=nn is specified for a predefined multifile dataset, the file sequence
number must be from the beginning of the multifile set, not from the
beginning of the current tape. FILE=nn is not required when ADDing
predefined multifile dataset versions.
GDSid=nnnnn Optional parameter. Specifies the generation data set ID to be added. Valid
entry is:
If the file is a GDS dataset, you must specify GDSID if adding a new DISK
version.
JOBname= Optional parameter. Specifies the name of the job that created this tape. Valid
entry is:
PED= Optional parameter. Specifies the period-ending or as-of-date for this version
of the dataset. Valid entry is:
If the variable as-of-date facility is to be used, code two asterisks for any or all
of the date fields. DYNCAT will replace the asterisks with the corresponding
fields from the date in the partition COMREG.
For example: If PED=**/31/** was coded on the ADD statement, the date
placed in the Catalog would be 05/31/07 if this job was run during May of
2007. If the job was run during June of 2006, the date placed in the Catalog
would be 06/31/06.
Note that the dates placed in this field are not validated.
PERM= Optional parameter. Indicates whether this version of the dataset is to remain
in the vault specified by the VLTloc parameter.
VERsion= Optional parameter. Specifies the version to be added. Valid entry is:
VLTloc= Optional parameter. Specifies the vault location where this version of the
dataset resides. Valid entry is:
1 alphabetic character
If this parameter is omitted, the vault location defaults to 'A' or to the value
set when the dataset was defined.
VTAPLOC= Optional parameter. Specifies the VTAPE location for the volume being added.
VTAPLOC and VTAPFILE must be specified together. Only one volume may be
specified on the ADD command if the VTAPLOC parameter is specified. Valid
entry is:
VTAPFILE= Optional parameter. Specifies up to the first 200 characters of the VTAPE
file name of the volume being added. VTAPLOC and VTAPFILE must be
specified together. Only one volume may be specified on the ADD command if
the VTAPFILE parameter is specified. Valid entry is:
VTAPFILC= Optional parameter. Specifies the remaining portion of the VTAPE file name if
the name is greater than 200 characters. VTAPFILE must be specified in order
to use this parameter. Valid entry is:
Example
2. This adds the two volumes 7337 and 844 as version 1 of PATRANS with an
expiration date of 6/13/09.
3. This adds volume 4667 as version 1 of SALES INPUT with the variable as-
of-date.
ALTER Command
Use the ALTER command to modify the characteristics of entities defined in the
Catalog. There are three different types of information you can change,
depending on the positional operand you supply.
To modify the characteristics of tape and disk files, use the following
information. If you include a parameter (VERSION, VOLSER, or GDSID) that
uniquely identifies an existing version, only that version of the specified
dataset will be altered. Otherwise, the default characteristics of the dataset
will be altered. (With VERSION, VOLSER, and GDSID, only the following
operands may be included: BLKSZ, CREATE, EXPDATE, JOBNAME,
LOCK/UNLOCK, LRECL, OWNER, PED, PERM, RECFM, SYSID, USERID,
VLTLOC.)
[ ALLoc=(volser,unit,q1,q2,q3,SYSnnn) ]
[ BLKSZ= {nnnnn|OPTimize|'OPT,nnnnn' } ]
[ CATOPEN= {YES|NO } ]
[ CIMSG= {'text,r'|NO } ]
[ CLOSE= {NORWD|RWD|UNL|NO } ]
[ COMment= {'text'|NO } ]
[ COMSG= {'text,r'|NO } ]
[ CREate=date ]
[ DEFvlt=c ]
[ DENsity= {cccc|NO } ]
[ {[A] [,B] [,D] [,E] [,F] [,I] } ]
[ DISKOPT=( {[,K] [,L] [,M] [,N] [,O] [,P] } ) ]
[ {[,S] [,T] [,W] [,X] [,NA] } ]
[ DYNAMFI= {YES|NO } ]
[ EXPdate= {date|RETAIN|PERM|RT+nnn|CD+nnn|NO } ]
[ FILETYPE= {SD|IS|DA } ]
[ [AUDIT ] ]
[ [,NOCNTRL ] ]
[ [,NOTM ] ]
[ FIopt=( [,NOTRUNC ] )|NO ]
[ [,RELEASE|NORELSE] ]
[ [,SB|DB ] ]
[ [,SL|UL ] ]
[ [,VERIFY ] ]
[ GDGLONG= {YES|NO } ]
[ KEKL1='kekl1,[L|H]' ]
[ KEKL2='kekl2,[L|H]' ]
[ INDex=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn) ]
[ JOBname='jobname' ]
[ LENgth= {XS|S|MS|M|ML|L|NO } ]
[ LOCK|UNLOCK ]
[ LRECL=nnnnn ]
[ MF= {NEW|nnn|NO } ]
[ MINDEX=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn) ]
[ NEWPSWD='password'|" ]
[ NEXTGEN=nn ]
[ NGEN=nnn ]
[ NOACC=nnnn ]
[ OIMSG= {'text,r'|NO } ]
[ OOMSG= {'text,r'|NO } ]
[ OPEN= {NORWD|RWD|NO } ]
[ OVRfl=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn) ]
[ OWner= {cc|NO } ]
[ PASSword='password' ]
[ PED=date ]
[ PEDCYC=nnn ]
[ PERM= {YES|NO } ]
[ PRIme=(sequence,volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn) ]
[ RECFM= {F|FB|V|VB|U|NO } ]
[ RETain= {nnnn|NO } ]
[ SYsid= {cc|NO } ]
[ SYSNO={nnn|NO} ]
[ TAPE|DISK|FI ]
[ [AUTOSCR|NOAUTOSC] ]
[ [,DROP|NODROP ] ]
[ [,HOLD|NOHOLD ] ]
[ TAPEopt=( [,LABEL|NOLABEL ] )|NO ]
[ [,MODIFY|NOMODIFY] ]
[ [,RELEASE|NORELSE] ]
[ [,ROTATE|NOROTATE] ]
[ USerid= {cc|NO } ]
[ VERsion=nnn|VOLser=(xxxxxx)|GDSid=nn ]
[ VIRTape={NO|VTAPE|FTAPE} ]
[ VLTloc=(A,B,C,...,Z) [VLTSEQ=nnn] ]
[ VOLID=cc ]
[ WORK= {YES|NO } ]
'data set name' Required positional parameter. Specifies the data set name to be altered. Valid
entry is: a 1- to 44-character data set name enclosed in apostrophes.
ALLoc= ALLoc=(volser,unit,q1,q2,q3,SYSnnn).
SYSnnn logical unit to use for the extent(s) generated if none was
specified in the DTF. None is included if not specified.
BLKSZ= Optional parameter. Specifies the block size for the file to the CA Dynam/FI
component. The DTF for the file will be modified to the value specified. Valid
entries are:
OPTimize, or
'OPT,nnnnn' (include single quotes)
When optimal blocking is specified, CA Dynam/FI will recalculate the block size
for the physical device on which the file is being created. For FBA devices, the
CISIZE is recalculated.
The Catalog is updated when the file is closed for output to record the actual
block size used for the file. When the file is opened for input, CA Dynam/FI
must use this value to build the input DTF correctly.
CATOPEN= Optional parameter. Specifies whether newly opened output versions of this
dataset are to be marked as valid versions so they may be cataloged at OPEN.
This will ensure that the version being created will always be considered a
good version even if it is never closed.
CIMSG= Optional parameter. It changes user-specified messages for the dataset. These
messages will be issued Open Input (OIMSG=), Open Output (OOMSG=),
Close Input (CIMSG=), and/or Close Output (COMSG=) for the dataset, as
specified, and will be directed to the operator console and/or SYSLST as
indicated by the routing code. Routing codes are as follows:
C - Console (default)
P - Printer
B - Both
Example
OIMSG='MY MESSAGE,C'
OOMSG='MY MESSAGE FOR OUTPUT, C,A'
CLOSE= Optional parameter. Changes the DTF rewind option set by CA Dynam/T or
CA Dynam/FI for CLOSE.
COMment= Optional parameter. Changes the comment field associated with this dataset.
Valid entries are:
Note that on some reports the comment from this field will be truncated to
fewer than 100 characters.
CREate= Optional parameter that changes the version creation date in the Catalog.
Valid entry is:
mm/dd/yy
mm/dd/yyyy
dd/mm/yy
dd/mm/yyyy
yyddd
yyyyddd
DEFvlt= Optional parameter. Changes default vault location for any version of dataset
not specified by the VLTLOC parameter. Valid entry is:
DENsity= Optional parameter. Changes the default recording density for this dataset.
Valid entries are:
DISKOPT= Optional parameter. May be used to modify one or more of the processing
options specified for the disk dataset when it is processed under the control of
the CA Dynam/D component. For more information about the effect of each of
the various options, see Defining File ID Option Codes in the chapter "Disk File
Management."
A, B, D, E, F, I, K, L, M, N, O,
P, S, T, W, X, NA NO
EXPdate= Optional parameter. Changes the expiration date for this dataset. Valid entries
are:
mm/dd/yy
mm/dd/yyyy
dd/mm/yy
dd/mm/yyyy
yyddd
yyyyddd
IS for ISAM
RELEASE Releases the logical assignment when the disk or tape file
is closed.
INDex= INDex=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
JOBname= Optional parameter. Changes the creation jobname in the Catalog. Valid entry
is:
KEKL1= Optional parameter. Defines the KEKL1 specification for the dataset. Valid
input is a 1 to 64 character KEKL specification followed by a comma, followed
by a single–character Key Encryption Method. All is enclosed by apostrophes.
Valid Key Encryption Methods are as follows:
Note: You must specify KEKL1 if you want to specify KEKL2. If you don’t
specify KEKL2, then the value of KEKL1 is used for KEKL2.
KEKL2= Optional parameter. Defines the KEKL2 specification for the dataset. Valid
input is a 1 to 64 character KEKL specification followed by a comma, followed
by a single–character Key Encryption Method. All is enclosed by apostrophes.
Valid Key Encryption Methods are as follows:
Note: You can specify KEKL2 only if you have specified KEKL1. If you don’t
specify KEKL2, then the value of KEKL1 is used for KEKL2.
LENgth= Optional parameter. Changes the tape length specification for this dataset.
Valid entries are:
XS extra short
S short
MS medium short
M medium
ML medium long
L long
If the LOCK function is used to LOCK the entire dataset, no new versions will
be cataloged, but existing versions will be available to be used as input. If the
entire dataset has been locked and the dataset is used for output, the output
will not be cataloged and the output tape is changed from SCRATCH to LOCK
status. The next scratch function will return this tape to SCRATCH status.
To unlock the entire dataset for output, specify only the data set name.
LRECL= Optional parameter which specifies the logical record length for the file to the
CA Dynam/FI component. The DTF for the file will be modified to the value
specified. For more information about the effect of this parameter, see the
chapter "Controlling File Independence." Valid entries are:
MF= Optional parameter. Tells CA Dynam/T that the next automatic multifile (AMF)
dataset is to be on a new volume, or is to be reset to a specific number. Valid
entries are:
For more information, see Using Automatic Multifile Datasets in the chapter
"Maintaining Tape Files."
MINDEX= MINDEX=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
NEWPSWD= Optional parameter. Specifies the new password to be used when accessing
this dataset. Valid entries are:
NEXTGEN= Optional parameter. Modifies the next disk generation ID number that is to be
used for CA Dynam/D-controlled disk generation datasets. Valid entry is:
If it is necessary to reset this number to a lower value, the VTOC entries for
the already existing files above this number should be removed from the
DASD devices upon which they reside (with DYNUTIL DELETE). In addition,
remove their associated version records from the Catalog (with DYNCAT
DELETE) before the generation ID is updated with NEXTGEN.
NGEN= Optional parameter. Changes the number of generations to be saved for this
dataset. Valid entries are a 1- to 3-digit number in range 0-999, for TAPE
datasets or DISK datasets.
See the DEFINE command for further discussion of the implications of NGEN
for TAPE and DISK datasets.
NOACC= Optional parameter. Specifies the number of days this dataset version is to be
retained after last access, before it becomes eligible for scratch.
OPEN= Optional parameter that changes the DTF rewind option set by CA Dynam/T or
CA Dynam/FI for OPEN.
OVRfl= OVRfl=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
OWner= Optional parameter. Changes the ownership code for this dataset. Valid entries
are:
a 1- to 2-character code
PASSword= Required if a password has been defined for this dataset. Specifies the
password required to perform maintenance to this dataset. Valid entries are:
PED= Optional parameter. Changes the as-of-date for this dataset or version. Valid
entries are:
Two asterisks may be substituted for any or all of the data fields. When CA
Dynam/T encounters the asterisks, it will replace them with that field from the
job date (temporary COMREG date for VSE user). For example: **/31/**
would be changed to 05/31/00 for each version of the dataset created in May
of 2000.
No validation is done on the eight bytes specified for period ending date. Dates
are normally used, but this field may also be used to store eight bytes of user
information about the version, if desired. If a period ending date field contains
nonblank characters, or a date different from the creation date, the contents
of the field will be printed on applicable reports.
When used for a dataset with PEDCYC=0, the PED field becomes simply a user
comment field associated with each version.
PEDCYC= Optional parameter. Changes the number of versions of this dataset being
retained by period ending date. Valid entry is:
PERM= Optional parameter. Indicates whether the dataset's current vault location is to
be permanent; that is, to be no longer rotated. Valid entries are:
PRIme= PRIme=(sequence,volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
volser Volume serial number upon which the extent resides. May
be either a real, virtual (pool), or generic volser.
unit Unit of allocation for the extent, one of TRK (tracks), CYL
(cylinders), BLK (FBA blocks), RCD (number of records),
or ABS (absolute quantity, indicating fixed extent file).
Applies to sequential files only.
RECFM= Optional parameter. Specifies the record format for the file to the CA
Dynam/FI component. The DTF for the file will be modified to the value
specified.
F Fixed length
FB Fixed Blocked
V Variable length
VB Variable Blocked
U Undefined records
RETain= Optional parameter. Changes the number of days retention used to calculate
the expiration date for this dataset. Valid entries are:
SYsid= Optional parameter. Changes the system ID field for reporting purposes. Valid
entries are:
SYSNO= Optional Parameter. Specifies whether a SYS number override is defined for a
dataset in the catalog. Valid entries are:
TAPE|DISK|FI Optional parameter. Indicates the type of storage medium used for this
dataset. Valid entries are:
TAPE Restricts the dataset to tape use only, under the control
of CA Dynam/T. It is not eligible for dynamic device
switching.
DISK Restricts the dataset to disk use only, under the control
of CA Dynam/D. It is not eligible for dynamic device
switching.
TAPEopt= Optional parameter. Changes the default processing options performed during
open and close by CA Dynam/T. Enclose options in parentheses, separated
with commas or blanks. Valid options are:
RELEASE or NORELSE
Indicates whether this WORK dataset will be scratched at
CLOSE. This parameter is only valid for datasets specified
as WORK=YES.
DROP or NODROP Specifies whether the CA Dynam/T DROP option (to erase
TLBL at file CLOSE) will be in effect.
MODIFY or NOMODIFY
Indicates whether CA Dynam/T will modify the DTF
file name at OPEN.
AUTOSCR or NOAUTOSC
Causes CA Dynam/T to analyze (or not to analyze) this
dataset for versions eligible to be scratched at every
close for output. Valid only for single file tape datasets,
the processing of this option is also dependent upon the
setting of the AUTOSCR parameter in the DYNAM/T
option record. If specified, the CADT064I message will
be issued whenever a version is scratched due to
AUTOSCR.
ROTATE or NOROTATE
Indicates whether CA Dynam/T will process tapes within
this dataset in a cyclical fashion, so that the newest
output version will be written over the oldest version of
the dataset, if the number of versions specified by the
NGEN parameter for the dataset is filled. All expiration
and retention criteria are ignored when rotating. That is,
even if EXPDATE=PERM, the oldest version will be
scratched.
LABEL or NOLABEL
Causes CA Dynam/T to process tapes within this dataset
as labeled or unlabeled.
USerid= Optional parameter. Changes the user ID field. Valid entries are:
VERsion|VOLser|GDSid
VLTloc= Optional parameter used to change the vault location for each version of the
dataset. Valid entry is a 1- to 999-alphabetic characters enclosed in
parentheses and separated by commas. Each character represents a vault
location. Its relative position in the string represents the generation of the
dataset that is to be in that vault. Specify NO to clear.
VLTSEQ= Optional parameter used to specify the starting version for the VLTLOC
parameter. VLTSEQ must be specified sequentially with no gaps in versions.
Valid entries are 1 through 999.
VOLID= Optional parameter. Defines a volume identifier that allows the tape volume to
receive output from the dataset. The volume identifier must match the first
two characters of the volume serial number.
Examples
4. This changes AP DAILY from a work file to one using automatic as-of-date
control and retaining 3 as-of-date versions.
7. This informs the Catalog that the actual location of 'FIXED.FILE' has
changed and now begins on volser SYSRES at track 1938 for 57 tracks.
8, 9, 10. This sets the vault scheme for the first 14 versions of the dataset
VAULT.DSN.
The sort key records are used in conjunction with CA Dynam/FI. For more
information, see the chapter "Controlling File Independence." When modifying
the characteristics of sort key entries, the following operands apply to the
ALTER command.
[ FORMAT= {CH|BI|ZD|PD|FI|FL|CSL|CTO|CST|CLO|AQ } ]
[ RECFM= {F|V } ]
SKNAME='skname' Required positional parameter. Specifies the sort key record which is to be
altered. This parameter is mutually exclusive with the 'data set name' and
volser parameters. Valid entry is:
FIELDS= FIELDS=(s1,l1,t1,m1,s2,l2,t2,m2,. . .)
Required parameter. Specifies the control field information for the sort key
record defined by the SKNAME parameter. Valid entries:
FORMAT= Optional parameter which specifies the format of the data in the sort key
field(s) defined by the SKNAME= parameter. These are the valid data types
acceptable to CA SRAM:
CH Character
BI Binary
ZD Zoned Decimal
PD Packed Decimal
FI Fixed Point
FL Floating Point
RECFM= Optional parameter. Specifies the record format of the records to be sorted
using the sort key information defined by SKNAME. Valid entry is one of the
following:
F Fixed-length records
V Variable-length records
When modifying information about tape volumes, use the following format:
ALTER volser
[ CLean= {nnn|YES } ]
[ DENsity= {cccc|NO } ]
[ LENgth= {cc|NO } ]
[ OWner= {cc|NO } ]
[ SCRatch= {YES|NO } ]
[ SERvice= {IN|OUT } ]
[ COMMENT= {'text', no }]
volser Required positional parameter. Identifies the volume serial number of the tape
whose status is to be changed. This parameter is mutually exclusive with the
'data set name' and SKNAME parameters. Valid entry is:
a 1- to 3-digit number.
YES indicates that the tape has been cleaned, and resets the error counters in
the volume record.
Specify CLEAN=YES if the volume has been cleaned, but not reinitialized.
Comment Optional parameter. Creates or alters a comment field associated with this
volser. Valid entries are:
DENsity= Optional parameter. Specifies the recording density for this tape.
LENgth= Optional parameter. Changes the length specification for this volume.
XS extra short
S short
MS medium short
M medium
ML medium long
L long
A 1- to 2-character code.
SERvice= Optional parameter. Used only if the CA TLMS interface is active. Modifies the
status of the volume's service indicator.
Note that an out-of-service tape is not allowed for output use. If an out-of-
service tape is read as input, the service indicator is automatically changed to
inservice status.
To unchain all the datasets in a predefined multifile set, use the following
format:
UNCHAIN All versions of all files in the multifile dataset will have their file sequence
updated to reflect the file sequence from the beginning of the tape the version
starts on.
UNCHAIN must be the only parameter specified on the ALTER command and it
must be specified for the first file in the predefined multifile dataset.
BACKUP Command
Use the BACKUP command to copy the contents of the CA Dynam Catalog to
tape or disk for security purposes. Use this command also to logically verify
the integrity of the Catalog so that, if an error has occurred, steps may be
taken immediately to correct it. You may run BACKUP with or without the
RECOVER operand.
BACKUP [RECOVER]
[NODEQ ]
To create a normal backup file by using the Catalog directory for optimum
performance, specify BACKUP without an operand.
A tape created using BACKUP and restored using RESTORE may be used by
the audit facility to recover the Catalog. For more information, see the chapter
"Maintaining and Reporting on the Audit Trail."
BACKUP Processing
If the backup file is a controlled dataset, the most current version will not be a
part of the data dumped to the backup file because the file has not yet been
closed. You need to define the backup dataset with CATOPEN=YES so that the
current version will be backed up (because it will be marked as active at open
time).
Perform a BACKUP at least once each day; immediately prior to the SCRATCH
function. It must be performed when all other partitions are idle or, at least,
not running any jobs that use files controlled by the CA Dynam Catalog.
If you suspect any error or problem with the Catalog, you should BACKUP the
Catalog first, before attempting any other recovery. In most cases, running a
BACKUP, RESTORE REORG, and SCRATCH will correct any errors that may
occur. If it is necessary to run BACKUP RECOVER, the file containing the
original BACKUP file that produced the error should be retained for analysis.
SET DYNAMT=OFF
SET DYNAMD=OFF
SET DYNAMFI=OFF
// ASSGN SYS006,CUU
// ASSGN SYS005,SYS006
// TLBL IJSYSBK
// EXEX DYNCAT
BACKUP NODEQ
RESTORE REORG
/*
SET DYNAMT=ON
SET DYNAMD=ON
SET DYNAMFI=ON
Note: To change any extents of the catalog, you must IPL all CPUs.
Reports show the physical count, logical count, and difference between the two
for each record type, as well as the number of blocks of each type on the
backup file. There will always be a difference between the physical and logical
counts for most record types since only the data records (DBRs, VBRs, and so
on) are restored directly; most of the linkage and control records in the
Catalog (DIRs, VIRs, and so on) are rebuilt by RESTORE REORG.
Example
Note: Secondary allocations are not supported for the Backup dataset.
DEFINE Command
Use the DEFINE command to define new entities of various types in the CA
Dynam Catalog. There are two different types of information you can define,
depending on the positional operand you supply:
To define the characteristics of tape and disk files, use the following
information.
[ ALLoc=(volser,unit,q1,q2,q3,SYSnnn) ]
[ BLKSZ= {nnnnn|OPTimize|'OPT,nnnnn' } ]
[ CATOPEN= {YES|NO } ]
[ CIMSG=('text,r') ]
[ CLOSE= {NORWD|RWD|UNL } ]
[ COMment='text' ]
[ COMSG=('text,r') ]
[ DEFvlt=c ]
[ DENsity= {cccc|NO } ]
[ {[A] [,B] [,D] [,E] [,F] [,I] } ]
[ DISKOPT=( {[,K] [,L] [,M] [,N] [,O] [,P] } )]
[ {[,S] [,T] [,W] [,X] [,NA] } ]
[ DYNAMFI= {YES|NO } ]
[ EXPdate= {date|RETAIN|PERM } ]
[ FILETYPE= {SD|IS|DA } ]
[ [AUDIT ] ]
[ [,NOCNTRL ] ]
[ [,NOTM ] ]
[ FIopt=( [,NOTRUNC ] ) ]
[ [,RELEASE|NORELSE] ]
[ [,SB|DB ] ]
[ [,SL|UL ] ]
[ [,VERIFY ] ]
[ GDGLONG={YES|NO } ]
[ KEKL1='kekl1,[L|H]' ]
[ KEKL2='kekl2,[L|H]' ]
[ INDex=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn) ]
[ LENgth= {XS|S|MS|M|ML|L|NO } ]
[ LRECL=nnnnn ]
[ MF=AUTO ]
[ MINDEX=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn) ]
[ NGEN=nnn ]
[ NOACC=nnnn ]
[ OIMSG=('text,r') ]
[ OOMSG=('text,r') ]
[ OPEN= {NORWD|RWD } ]
[ OVRfl=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn) ]
[ OWner={cc|NO} ]
[ PASSword='password' ]
[ PED=date ]
[ PEDCYC=nnn ]
[ PrevFile='data set name' ]
[ PRIme=(sequence,volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn) ]
[ RECFM= {F|FB|V|VB|U } ]
[ RETain=nnnn ]
[ SYsid=cc ]
[ SYSNO={nnn|NO} ]
[ TAPE|DISK|FI ]
[ [AUTOSCR ] ]
[ [,DROP ] ]
[ [,HOLD ] ]
[ TAPEopt=( [,MODIFY ] ) ]
[ [,NOLABEL] ]
[ [,RELEASE] ]
[ [,ROTATE ] ]
[ USerid=cc ]
[ VIRTape={NO|VTAPE|FTAPE} ]
[ VLTloc=(A,B,C,...,Z) ]
[ VOLID=cc ]
[ WORK= {YES|NO } ]
[ MODEL='data set name' ]
'data set name' Required positional parameter. Specifies the dataset to be defined. Valid entry
is 1 to 44 characters enclosed in apostrophes for DISK, TAPE or FI.
ALLoc= ALLoc=(volser,unit,q1,q2,q3,SYSnnn)
SYSnnn logical unit to use for the extent(s) generated if none was
specified in the DTF. The default is none.
The last form of this parameter should only be used when the file being
defined in the Catalog does not contain the block size specified by the
programs that read the file. That is, use it when the block size of the file has
already been changed by CA Dynam/FI and the existing file will be used for
input before it is created using the catalog entry. It is intended to be used
when a catalog entry is deleted from the Catalog and redefined, and the file
already exists with optimal block sizes. The current block size should be
specified as the nnnnn value.
CATOPEN= Optional parameter. Specifies whether newly opened output versions of this
dataset are to be marked as valid versions so they may be cataloged at OPEN.
This will ensure that the version being created will always be considered a
good version even if it is never closed.
CIMSG= Optional parameter. It defines user-specified messages for the dataset. These
messages will be issued Open Input (OIMSG=), Open Output (OOMSG=),
Close Input (CIMSG=), and/or Close Output (COMSG=) for the dataset, as
specified, and will be directed to the operator console and/or SYSLST as
indicated by the routing code. Routing codes are as follows:
C - Console (default)
P - Printer
B - Both
Example
OIMSG='MY MESSAGE,C'
OOMSG='MY MESSAGE FOR OUTPUT, C,A'
CLOSE= Optional parameter that specifies the DTF rewind option set by CA Dynam/T or
CA Dynam/FI for CLOSE.
COMment= Optional parameter. Specifies the comment field to be associated with this
dataset. Valid entries are 1 to 100 alphanumeric characters enclosed in
apostrophes.
Note that, even though up to 100 bytes of comment may be specified, the
comment shown on some reports may be truncated due to space limitations.
DEFvlt= Optional parameter. Defines the default vault location for all versions of the
dataset not specified by VLTLOC parameter. Normally, the default vault
location is A. Valid entry is:
DENsity= Optional parameter. Specifies the recording density for this dataset. Valid
entries are:
A, B, D, E, F, I, K, L, M, N, O,
P, S, T, W, X, NA
EXPdate= Optional parameter. Specifies the expiration date to be used when new
versions of this dataset are created. Valid entries are:
mm/dd/yy
mm/dd/yyyy
dd/mm/yyyy
dd/mm/yy
yyddd
yyyyddd
FILETYPE= Optional parameter. Specifies the type of label record that CA Dynam/D builds
when the disk file is opened. Valid entries are:
IS for ISAM
FIopt= Optional parameter. Specifies processing options for CA Dynam/FI. Note that
some of these options are the same as those that may be specified to CA
Dynam/T. If both CA Dynam/T and CA Dynam/FI are in use, the tape
processing options should be specified to CA Dynam/T where possible. If
conflicting options are specified, unpredictable results may occur. Valid entries
are one or more of the following separated by commas or blanks and enclosed
in parentheses:
INDex= INDex=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
KEKL1= Optional parameter. Defines the KEKL1 specification for the dataset. Valid
input is a 1 to 64 character KEKL specification followed by a comma, followed
by a single–character Key Encryption Method. All is enclosed by apostrophes.
Valid Key Encryption Methods are as follows:
Note: You must specify KEKL1 if you want to specify KEKL2. If you don’t
specify KEKL2, then the value of KEKL1 is used for KEKL2.
KEKL2= Optional parameter. Defines the KEKL2 specification for the dataset. Valid
input is a 1 to 64 character KEKL specification followed by a comma, followed
by a single–character Key Encryption Method. All is enclosed by apostrophes.
Valid Key Encryption Methods are as follows:
Note: You can specify KEKL2 only if you have specified KEKL1. If you don’t
specify KEKL2, then the value of KEKL1 is used for KEKL2.
LENgth= Optional parameter that specifies the size tape to be requested for this
dataset.
XS extra short
S short
MS medium short
M medium
ML medium long
L long
LRECL= Optional parameter. Specifies to CA Dynam/FI the logical record length for the
file. The DTF for the file will be modified. For more information about the effect
of this parameter, see the chapter "Controlling File Independence." Valid entry
is a 1- to 5-digit number in the range 1 to 65535.
MINDEX= MINDEX=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
MODEL= Optional parameter. Copies a dataset definition. The new dataset will be
defined with the same attributes as the specified model dataset. The only valid
entry is a 1- to 44-character data set name, enclosed in apostrophes.
Do not include any other operands when specifying MODEL with the DEFINE
command.
NGEN= Optional parameter. Specifies the number of generations to be saved for this
dataset. For tape files, the number is the minimum number of cycles to be
retained, i.e., the SCRATCH function will never scratch any tapes belonging to
a version less than or equal to this value.
OPEN= Optional parameter. Specifies the DTF rewind option set by CA Dynam/T or CA
Dynam/FI for OPEN.
OVRfl= OVRfl=(volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
OWner= Optional parameter. Specifies the ownership code for this dataset. Valid
entries are:
cc 1 or 2 alphanumeric characters.
1 to 2 alphanumeric characters.
PASSword= Optional parameter. Specifies the password to be associated with this dataset.
If specified, this password will be required by DYNCAT in order to perform
maintenance on this dataset.
For disk datasets, this password will also be required by CA Dynam/D before
allowing access to the dataset. Valid entry is:
You may substitute two asterisks for any or all date fields. When CA Dynam/T
encounters the asterisks, it will replace them with that field from the job date
(temporary COMREG date for VSE users).
For example: **/31/** would be changed to 05/31/00 for each version of the
dataset created in May of 2000.
No validation is done on the eight bytes specified for period ending date. Dates
are normally used, but this field may also be used to store eight bytes of user
information about the version, if desired. If a period ending date field contains
nonblank characters, or a date different from the creation date, the contents
of the field will be printed on applicable reports.
When used for a dataset with PEDCYC=0, the PED field becomes simply a user
comment field associated with each version.
PEDCYC= Optional parameter that specifies the number of versions of this dataset being
retained by period-ending-date control. Valid entry is:
PrevFile= Optional parameter. Specifies the prior file name when defining a multifile tape
dataset. Valid entries are:
PRIme= PRIme=(sequence,volser,unit,q1,q2,SYSnnn)
volser Volume serial number upon which the extent resides. May
be either a real, virtual (pool) or generic volser.
RECFM= Optional parameter. Specifies to CA Dynam/FI the record format for the file.
The DTF for the file will be modified. Valid entries are:
F Fixed-length
FB Fixed-blocked
V Variable-length
VB Variable-blocked
U Undefined
RETain= Optional parameter. Specifies the number of days past the creation date to be
used to calculate the expiration date when new versions are added to this
dataset. Valid entries are:
SYsid= Optional parameter. Specifies the system-ID field that will appear in each
version record. Valid entry is a 2-character ID to be used for reporting
purposes.
SYSNO= Specifies whether a SYS number override is defined for a dataset in the
catalog. Valid entries are:
TAPE|DISK|FI Optional parameter. Identifies the type of data storage medium to be used for
this dataset.
TAPE Restricts the dataset to tape use only, under the control
of CA Dynam/T. It is not eligible for dynamic device
switching.
DISK Restricts the dataset to disk use only, under the control
of CA Dynam/D. It is not eligible for dynamic device
switching.
Note that TAPE, DISK, and FI are mutually exclusive parameters. DYNCAT
ALTER may be used to switch among them for a file, if desired. If you don't
specify an operand for TAPE, DISK, or FI, DYNCAT defaults to the parameter
specified in the DYNAM/COMMON system option record set at installation.
For information about operator device switching, see the chapter "Controlling
File Independence."
TAPEopt= Optional parameter. Specifies the default processing options performed during
OPEN and CLOSE by CA Dynam/T. Enclose options in parentheses, separated
with commas or blanks. Valid options are:
MODIFY Forces the CA Dynam/T 'MODIFY' option (to alter DTF file
name) at OPEN.
Note: These CA Dynam/T options for OPEN and CLOSE are usually specified
on the TLBL, not in the Catalog as dataset attributes. For more information
about the effect of these options, see the chapter "Maintaining Tape Files."
When the first file of a multifile set is reused, all the subsequent files are
scratched. Thus, if a multifile, multivolume set is being rotated, all the
volumes not reused by the first file are returned to the scratch pool and will
not be called when creating the subsequent files of the multifile set.
USerid= Optional parameter that specifies the user ID field which will appear in each
version record. Valid entry is a 2-character ID to be used for reporting
purposes.
VLTloc= Optional parameter. Specifies the vault rotation scheme to be used for
versions of the dataset. Valid entries are 1- to 100-alphabetic characters
enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas. Each character represents
a vault location. Its relative position in the string represents the generation of
the dataset that is to be in that vault.
VOLID= Optional parameter. Defines a volume identifier that allows the tape volume to
receive output from the dataset. The volume identifier must match the first
two characters of the volume serial number.
Examples
8, 9 These define the DASD work files for BG and F1 to be used in conjunction
with the partition- and CPU-independent data set name feature of CA
Dynam/D. The files are to be allocated in the POOL01 pool with a primary
allocation of 57 tracks and up to 3 secondary allocations of 19 tracks each.
10 This defines a sort key record in the Catalog, with a name PAY220KY. The
sort key to be used is as indicated. This information may be used by CA
Dynam/FI for automatic sorting through the CA SRAM interface.
Sort key records are used in conjunction with CA Dynam/FI. For more
information, see the chapter "Controlling File Independence." To define the
characteristics of sort key entries, the following operands apply to the DEFINE
command:
DEFINE SKNAME='skname'
FIELDS=(nnnn,nnnn,format,A|D....)
[ FORMAT= {CH|BI|ZD|PD|FI|FL|CSL|CTO|CST|CLO|AQ } ]
[ RECFM= {F|V } ]
SKNAME='skname' Required positional parameter. Specifies the sort key name record to be
defined. This parameter is mutually exclusive with the 'data set name'
parameter. A valid entry is a 1- to 8-character sort key name.
FIELDS= FIELDS=(s1,l1,t1,m1,s2,l2,t2,m2,. . .)
Required parameter. Specifies the control field information for the sort key
record defined by the SKNAME parameter. Valid entries are:
FORMAT= Optional parameter. Specifies the format of the data in the sort key field(s)
defined by the SKNAME parameter. A valid entry is one of the data types
acceptable to CA SRAM:
CH Character
BI Binary
ZD Zoned Decimal
PD Packed Decimal
FI Fixed Point
FL Floating Point
RECFM= Optional parameter. Specifies to CA Dynam/FI the record format for the file.
Valid entries are:
F Fixed-length
V Variable-length
The default is F.
Example
DELETE Command
Use the DELETE command to remove records from the Catalog. The following
types of records may be removed, each type achieving different results:
entire datasets
Deleting a version of a dataset will result in all of its associated tape volumes
being returned to SCRATCH status.
You can control the scope of record deletion by using one of the following
positional operands:
[PASSword='password'] [PURGE]
[PERmvlt= {YES|NO } ]
'data set name' Required positional parameter. Specifies the data set name or dataset version
that is to be deleted. A valid entry is 1 to 44 characters enclosed in
apostrophes.
PASSword= Required if dataset has a password. Specifies the password required to delete
this dataset or a version of the dataset. A valid entry is 1 to 8 alphabetic
characters enclosed in apostrophes.
PERmvlt= Specify YES if the version to be deleted resides in a permanent vault (ALTERed
by PERM=YES).
PURGE Specify PURGE to delete a file or files from a DASD volume. The disk file or
files deleted will be those which are associated with the version records
selected for deletion by a
DELETE SKNAME='skname'
SKNAME= Optional parameter. Indicates that the named sort key record is to be deleted.
A valid entry is 1- to 8-character sort key name enclosed in apostrophes.
VOLser= Required parameter, mutually exclusive with 'data set name'. Specifies the
volume serial number record to be completely deleted from the Catalog for a
tape volume currently in SCRATCH status. A valid entry is a 1- to 6-character
volume serial number.
EXTERNAL= Optional parameter. Indicates whether volume is externally owned; that is,
whether it is owned by another system. If you want to delete an externally
owned volume, you must specify EXTERNAL=YES.
Example
An example follows:
1 This scratches the volume that contains Version 3 of dataset OLD TRANS.
The volume serial number is unknown.
2 This deletes the version of 'SORTED AR' on volume 1766, and returns
1766 to SCRATCH status. If the 'SORTED AR' version contains multiple
volumes, all will be scratched.
4 This deletes the dataset TEST FILE from the Catalog and returns all of the
tapes associated to the scratch pool.
DEQUEUE Command
Example
An example follows:
The above job stream could be used to unlock the Catalog file.
END Command
Example
An example follows:
INITIAL Command
INITIAL [ CISIZE=nnnn ]
[ DATAsets=nnnnnn ]
[ id='text' ]
[ PASSword='password' ]
[ SHARE= {YES|NO|VSELOCK } ]
[ SORTkeys=nnnnnn ]
[ VOLumes=nnnnnn ]
CISIZE= Optional parameter. Specifies the control interval size for the Catalog being
initialized. This value should be chosen to optimize track utilization on the
DASD device where the Catalog will reside. The value must be a whole number
multiple of 1024; valid entries are 1024, 2048, 3072, or 4096.
DATAsets= Optional parameter. Specifies the number of datasets that the Catalog will
contain. This value should be chosen carefully since it helps determine the
amount of space in the Catalog reserved for index area. A valid entry is a 1- to
6-digit number. The default is 250.
ID= Optional parameter. Establishes a Catalog owner ID for all tapes associated
with a particular CA Dynam Catalog. The owner ID is placed in the VOL1 label
of the tapes belonging to the Catalog. Any tape that does not have a matching
owner ID will not be recognized during AVR if catalog checking is specified in
the DYNAM/T option record. A valid entry is 1 to 16 characters enclosed in
apostrophes.
Once all tapes have the owner ID in the VOL1 label, the checking feature may
be turned on by specifying CATCHK(YES) in the DYNAM/T option record. If no
ID is specified, a default of CA Dynam/T will be used.
PASSword= Optional parameter. Specifies the required password to display the passwords
for password-protected datasets. A valid entry is 1 to 8 characters enclosed in
apostrophes.
Important! The Catalog password does not appear on any report and cannot
be changed without reorganizing the Catalog; make sure to remember the
password.
SHARE= Optional parameter. Indicates whether the Catalog file will be shared by
multiple systems. Valid entries are:
SORTkeys= Optional parameter. Specifies the number of sort key records that the Catalog
will contain. This value should be chosen carefully since it helps determine the
amount of space in the Catalog reserved for index area. A valid entry is a 1- to
6-digit number. The default is zero.
VOLumes= Optional parameter. Specifies the number of volume serial numbers that the
Catalog will contain. This value should be chosen carefully since it helps
determine the amount of space in the Catalog reserved for index area. A valid
entry is a 1- to 6-digit number. The default is 1000.
Example
An example follows:
The above example will initialize the CA Dynam Catalog to be used on a single
CPU. Space for 200 datasets is to be reserved in the index area, and the
Catalog owner and password are specified.
Note: When initializing a Catalog, the initializing system and all sharing
systems should be in a quiesced state, otherwise unpredictable results may
occur.
To prevent the accidental destruction of the Catalog file, the following console
message is issued:
If the response is YES, the Catalog file is formatted. When the job has
completed, the Catalog will be ready for use. If an existing Catalog is
reinitialized, any existing entries are destroyed.
Use the INT command to initialize (and unload) a tape as a CA Dynam/T tape.
These tapes will contain standard labels and are marked as CA Dynam/T
initialized tapes. The INTR command is identical to the INT function except
that the tape is not unloaded, but rewound after being initialized.
INT|INTR unitnumber
[ CLean=nnn ]
[ CUU=(cuu1,cuu2,...,cuu16) ]
[ DENsity=cccc ]
[ FIRSTvol=xxxnnn ]
[ LASTvol=xxxnnn ]
[ LENgth= {XS|S|MS|M|ML|L } ]
[ NEW ]
[ OWner={cc|NO} ]
[ VOLser=xxxxxx ]
unitnumber Required parameter. Specifies the logical or physical unit number of the device
where the tape to be initialized resides. Valid entries are:
a 1- to 3-digit number.
CUU= Optional parameter. Allows the initialization of multiple tapes starting with
cuu1 up to cuu16. FIRST and LAST volumes must be specified with CUU=.
DENsity= Optional parameter. Specifies the recording density for this tape. Valid entries
are:
LENgth= Optional parameter. Specifies the length of this tape. Valid entries are:
XS Extra short
S Short
MS Medium short
M Medium
ML Medium long
L Long
NEW Optional keyword parameter. Specifies that the tape to be initialized is a new
tape. Causes CA Dynam/T to immediately write a VOL1/HDR1 on the tape
without attempting to read the tape to determine if it contains valid data, since
to do so would result in an I/O error if the tape has never been initialized. Use
this parameter carefully.
OWner= Optional parameter. Specifies the tape ownership code to be assigned to this
tape. If selected, this tape may only be used for datasets with matching
ownership codes. A valid entries are:
cc 1 to 2 alphanumeric characters.
VOLser= Optional parameter. Specifies the volume serial number to be written on the
tape and placed in the Catalog. A valid entry is a 1- to 6-character volume
serial number (may be enclosed in parentheses), consisting of letters and
numbers ONLY no special characters allowed.
VOLSER numbers that are not acceptable are ACCEPT, CANCEL, all zeroes
(000000) and all blanks.
If this parameter is not specified, the tape is read to determine its volume
serial number, and the operator is prompted to verify the accuracy of the
VOLSER found.
1 The tape on drive 280(SYS006) is initialized with the volume serial number
011256. It is flagged for cleaning after 100 tape errors. It is initialized at
1600 BPI and is a long tape.
2 This initializes the tape on 281 with the volume serial number 718. It will
not have a tape error threshold or a length code, and it will be initialized
with the recording density set in the VSE supervisor for this tape drive.
LISTCAT Command
Use the LISTCAT command to report upon each of the various entries in the
Catalog, either individually or as a whole. LISTCAT requires no external work
area and does not enqueue the Catalog while accessing it. A separate LISTCAT
command must be submitted for each type of record to be reported upon.
For more information about sample reports produced by using the LISTCAT
command, see the chapter "CA Dynam Report Example."
'data set name' Optional parameter. Specifies the dataset to be reported on. Valid entries are:
TAPE|DISK|ALL Optional qualifier. Identifies the generic group of datasets to be reported upon.
SKR= Optional parameter. Specifies the sort key record to be reported upon, or if
used with the qualifier ALL, specifies that a generic group of sort key records is
to be reported upon. The listing will be presented in alphanumeric sequence.
Valid entries are:
the first n characters of a group of sort key names (for generic report if
qualified by ALL).
Example
An example follows:
1 This displays all Catalog-controlled disk datasets whose data set names
begin with 'PAY'.
2 This displays all Catalog-controlled tape datasets whose data set names
begin with 'TRAN'.
MACC Command
MACC {DEQUEUE[DDNAME=ddname]|INITIAL[DDNAME=ddname] }
DDNAME= Optional parameter. Indicates the ddname for the MACC file. Valid entry is 1 to
7 alphanumeric characters, the first of which must be alphabetic.
The default is CAIMACC. You must use CAIMACC for the CA TLMS interface.
Use a ddname other than CAIMACC for cross-system MACC files.
Example
MCAT Command
Note:
MCAT and MCATAL cannot be used with multifile datasets including AMF
and unchained datasets (STACK=).
The MCAT and MCATAL commands perform the same function, but MCAT is the
preferred command. The MCATAL command allows for easier conversion from
CA EPAT.
FROMDSN= Required, positional parameter. Specifies the dataset to which the original
version belongs. This dataset must currently exist in the catalog.
TODSN= Required, positional parameter. Specifies the name of the dataset into which
the version is to be cataloged. This dataset must currently exist in the catalog.
FROMVERS= Optional parameter. Indicates the version to be copied into the TODSN
dataset. The default is version 1.
PASSWORD Required if a password has been defined for the from DSN. Valid entries are 1-
8 alphabetic characters enclosed in apostrophes.
Example
// JOB MCAT
// EXEC DYNCAT,SIZE=128K
MCAT FROMDSN='PAYROLL' FROMVERS=2 TODSN='TEST.PAYROLL'
/*
/&
// JOB MCATAL
// EXEC DYNCAT,SIZE=128K
MCATAL FROMDSN=ARJNDLY,TODSN=ARJNWKLY
MCATAL FROMDSN=ARJNWKLY.(-3),TODSN=ARJNMTH
MCATAL FROMDSN=KPS7063.G207,TODSN=KPSSAVE
/*
/&
OWN Command
Use the OWN command to establish or change the Catalog ownership code.
ID= Required parameter. Specifies the ownership code to be associated with this
Catalog. Valid entry is a 1- to 16-character ownership code enclosed in
apostrophes.
Example
RENAME Command
OLDNAME= Required parameter. Specifies the dataset to be renamed. Valid entry is:
NEWNAME= Required parameter. Specifies the new data set name. Valid entry is:
Note:
When renaming all the versions of a dataset (ALL operand), the 'new data
set name' must not already exist in the Catalog.
PASSWORD= Required parameter if old name DSN was defined with a password. Valid
entries are:
ALL Optional parameter. Specifies that all versions of the old dataset be renamed.
NEWVERS, OLDVERS and VOLSER must not be present when ALL is specified.
The data set name specified by NEWNAME must not exist in the Catalog when
the ALL operand is used.
When ALL is specified, the name of the entire dataset is changed. If not, a
version is moved from one dataset to another.
MF=RESET Optional parameter. Automatically resets the prototype record of the AMF
dataset to indicate 001 as the next output data set name to be used as file one
of the tape to be created. Renames all existing members of the AMF group to a
new name, as specified by the NEWNAME parameter.
When MF=RESET is used, the data set names specified for both OLDNAME and
NEWNAME must contain three asterisks (***) identifying the position for the
numeric AMF numbers in the old and new data set names.
NEWVERS= Optional parameter. Specifies the new version number to be assigned to the
renamed version. Valid entry is:
VOLser= Optional parameter. Specifies the volume serial number of the first or only
volume of the dataset to be renamed. VOLSER and OLDVERS are mutually
exclusive. Valid entry is a 1- to 6-character volume serial number. (May be
enclosed in parentheses.)
Examples
Examples follow:
1 This renames dataset DSN1to DSN2. The relative generations remain the
same under the new name.
3 This specifies that the version of DSN5, of which volume 7528is the first or
only volume, is to be renamed to DSN6 Version 7.
RESTORE Command
Use the RESTORE command to recover the CA Dynam Catalog from the
backup file created by the BACKUP function. This may be done in two different
ways:
The RESTORE function reads the file using the file name IJSYSBK. The logical
unit used is SYS005.
If you do not specify any operands for the RESTORE command, the restored
Catalog will be physically identical to the backup copy created through the
BACKUP command. This function may be used to move the Catalog from one
device type to another, or from one extent to another. If the Catalog is
destroyed due to disk I/O failure, this physical restore may be used in
conjunction with the Audit Trail facility Catalog recovery feature to
automatically bring the Catalog up-to-date.
The physical RESTORE function runs very quickly since no analysis of the file
need be done. The Catalog need not be initialized before the physical restore is
performed since the records are restored exactly as they previously had
existed.
Note: The physical RESTORE function may be used to enlarge the Catalog,
change the extents of the Catalog, move the Catalog to a different device
type, or restore the Catalog to its previous location. It may not be used to
change Catalog characteristics as specified when the Catalog was initialized.
If you specify the RESTORE command and the REORG operand, DYNCAT both
restores and logically reorganizes the Catalog from the tape copy produced by
the BACKUP function. This tape contains sufficient information to perform
either function.
Unlike the physical RESTORE function, the RESTORE REORG function allows
the user to modify the characteristics of the Catalog as originally established
through the INITIAL command and to MERGE one Catalog into another.
If you inadvertently specify options with RESTORE, but do not specify REORG,
the options are ignored and a RESTORE is done as if no operands were
supplied.
CISIZE= Optional parameter. Specifies the control interval size for the Catalog being
initialized. This value should be chosen to optimize track utilization on the
DASD device where the Catalog will reside. The value must be a whole number
multiple of 1024; valid entries are 1024, 2048, 3072, or 4096.
MERGE Optional operand. Causes RESTORE REORG to skip the Catalog initialization
phase and simply merge the contents of the input tape into the existing
Catalog as found. May be used to merge two existing CA Dynam Catalogs.
Note: Duplicate data set name entries are not resolved during a MERGE
function. If a data set name on the MERGE tape already exists in the Catalog,
its versions will just be added as the first ones to the dataset in the Catalog.
Example
In the following example, the Catalog will be restored and reorganized, and
the password will be changed to 'SECURITY'.
Note: You may use RESTORE REORG to increase or decrease the size of the
Catalog to a different extent, device, or device type, modify Catalog
characteristics, improve access performance, and correct any Catalog errors
which may have been noted on the BACKUP function.
In most cases where a problem with the Catalog is indicated, recovery from
audit is not necessary. The RESTORE REORG function was designed in part to
diagnose and correct Catalog errors. If an error is suspected, you should run a
BACKUP and RESTORE REORG, followed by a SCRATCH function. If the
sequence completes successfully, the integrity of the Catalog can be assured.
If you attempt a RESTORE REORG which would result in changing the SHARE
option of the Catalog from SHARE=YES or SHARE=VSELOCK, to SHARE=NO, a
message will be issued warning you that this is being done.
SCRATCH Command
Use the SCRATCH command to return eligible tapes to the scratch pool and
perform internal housekeeping in the Catalog. It should be run at least once
per day. Remember to always perform a BACKUP immediately prior to
performing the SCRATCH.
If you specify the SCRATCH command without any operands, DYNCAT will
produce a group of dataset reports as a by-product. It will also periodically
dequeue the Catalog and wait for a short interval to allow concurrent
processing in other partitions and CPUs to continue. SCRATCH needs a work
file to perform its functions.
For more information about sample reports produced using the SCRATCH
command, see the chapter "CA Dynam Report Examples."
SCRATCH [ NODEQ ]
[ NOLIST ]
[ VAULT= {YES|NO } ]
NODEQ Optional operand. Eliminates periodic dequeues during the SCRATCH run.
Catalog buffers need not be refreshed, thereby shortening the run time.
Note, however, that if NODEQ is specified, almost all other tasks that share
the Catalog or Audit files can be expected to wait until SCRATCH is complete.
NOLIST Optional operand. Creates only SCRATCH tape listings -- not regular dataset
reports.
Tapes that have exceeded all retention criteria -- that is, tapes whose
cycle retention and/or date retention and/or as-of-date cycle retention has
passed.
All tapes created under data set names locked for output.
All tapes opened for output, but never closed, which have been open
longer than the number of hours specified in the DYNAM/T option record.
The default is 8 hours.
All work tapes not released by TLBL or Catalog option that have exceeded
the standard work tape retention.
Exceptions encountered.
For more information about the report format and report fields, see Utility
Reporting Program - TDYNUTL in the chapter "Supporting Tape File
Management."
Example
An example follows:
SCRPOOL Command
Use the SCRPOOL command to define scratch tapes in the CA Dynam Catalog
without initializing the tapes. Characteristics of existing SCRATCH volumes
may also be modified by the SCRPOOL command.
SCRPOOL VOLser=(xxxxxx,xxxxxx,...,xxxxxx)
[ CLean= {nnn|YES } ]
[ DENsity= {cccc|NO } ]
[ FIRSTVOL=nnnnn ]
[ LASTVOL=nnnnn ]
[ LENgth= {XS|S|MS|M|ML|L|NO } ]
[ OWner=cc ]
[ VIRTape={NO|VTAPE|FTAPE} ]
[ VTAPFILE='location' ]
[ VTAPLOC='filename' ]
VOLser= Required parameter. Specifies the volume serial numbers to be added to the
Catalog or modified. Valid entries are 1- to 6-character volume serial numbers
enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas.
a 1- to 3-digit number.
YES - indicates that the tape has been cleaned and resets the error counters in
the volume record. The CLEAN threshold is not modified.
CLEAN=YES should be specified if the volume has been cleaned without having
been reinitialized.
DENsity= Optional parameter. Specifies the recording density for this tape. Valid entries
are:
LENgth= Optional parameter. Specifies the length of this tape. Valid entries are:
XS Extra short
S Short
MS Medium short
M Medium
ML Medium long
L Long
OWner= Optional parameter. Specifies the tape ownership code to be assigned to this
tape. If selected, this tape may only be used for datasets with matching
ownership codes. Valid entry is a 1- or 2-character ownership code.
VIRTape= Optional parameter. Specifies whether the tape will be defined as a virtual
scratch tape. This parameter is mutually exclusive with the VTAPLOC and
VTAPFILE parameters. If this parameter is specified and the tape currently has
associated virtual tape information, that information will be removed from the
catalog.
VTAPFILE= Optional parameter. Specifies the virtual file name. This parameter is mutually
exclusive with the VIRTAPE parameter. The virtual file name must be enclosed
in apostrophes and contain the literal 'VOLSER', which will be automatically
replaced with the volser of the virtual tape being opened. If this parameter is
specified, VTAPLOC must also be specified.
For example,
VTAPFILE='VOLSER'
VTAPFILE='C:\VTAPE\VOLSER.AWS'
VTAPFILE='FAKETAPE.FILE.VOLSER'
VTAPLOC= Optional parameter. Specifies that the tape will be defined as a virtual scratch
tape. This parameter is mutually exclusive with the VIRTAPE parameter. If this
parameter is specified, VTAPFILE must also be specified. The following
operands must be enclosed in apostrophes.
Example
The following example places three volume serial numbers in the Catalog.
Each one is to be flagged for cleaning after 50 tape errors. They are long tapes
and are to be written at 6250 BPI.
STATUS Command
Use the STATUS command to display the current Catalog file utilization
statistics on SYSLST.
Number of:
Percentage of:
− All space in the Catalog used when Catalog was most full
Example
An example follows:
VAULT Command
Use the VAULT command to establish or delete vault descriptions for any or all
vaults to be used. You may also assign or delete storage slots to be used for a
particular vault location. These descriptions are used for reporting purposes
only.
DESC= Optional parameter. Provides or deletes the description of the vault location
identified in VLTloc. Valid entries are:
SLOTS=(x1,y1), DELETE=(x1,y1)
Optional parameters. Assigns or deletes ranges of slot numbers for the
identified vault.
Example
An example follows:
1 This establishes a description for the tape library itself. Note that vault A is
always the tape library.
VTOC Command
Use the VTOC command to create and delete the VTOC indexes used by the
CA Dynam/D VTOC Management. Each VTOC index is a small disk file
containing an index to the entries in the unmodified VTOC for the device.
These files have a standard name of 'DYNAM.VTOC.INDEX'.
VOLser= Required parameter. Indicates the DASD device upon which the VTOC index is
to built or from which the VTOC index is to be removed. Valid entry is a 1- to
6-character volume serial number.
The DELETE function disables CA Dynam-indexed VTOC support for the volume
and removes the index file.
The BLDIX function will rebuild a VTOC index on a particular volume. This
function can only be run if a VTOC index exists on the volume prior to running
the BLDIX function. BLDIX is useful because expired files are deleted. This
function is not mandatory because indexes are automatically rebuilt. For more
information, see Deleting Expired Files in the chapter “Disk File Management.”
The INITIAL, DELETE, and BLDIX functions require that the label information
for the index files be available. We recommend that these labels be placed in
standard labels for ease of reference. CA Dynam/D may not be used to
allocate the VTOC index files. When the INITIAL function creates the files, they
are created with the standard file ID as shown, and with an expiration date of
2099/366.
We recommend that they be made data-secured files also. These files must
never be deleted except with the DYNCAT VTOC DELETE function, or the
results will be unpredictable.
Example
The following jobstream builds CA Dynam VTOC indexes on each of the three
DASD volumes: SYSWK1, 335001, and 337501. Note that the file ID and
expiration date are included in the DLBLs for the three files for documentation
purposes. These labels should be included in standard labels for the same
reason.
When initializing a VTOC index with the DYNCAT VTOC function, a label must
be supplied to specify the extent to be used for the VTOC index. The dtfname
used is the same as the volser on which the VTOC index is to be built. If the
first character of the volser is numeric, the dtfname is not valid. The character
'V' may be inserted prior to the volser as the dtfname for the VTOC index
label. For example, for volser = "335000", use "// DLBL V335000,'...". Six-
character dtfnames with a nonnumeric first character are valid.
Once initialized, the VTOC index will be rebuilt at each IPL, or at about 8:00
a.m. each morning automatically. The IXVOPTS macro may be used to change
the time at which the index is automatically rebuilt.
The VTOC INITIAL function results in the automatic deletion of all expired files
created using CA Dynam/D, which are found on the volume, in order to further
improve performance.
If you wish to retain expired files that currently exist, use the DYNUTIL ALTER
command to modify the expiration date of the file before running VTOC
INITIAL. Only expired files created using CA Dynam/D will be so deleted. Other
expired files will be retained until explicitly deleted by the user.
General Reporting−DYNPRINT
DYNPRINT is the CA Dynam family reporting utility supplied with r5.5 and
above. It lets you report on the CA Dynam Catalog and disk VTOCs. Through
its simple report control language, you can invoke standard reports as well as
compile and execute custom reports.
For more information, see CA Earl Generation Macro in the CA Earl Systems
Programmer Guide for details.
Access Methods DYNACC, the Catalog access method used by DYNREAD, includes sequential
processing of the entire Catalog, generic key retrievals, get-next generation
and get-next file capabilities. For more information about DYNACC processing,
see the chapter "Accessing The Catalog."
VTOCAC, the VTOC access method used by DYNREAD, has been supplied to
support read-only shared access (through DYNREAD for CA Earl programs) to
information contained in the VTOCs of all volumes available on your system.
There are three types of control statements: ACCESS, REPORT, and COMPILE.
To Use
Each keyword or value must be wholly contained on one line do not split
an individual keyword, or a value, between lines.
ACCESS Command
The ACCESS command defines the data source for the report. It selects the
access method, such as DYNACC or VTOCAC.
ACCESS {CATALOG|VTOC }
The only difference between the effect of a COMPILE statement and a REPORT
statement is that COMPILE calls an inline CA Earl compilation prior to
executing the report program.
report-name Required parameter. Specifies the report to be invoked. This name is used by
DYNPRINT to derive the name of the report program to invoke and to establish
the default characteristics of the report.
For standard reports, refer to the report documentation for the name and
applicable options. For custom reports, either compiled inline or saved from a
previous compilation, the name is CUSTOMnn, where n is a number between
zero and 99. The associated program name is CUSnn.
By default, all CATALOG custom reports process all data sets in the Catalog in
DSN sequence and all VTOC custom reports process all extents for all data set
names defined in all available VTOCs on the execution system.
BANNER=OFF Optional parameter. Suppresses the DYNPRINT banner for this report.
CATNM=dtfname Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports. Specifies the dtfname for
the Catalog. Defaults to CAICATL.
CBUFN=nnnn Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports. Specifies the number of
Catalog buffers, in a range 3-9999 (defaults to 12).
DSN=dsn Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports. Specifies a specific data
set name to be reported on. May be specified as a generic key, with an '*'
immediately after the last significant character in the name.
DVC= {D|T|F } Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports. Specifies a device class
filter to be placed on the data sets and generations to be reported in certain
reports. Defaults to all data sets.
EROPT=D Optional parameter. Causes the access method to generate snap dumps of
selected data areas for certain types of errors. Operation is access method
dependent. This option is intended for debugging.
FSQ=nnnn Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports on multifile tapes. Selects
the file sequence number of the data set version to be retrieved.
GDG=xxxxxxxx Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports. Specifies the generation
of the data set to be reported on, based upon the OS generation data group
identifier of the generation.
GEN=nnn Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports. Specifies the version of
the data set to be reported on, based on the CA Dynam/D generation number.
PSW=xxxxxxxx Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports, is the Catalog or data set
password which enables reporting of password-protected data sets.
REQ=xx Optional parameter. Specifies the initial request code to be passed to the
access method. Overrides the default request code for the report. Access
method dependent. Usually only used for custom reports.
SELECT= {option[,option..] }
VER=nnn Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reports. Identifies the version
number of the data set to be reported on.
VOL=xxxxxx Optional parameter; for CATALOG reports, identifies the volser or generic
volser to be reported on. For VTOC reports, identifies the volser, generic volser
or CA Dynam/D pool to be reported on. For either type, a generic key value
may be specified by following the last significant character in the volser by an
asterisk.
VSQ=nnnn Optional parameter; valid only for CATALOG reporting on multivolume data
sets. Specifies the volume sequence number of the volume to be reported on.
Selection parameters are optional. If you supply any, each one must contain a
keyword followed by an appropriate numeric or alphanumeric value. If you
omit them, defaults are used to determine the data to be retrieved.
Parameters are dependent on the report specified.
Report Types
Basically, there are six different standard reports currently supplied with CA
Dynam. They are divided into catalog-based or VTOC-based report classes.
Catalog-based reports are further subdivided into DSN-entry reports and VOL-
entry reports.
DSN-entry reports access the Catalog sequentially by data set name, and can,
by extension, report on series of the following:
Report Descriptions
ACTVFILE Lists information about active generations and versions of disk and tape files.
Provides reports in volser, DSN, owner, user-id or system-id order. Data is
retrieved from the Catalog in DSN sequence.
FILEDEFS Reports information about data sets defined in the Catalog. The reports may
display retention data, messages, data set specifications, multifile organization
and others. Data is retrieved from the Catalog in DSN sequence.
FREQUSE Highlights the frequency of use of files on both disk and tape. Reports may be
produced in DSN, days-old, days-unused or average-opens-day sequence.
Data is retrieved from the Catalog in DSN sequence.
For more information about TAPES, see the chapter "Supporting Tape File
Management." For more information about SPACEUSE and VTOCS, see the
chapter "Supporting Disk File Management."
SPACEUSE Highlights the relative efficiency with which disk space is being used. Helps
optimize space utilization and system performance by identifying badly
blocked or allocated files. Data is retrieved from system VTOCs in VTOC
sequence by volume.
TAPES Lists information about data sets on tape. Provides reports of active tapes,
scratch tapes or all tapes. Data is retrieved from the Catalog in volser
sequence.
VTOCS Reports information about disk occupancy. Data may relate to all mounted
volumes, to all volumes in a pool, to generic volumes or to a specific real
volume. One scan of all selected VTOCs can produce multiple reports. Data is
retrieved from system VTOCs in VTOC sequence by volume.
To compile and link a new or customized report program, you may either use
the CA Earl compiler directly or to go through the COMPILE feature of
DYNPRINT. To compile and execute in one step, you must use the COMPILE
feature. DYNPRINT invokes the CA Earl compiler and then executes the
resulting object program, assuming no serious errors are detected by the
compiler.
The CA Earl source programs used to generate the standard report programs
are supplied with DYNPRINT, and can be found on the DYNPRINT library with a
member type of '0' (zero). The source members have the same name as the
object members.
To customize a report, you must update the source book, either with the
existing or a new name. The updated source member could then be compiled
with the CA Earl compiler, linkage edited and cataloged into the execution
library. The program in the execution library must have a name that is known
to DYNPRINT (such as CUS01 or DYNAF) and correspond to an existing report
name keyword (such as CUSTOM01 or ACTVFILE).
Once a phase named CUSnn has been cataloged into a library in the DYNPRINT
phase search chain, that report program may be invoked by the REPORT
command using the CUSTOMnn report-name keyword.
You can make use of the SELECT option in any custom report. The SELECT
keyword values defined for all custom reports are:
REPORT1 15 1
REPORT2 14 2
REPORT3 13 4
REPORT4 12 8
REPORT5 11 16
REPORT6 10 32
REPORT7 9 64
REPORT8 8 128
To compile and execute the updated program under the control of DYNPRINT,
replace the REPORT command with COMPILE. In all other respects the
DYNPRINT syntax is identical. The source program must then be included or
copied into the job stream immediately following the /* that terminates the
DYNPRINT control statement stream. The DYNPRINT library must be in the
source search list when DYNPRINT is executed and the COMPILE facility is used
and the CA Earl source deck contains a COPY statement.
Example
// EXEC DYNPRINT,SIZE=256K
COMPILE CUSTOM01 REQ=SV
/*
USER 'CA INTERNATIONAL, INC' !Top Report Heading
CAICATL: FILE DYNREAD 300 RECORD=3232 !Identifies the Catalog
DEFINE INFOREC 1-3232 X !Defines the function PLIST
COPY DYNINFOE USING INFOREC !Copies data definition
SET DYNRQLEN = DYNINFLN
GET CAICATL
GOTO EOJ CAICATL = 'E'
REPORT 'READ/WRITE ERRORS BY VOLUME' !Report # 1
SELECT DYNRTCOD = 0 AND ! Only successful retrieves
DYGCDVCL = 'TAPE ' ! Only want tapes, not disks
PRINT DYVVOL DYVSTAT DYGCCUU (DYVOOPNS) (DYVOERRS) (DYVIOPNS)
(DYVIERRS) DYVDRINT DYVTCLN DYVDCLN DYVADAT DYVREELS DYVMODE2
REPORT 'ERRORS BY CUU'
SELECT DYNRTCOD = 0 AND ! Only successful retrieves
DYGCDVCL = 'TAPE ' AND ! Only want tapes, not disks
(DYVOERRS > 0 OR DYVIERRS > 0) ! Volumes with errors
CONTROL DYGCCUU DYVOERRS DOWN DYVIERRS DOWN
PRINT DYGCCUU (DYVOOPNS) (DYVOERRS) (DYVIOPNS) (DYVIERRS) DYVDRINT
DYVTCLN DYVDCLN DYVADAT DYVREELS DYVMODE2 DYVVOL DYVSTAT
END
/*
/&
The library into which DYNPRINT is installed must be in the phase search chain
at execution time. To run reports that access the VTOCs, CA Dynam/D must
be active and enabled. If you want to compile CA Earl Catalog reporting
programs, the installation library must be in the source search chain also.
DYNPRINT reads input statements from SYSLOG if executed from the console,
or SYSIPT if executed from within a job stream. SYSIPT may be assigned to a
card reader, magnetic tape unit or DASD. Input must consist of fixed
unblocked 80 or 81 byte records. Printed output is sent to SYSLST. One or
more report control statements must be supplied. Input is terminated by
either a null line or /* from SYSLOG and a /* on SYSIPT.
Examples
// JOB DYNPRINT
// LIBDEF PHASE,SEARCH=LCL.DYNAM55
// DLBL SORTIN1,'CA EARL HIT WORK FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS002,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL SORTWK1,'SORT WORK FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS003,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL WORK1,'SRAM.WORK.FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS003,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL SORTOUT,'CA EARL SORTED HIT FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS001,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// ASSGN SYS001,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS002,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS003,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS007,UA
// ASSGN SYS008,UA
// ASSGN SYS009,UA
// EXEC DYNPRINT,SIZE=256K
REPORT ACTVFILE
/*
/&
// JOB DYNPRINT
// LIBDEF PHASE,SEARCH=LCL.DYNAM55
// LIBDEF SOURCE,SEARCH=(LCL.USERLIB,LCL.DYNAM55)
// DLBL EARLOBJ,'CA EARL OBJECT WORK FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS001,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS01,'CPU--.==.SYS001.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS001,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS02,'CPU--.==.SYS002.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS002,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS03,'CPU--.==.SYS003.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS003,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS04,'CPU--.==.SYS004.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS004,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS05,'CPU--.==.SYS005.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS005,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS06,'CPU--.==.SYS006.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS006,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL SORTIN1,'CA EARL HIT WORK FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS002,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL SORTWK1,'SORT WORK FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS003,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL WORK1,'SRAM.WORK.FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS003,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL SORTOUT,'CA EARL SORTED HIT FILE',0
// EXTENT SYS001,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// ASSGN SYS001,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS002,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS003,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS004,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS005,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS006,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// EXEC DYNPRINT,SIZE=256K
COMPILE CUSTOM01
/*
...
... CA EARL source program
...
/*
/&
// JOB DYNPRINT
// LIBDEF PHASE,SEARCH=LCL.DYNAM55
// LIBDEF SOURCE,SEARCH=(LCL.USERLIB,LCL.DYNAM55)
// LIBDEF PHASE,CATALOG=LCL.USERLIB
// DLBL IJSYS01,'CPU--.==.SYS001.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS001,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS02,'CPU--.==.SYS002.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS002,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS03,'CPU--.==.SYS003.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS003,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS04,'CPU--.==.SYS004.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS004,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS05,'CPU--.==.SYS005.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS005,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS06,'CPU--.==.SYS006.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS006,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYSLN,'CPU--.==.SYSLNK.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYSLNK,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// ASSGN SYS001,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS002,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS003,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS004,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS005,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS006,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYSLNK,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// OPTION CATAL
// EXEC DYNPRINT,SIZE=256K
COMPILE CUSTOM01
/*
OPTION SAVE=CUS01
...
... CA EARL source program
...
/*
// EXEC LNKEDT
/&
// JOB DYNPRINT
// LIBDEF PHASE,SEARCH=LCL.DYNAM55
// LIBDEF SOURCE,SEARCH=(LCL.USERLIB,LCL.DYNAM55)
// LIBDEF PHASE,CATALOG=LCL.USERLIB
// DLBL IJSYS01,'CPU--.==.SYS001.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS001,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS02,'CPU--.==.SYS002.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS002,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS03,'CPU--.==.SYS003.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS003,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS04,'CPU--.==.SYS004.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS004,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS05,'CPU--.==.SYS005.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS005,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYS06,'CPU--.==.SYS006.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYS006,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// DLBL IJSYSLN,'CPU--.==.SYSLNK.WORK',,SD
// EXTENT SYSLNK,SYSWK1,1,0,1,30
// ASSGN SYS001,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS002,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS003,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS004,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS005,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYS006,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// ASSGN SYSLNK,DISK,VOL=SYSWK1,SHR
// OPTION CATAL
// EXEC DYNPRINT,SIZE=256K
COMPILE ACTVFILE
/*
OPTION SAVE=DYNAF
COPY DYNAF
/*
// EXEC LNKEDT
/&
DYNREAD
DYNREAD operates as a single interface between the CA Earl program and the
various service providers. The CA Earl program, CA Earl runtime routines and
DYNREAD communicate with each other through two data areas. These are the
first two parameters passed by CA Earl to a file module. They are the function
parameter list, also referred to by CA Earl as the record area, and the
communications area. The first eight bytes of the function parameter list
contain the function code and indicate the service required.
On entry, DYNREAD analyzes the function code and invokes the service
provider in the appropriate manner, passing the function parameter list
according to the conventions supported by the service provider.
Upon return, DYNREAD analyzes the function return code and sets indicators in
the form required by CA Earl to indicate whether the operation succeeded.
These indicators and other return information maintained by DYNREAD are all
contained in the CA Earl/DYNREAD communications area. While it isn't
required for CA Earl to analyze or process the CA Earl/DYNREAD
communications area, a CA Earl-language definition of this area is supplied
with DYNPRINT and is called EARLCOMM.
The version of CA Earl supplied with CA Dynam does not support the use of
any user modules other than DYNREAD. Nor does this version of CA Earl allow
access to, or creation of, any data files other than through DYNREAD. If you
have the fully functional version of CA Earl, then these restrictions do not
apply to you. In all other respects the functioning of the CA Earl version
supplied with DYNPRINT is identical to that of the fully functional version.
The first eight bytes of the function parameter list are the DYNREAD function
code and identify the function to be performed. This may be a call to a data
access module such as DYNACC or VTOCAC, or a CA Dynam System Adapter
function.
The DYNREAD functions supported are listed in the table below. Each function
has the following items:
Functions of DYNREAD
The ACTVFILE report lists information about active generations and versions of
disk and tape files. It prints reports in volser, DSN, owner, user-id or system-
id order. Data is retrieved from the Catalog in DSN sequence.
The FILEDEFS report provides information about data sets defined in the
Catalog. The reports may display retention data, messages, data set
specifications, multifile organization and others. Data is retrieved from the
Catalog in DSN sequence.
The FREQUSE report highlights the frequency of use of files on both disk and
tape. Reports may be produced in DSN, days-old, days-unused or average-
opens-day sequence. Data is retrieved from the Catalog in DSN sequence.
To enhance their capabilities, several options are available for each of these
reports. Complete descriptions are provided on the following pages.
ACTVFILE is based on the older TDYNUTL LIST DSN=ALL report. But, it is more
flexible and enables you to produce several reports from a single scan of the
Catalog.
Report Samples For more information about samples of active catalog files, see the chapter
"CA Dynam Report Examples."
ACCESS CATALOG
REPORT ACTVFILE [ options ] or REPORT ACTIVEFILES [ options ]
[ BANNER ]
[ CATNM ]
[ CBUFN ]
[ DSN ]
[ DVC ]
[ EROPT ]
[ PSW ]
[ MAXLINES ]
[ MAXRETR ]
[ MAXVERS ]
[ SELECT= {option[,option..] } ]
The MAXVERS and SELECT options are described here. For more information
about all other ACTVFILE options and their application, see REPORT and
COMPILE Commands.
MAXVERS Option The MAXVERS option specifies the maximum number of versions to be
reported on for each (generation-type) file. If MAXVERS=1 is given, only the
most recent version of each file is reported.
SELECT Options The SELECT options for ACTVFILE are all sort-order options. Any or all of
them may be used, to produce up to five reports from one command. They
are:
FIDVER Files are sorted on file-id/version. This is the default option if the SELECT
keyword is omitted.
VOLSER Files are sorted on volser/file-seq/file-id. For disk files, the second sort
variable is set to 0, so that disk files are sorted on file-id only within each
volume.
You can nearly duplicate the TDYNUTL LIST DSN=ALL report by invoking
ACTVFILE with:
The CA Earl source for the ACTVFILE report is CA Dynam’s library member
DYNAF.0.
Report Headings The report headings are generally self-explanatory, but note the following:
VLT Shows the vault where the file presently resides. This item is only meaningful,
and only reported, for tape files.
VOL For tape files this is the sequence number of the volume relative to the start of
the multivolume set (if any). It may not be the same as the volume's
sequence number relative to the start of the file being reported on.
FSQ/EXT For tape files this is the file sequence number, that is, the sequential position
of the file in the multifile set. It may differ from the sequential position of the
file relative to the tape volume being reported on.
For disk files it is the extent sequence number of the first of the file's extents
on the volume. This is found by counting the number of extents registered for
the file in the Catalog, starting from zero. For sequential files it is normally the
same as the true extent sequence number registered in the VTOC.
OW/SY/US These are administrative fields that you can define in the Catalog for each file.
They are blank by default. They must have been previously defined for the
associated sort orders to have any value.
WRK if the file is defined with the "W" option (work file)
These conditions are tested in the order shown above and the last one
satisfied is reported.
The FILEDEFS report has no equivalent among the older CA Dynam reporting
utilities. However, the information provided is similar to that reported by the
DYNCAT LISTCAT ALL command. For more information, see Data Set
Attributes. The advantage of FILEDEFS is that you can decide which
categories of information to report on. Each category is summarized on a
single line.
ACCESS CATALOG
REPORT FILEDEFS [ BANNER ]
[ CATNM ]
[ CBUFN ]
[ DSN ]
[ DVC ]
[ EROPT ]
[ PSW ]
[ MAXLINES ]
[ MAXRETR ]
[ SELECT= {option[,option..] } ]
The SELECT options are described here. For more information about all other
FILEDEFS options and their application, see REPORT and COMPILE Commands.
SELECT Options The SELECT options for FILEDEFS are all report-formatting options. You may
use any or all of them, to produce up to seven reports from one command.
They are:
MULTFILE or MULTIFILE
Items relating to multifile specifications are reported.
Only those files defined in the Catalog with multifile
specifications are reported on.
VAULTS The vault rotation scheme for each file is reported. Only
those files defined with a vault rotation scheme in the
Catalog are reported on.
FILEDEFS reports look unlike any previous reports. But they can contain nearly
the same information as DYNCAT LISTCAT ALL reports if you invoke FILEDEFS
with this command:
The CA Earl source for the FILEDEFS report is CA Dynam's library member
DYNFD.0.
Report Headings The report headings are generally self-explanatory, but note the following:
EXP. DATE Because files can be disk, tape or FI-type, and the PERM and RETAIN dates
can differ for these categories, no attempt is made to translate these dates to
the appropriate texts. The tape PERM date, 2099/366, appears on the report
as 01/13/2099.
Report Samples For more information about samples of catalog file definitions, see to the
chapter "CA Dynam Report Examples."
Print the report in four different sort orders, highlighting very old, long-
unused, or little-used files.
End the report at an arbitrary number of files, including only the "worst
offenders."
ACCESS CATALOG
REPORT FREQUSE [ BANNER ]
[ CATNM ]
[ CBUFN ]
[ DSN ]
[ DVC ]
[ EROPT ]
[ MAXLINES ]
[ MAXRETR ]
[ MAXVERS ]
[ PSW ]
[ SELECT= {option[,option..] } ]
The MAXVERS and SELECT options are described here. For more information
about all other FREQUSE options and their application, see REPORT and
COMPILE Commands.
MAXVERS Option The MAXVERS option specifies the maximum number of versions to be
reported on for each (generation-type) file. If MAXVERS=1 is given, only the
most recent version of each file is reported.
SELECT Options The SELECT options for FREQUSE are all sort-order options. Any or all of them
may be used, to produce up to four reports from one command. They are:
By invoking FREQUSE with the following command, you can create a report
that you can compare with a DYNFREQ report:
The CA Earl source for the FREQUSE report is CA Dynam's library member
DYNFQ.0.
Report Samples For more information about samples of file usage frequency, see the chapter
"CA Dynam Report Examples."
Report Headings The report headings are generally self-explanatory, but note the following:
VER The version number ascends from 1 (the current version) to steadily higher
numbers (for older versions). This count is relative and only encompasses
existing versions, so it does not show any gaps.
EXTS For disk files this field is the total number of extents on all volumes. For tape
files it is equal to the number of volumes.
VLS This shows the number of volumes on which the file resides.
CREATION DATE The creation date is blank if it was never recorded in the CA Dynam Catalog.
on the DAYSOLD report, files with blank creation dates are ranked at the top.
The age of a file starts at 1 day on the day it is created, and increases by 1
day every night at midnight. Times are not taken into account.
EXP. DATE If the file is considered "permanent", the text --PERM-- is shown. For disk files
this means any date equal to or later than the MANDTE value defined in the
DYNAM/D option record, the normal value being 2099/365. For tape files it is
any date equal to or later than 2099/366.
If the file is not "permanent" but has a value equal to or later than the
appropriate value, the text -RETAIN- is shown. For disk files this is the
AUTODTE value defined in the DYNAM/D option record (normally 2099/364)
and for tape files it is 2099/365.
DAYS W/O OPEN This is calculated the same way as the age of the file (see the CREATION DATE
description), but using the last access date. If there is no last access date, this
field is computed from the creation date.
TOTAL OPENS This figure always includes one open for the creation of the file.
AVERAGE OPENS This is calculated by dividing the "total opens" by the "days since created" as
PER DAY described above. Since neither of those figures is ever zero, this item tends
to be quite reliable, with values higher than 1 being very unusual.
Occasionally, for often-used files, this figure may be inaccurately low due to
"opens" counter wraparound. Presumably such files will be well-known to
you.
Track length
Using DYNVTOC
With DYNVTOC, you control the level of detail for reporting on VTOC contents
to produce the following reports:
Basic VTOC listings assign SYS001 to the desired disk and execute
DYNVTOC.
Detailed VTOC report and for VTOC reporting on a pool of disk volumes or
multiple volumes currently mounted, submit an UPSI JCL statement for
DYNVTOC. DYNVTOC examines the options specified on the UPSI
statement to format these reports.
UPSI JCL Statement You may set the UPSI bits according to one of the operands shown below.
Syntax
// UPSI {00000000 }
{10000000 }
{01000000 }
{00100000 }
{00010000 }
{00001000 }
{00000100 }
UPSI 10000000 Causes all lines displayed in the basic report to be double spaced.
UPSI 01000000 Specifies that a control statement will be input from SYSIPT or SYSLOG to
indicate the sorting sequence and the volume(s) or pool to be displayed.
If executed from the console, input is from SYSLOG and is terminated by EOB.
Multiple control statements may be input to one DYNVTOC execution, though
the SORTSEQ and VOL= or POOL= parameter must be on the same command
line.
This option requires the use of a small disk work file for sorting. The file name
used to access this file is WORK1, on SYS001.
UPSI 00100000 Causes more detailed information to be provided for each file displayed. May
not be used with UPSI 01 because of format limitations.
UPSI 00010000 Produces a VTOC listing for each disk volume which is assigned by a logical
unit in the partition. This may not be used with UPSI 01.
UPSI 00001000 Causes all free-space lines to be eliminated from the VTOC display. This may
not be used with UPSI 01.
UPSI 00000100 This causes only free-space lines to appear without individual file information.
This may not be used with UPSI 01.
Example
VOL SEQ This position may contain a plus sign (+) to identify sequential files which
have one of the following attributes:
The report headings shown below only appear on reports created by DYNVTOC
using the following UPSI statement
// UPSI 01000000
F1=xxx-yy-zz Shows the disk location of the file's format-1 record where:
yy track address
zz record number
BL= Indicates the data block length. Note that this value is valid for ISAM files
only.
DYNVTOC Report Shown below is a sample report and the JCL that produced it.
Example
CA D Y N A M / D V T O C D I S P L A Y DYNVTOC PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD001 VOLUME - DOSRES CUU - 140 DEVICE - 3380 23 JAN 2008 20:08:58
FILE IDENTIFICATION FILE LOW HIGH ----RELTRK---- VOL -EXTENT- CREATE EXPIRE STATUS
-------------------------------------------- TYPE CCCCC-HH CCCCC-HH START NTRKS SEQ TYPE SEQ -------- -------- --------
DYNACC may be used to access the Catalog and obtain information in either
data set or volume serial number sequence. Additionally, information about
the Catalog itself and about vaults may be retrieved.
Supported Languages
Since DYNACC adheres to standard IBM linkage conventions, calling programs
may be written in any language that generates external program calls in a
manner that complies with these rules. This includes, among others, COBOL,
Assembler, and CA Earl. Copy text defining the DYNACC DYNINFO parameter
list is supplied for these three languages.
Using DYNACC
DYNACC is supplied as a relocatable program text file and is linked with the
calling program. It is designed to be CA Dynam release-independent. It runs in
both the CMS and VSE environments. DYNACC and all its called service
routines are self-relocating, reentrant, and operating system independent.
Using DYNACC
DYNACC is supplied as a relocatable object module suitable for linking with a
calling program. DYNACC resides in the library in which CA Dynam was
installed. DYNACC Version 2 is a root module which dynamically invokes a
separate service module depending on the version of the parameter list.
Under CMS, provided CA Dynam can be located, DYNACC will activate the
System Adapter automatically, if necessary. Under VSE, the System Adapter
must already be active when DYNACC is first invoked.
Linkage Conventions
On return, R15 will contain a return code and the condition code is set to
facilitate error processing. The return code is also stored in a field in the
DYNINFO header (DYNRTCOD) for use by high-level languages.
On initial entry, DYNACC determines what version parameter list has been
passed by the caller. Depending on the version level of the caller's parameter
list, an appropriate service module is dynamically invoked. The service module
returns directly to the caller. If the caller uses a Version 1 format parameter
list, the service module invoked is CACUDA10. This module was created by
applying maintenance correcting all CA Dynam r5.3 known DYNACC problems
to the standard 5.3 DYNACC object module and linking it as a separately
loadable module.
This ensures that programs which yielded correct results using DYNACC
Version 1 will continue to execute correctly when relinked with DYNACC
Version 2.
DYNACC sets a return code and returns immediately to the caller if it is unable
to locate the System Adapter or the appropriate service module.
The DYNINFOA macro generates a parameter list in the correct format for
either Version 1 or for Version 2.
name Required parameter. This is the label used in the CALL to DYNACC.
LEN=nnnnn Optional parameter. Determines the value assigned to DYNRQLEN and the
amount of storage reserved for DYNINFO. (Determines how many records
DYNINFO can accommodate.) Choose a number greater than the value of
DYNCOMLN.
a 1- to 5-digit number
DS, CSECT, and DSECT are mutually exclusive; choose only one value.
Defaults to DS.
V=n Optional parameter. Indicates which version of the parameter list is generated.
It corresponds to the Dynam release.
Example:
Example:
.
.
LA R13,DYNASAVE ESTABLISH SAVE AREA
CALL DYNACC,(DYNINFO) INVOKE CATALOG ACCESS
LTR R15,R15 TEST RETURN CODE
.
.
DYNINFO DYNINFOA , GENERATE PARAMETER LIST
.
DYNINFO Layout
For more information about a list of the component fields and their contents,
see DYNACC Version 2 Parameter List Contents.
To Request Use
Code
To Request Use
Code
DD Initiates a direct retrieval of the data set whose DSN matches DYNRQDSN. If a
generation or version selection field is specified (DYNRQVER, DYNRQGEN,
DYNRQGDG, or DYNRQVOL) the appropriate generation will be returned.
Otherwise, the most current generation will be returned.
If DYNRQDVC is specified, only data sets and versions of the required device
class will be returned. If DYNRQVSQ is specified, volumes starting at the
volume sequence number specified are returned. Otherwise volumes starting
with the first volume for the version are returned. As many volumes as exist
and fit in DYNINFO are returned in one call.
If more volumes or extents exist than will fit, DYNRTCOD is set to 28.
DYGNVOL always contains the number actually returned. DYGVOLS always
contains the total number active for the version. DYNRTLEN contains the
DYNINFO length in bytes required to hold all volumes available, starting at the
specified volume sequence number.
Return codes:
40 invalid password
Return codes:
Return codes:
4 no active versions
Return codes:
24 no more volumes
NF Is used after an SV, GV, DV, or NF call to return the next file on a multifile
tape volume without reaccessing the volume information. It is functionally
equivalent to a DV with the DYNRQFSQ value incremented by one, but is
significantly faster. DYGFILSQ indicates the actual file sequence number
returned.
Return codes:
32 syntax error (previous command was not SV, GV, DV, or NF)
NG Is used after a SD, GD, DD, NX, or NG call to return the next generation for
the data set without reaccessing the data set information. It is functionally
equivalent to a DD call with DYNRQVER incremented by 1, but is significantly
faster. If DYNRQDVC is specified, only data sets and versions of the specified
device class will be returned. If DYNRQVER is nonblank, it will be validated as
a packed field. A valid packed number is assumed to be the number of
versions retrieved for this data set so far, and is incremented by one. It is not
used in any other way. Scratched, test and invalid generations are ignored and
do not count in calculating the relative generation number.
Return codes:
32 syntax error (previous command was not SD, GD, DD, NX, or NG; or
DYNRQDVC is invalid; or DYNRQVER is not spaces and is not a valid
packed field - see DYNERCOD and DYNERLOC)
NX Is used after an SD, GD, DD, NG, or NX call to return as many volumes or
extents as exist and will fit in DYNINFO, starting with the volume which follows
the last volume or extent retrieved. The data set and version information is
not rebuilt. This is functionally equivalent to a DD call for the same version
with the volume sequence number incremented by one, but is considerably
faster.
Return codes:
32 syntax error (previous command was not SD, GD, DD, NG, or NX)
OE Is used to set an option to ensure that no more than one volume or extent is
returned for a given data set version per call, regardless of how many will fit in
DYNINFO. This option, once set, only affects data set calls (SD, GD, DD, NG,
or NX). It is reset whenever the Catalog is reset explicitly by an RC call or
implicitly by logical end of file for a sequential or generic retrieve or by a
significant error (DYNRTCOD > 36).
If more than one volume or extent remains, DYNRTCOD will be set to 28.
DYGNVOL will always be equal to 1. DYNRTLEN always reflects the length in
bytes of DYNINFO necessary to accommodate all available volumes starting at
the relevant volume sequence number. DYGVOLS reflects the total number of
volumes or extents for the version.
RC, RD, RV Resets catalog processing. A subsequent sequential or generic retrieve will
start again from the beginning. All dynamic work areas and catalog buffers are
released and will be reallocated on a subsequent call. Automatically invoked on
logical end-of-file for sequential and generic retrieves and on significant errors.
SD Initiates or continues a scan of all data sets in the Catalog in DSN order. The
most current valid version and its associated volumes are returned. If
DYNRQDVC is specified, only data sets and versions of the requested device
class will be returned.
Return codes:
Return codes:
24 no more volumes
Return codes:
28 more vaults exist than fit in DYNINFO. The only way to retrieve these
descriptions is to enlarge DYNINFO. DYNRTLEN contains the length in
bytes to which DYNINFO must be enlarged to accommodate all vault
descriptions.
DYNRQLEN, DYNNVBRS
For data set calls (SD, GD, DD, NG, and NX), for each data set (DYNDBREC)
and version (DYNGBREC) retrieved, DYNACC builds an array of volume/extent
(DYNVBREC) entries in DYNINFO. Usually this starts with volume sequence one
for the file version and continues for as many volumes or extents as exist and
will fit in DYNINFO. If the DD call is used, specifying the DYNRQVSQ
parameter, then the array will commence with the specified volume sequence
number. If the NX call is used, the array will commence with the next volume
in sequence after the last volume returned by the preceding SD, GD, DD, NG,
or NX call.
As DYNACC builds DYNINFO while processing each call, the length of each
segment is added to DYNRTLEN. The segment is not moved into DYNINFO if
there is insufficient space to accommodate it. This is determined by comparing
the value in DYNRTLEN with that specified by DYNRQLEN. When DYNRTLEN is
greater than DYNRQLEN, DYNACC sets DYNRTCOD to 28.
The LEN parameter of the DYNINFOA macro may be used to reserve a greater
or smaller number of bytes for DYNINFO in total. The LEN value specifies the
length reserved for DYNINFO and the value to be placed in DYNRQLEN.
Consequently, a greater or smaller number of VBRs may be accommodated.
The minimum length is equal to the value specified by DYNCOMLN. Calculate
the required value by adding the value specified by DYNCOMLN to the result of
the number of volumes desired, minus one, multiplied by the length of the
appropriate segment (DYNVBRLN for tapes or DYNEXTLN for disk extents).
If the OE call is used to set the EARL flat file option, no more than one volume
or extent will be returned at a time by DYNACC. If the file version is spread
over more than one volume or extent, DYNRTCOD will be set to 28 regardless
of the amount of space reserved for DYNINFO. In this case DYGNVOLS will
never be greater than one.
For GD calls, all data sets which match all characters before the leading space
will be returned. On DD calls, if an exactly matching DSN is not found,
DYNRTCOD 12 is set. On GD calls, on the call after all matching data sets have
been returned (if any) DYNRTCOD 20 is set. For GD calls, DYNRQDSN must
contain at least one nonblank character, else DYNRTCOD 32 (SYNTAX ERROR)
and DYNERCOD 8 (GENERIC KEY ALL SPACES) is set.
DYNRQPSW For password-protected data sets, if no password is supplied, for any call
except a DD, DYNRTCOD 16 is set and only the DSN is returned. On a DD call
for a password-protected data set, if no password is supplied or doesn't
match, DYNRTCOD 40 is set and the call is terminated.
DYNRQVER Optional for DD calls. Otherwise must be spaces. It is the disk or tape data set
version number, relative to the most current version (version one) to be
retrieved. Test ($TEST job), scratch and invalid versions (such as, open not
closed) are ignored. If not found, DYNRTCOD 8 is set. May not be specified in
conjunction with DYNRQGEN, DYNRQGDG, or DYNRQVOL. If DYNRQVER,
DYNRQGEN, DYNRQGDG, and DYNRQVOL are all spaces, the most current
version (version one) is returned.
DYNRQGEN Optional for DD calls. Otherwise must be spaces. It is the CA Dynam/D disk
data set generation number to match against in the catalog. If not found,
DYNRTCOD 8 is set. May not be specified in conjunction with DYNRQVER,
DYNRQGDG or DYNRQVOL.
DYNRQVOL Required for DV and GV calls. Optional for DD calls. Otherwise must be spaces.
For DV calls, it is used to specify the exact volser to retrieve. If not found,
DYNRTCOD is set to 8. If the volser contains no active files (is a scratch),
complete volume information (but no data set or version information except
for the most recently active data set name) is returned, and DYNRTCOD is set
to 6.
For GV calls, tape volumes which match the characters before the leading
space are returned. On the call after the last matching volser has been
returned, DYNRTCOD 24 is set. DYNRTCOD 6 is set for volumes with no active
files (scratches). A key of at least one nonblank character must be supplied,
otherwise DYNRTCOD 32 (SYNTAX ERROR) and DYNERCOD 16 (VOLSER
GENERIC KEY ALL SPACES) is set.
For DD calls, it is used to request that the version of the tape data set which
resides on a specific volume is returned. If the volume does not contain an
active version of the data set, DYNRTCOD 8 is set. May not be specified in
conjunction with DYNRQVER, DYNRQGEN or DYNRQGDG.
DYGNVOL always contains the number of tape or disk entries actually returned
for a specific call. DYGVOLS contains the total number of volumes or extents
that exist for a data set version. DYNNVBRS indicates the number of tape
volumes which will fit in DYNINFO. More than this number of disk entries will
fit, as disk entries are smaller. If more exist than will fit, as many as will fit are
returned, DYNRTCOD is set to 28, and DYNRTLEN is set to indicate the length
that would have been required to accommodate all that exist, starting at the
volume sequence number specified in DYNRQVSQ. (DYNRQVSQ is only valid
for DD calls.)
DYNRQFSQ Optional for DV calls. Otherwise must be spaces. It is used to indicate which
file on a multifile tape volume is to be returned, relative to 1. If this file
sequence does not exist, DYNRTCOD is set to 8. If this field is not set, the first
active file version on the tape volume is returned.
DYNRQDVC Optional for SD, GD, DD, and NG calls. Otherwise must be spaces. It is used to
select the device class of data sets and generations to be retrieved from the
Catalog. Selection values are as follows:
Any other value will cause DYNRTCOD 32 (SYNTAX ERROR) and DYNERCOD 28
(INVALID DEVICE CLASS) to be set.
Note that a data set defined as FI will qualify as both disk and tape, and so FI
data sets will be returned for DYNRQDVC = T or D. However, for FI data sets,
only those versions actually created on tape will be returned for T and only
those versions actually created on disk will be returned for D. FI data sets
which have only versions of the excluded type will have the data set
information returned, no version or volume information, and DYNRTCOD will
be set to 4 (NO ACTIVE VERSIONS).
DYNCATNM Specifies the DD name or DTF name to be used to access the Catalog. May be
used to access a snapshot of the Catalog by restoring a backup tape and
referring to the restored file by a name other than the active system Catalog.
Defaults to CAICATL.
DYNEROPT DYNACC never intentionally aborts, but sets a return code and returns to the
caller. If this field is set to D, on any significant error (DYNRTCOD > 32),
DYNACC will produce snap dumps of areas of interest before returning. It is up
to the caller to terminate processing.
The exit may also be used for other purposes, such as performance metrics.
DYNATEST programs use the exit to count EXCPs, for example.
The other type of exit supported is a logical error exit. This is supplied for
debugging purposes and for error analysis of Catalog errors. If the exit is
active, and the DYNACC catalog search routines encounter an unexpected
error condition, the exit will be invoked. DYNATEST, for example, can generate
code to dump areas of interest in such a situation.
This exit is activated by including a user exit module called DYNAEXIT with the
DYNACC root module when the user application program is link edited. The
routine will receive control immediately after an EXCP on the Catalog is issued.
Control must be returned to CA Dynam or results are unpredictable. After
control is returned from the user exit, Catalog Management will check to see
whether a WAIT is still necessary. If none was performed by the exit, CA
Dynam will issue one in the normal fashion. Upon entry to the users exit, the
following conditions will exist:
R0 points to the save area provided by the caller on entry to DYNACC. This is
assumed to be a standard format save area of 72 bytes. DYNACC stored the
caller's registers R14 through R12 starting at offset decimal 12 on entry from
the calling program. This save area may be used by the exit to obtain the
addresses of code and data in the caller's program.
R13 points to a standard format save area in which the exit must save its registers
on entry and restore them on exit. The first three words contain save area
chain pointers and should not be changed.
R15 will point to the user exit entry point and may be used to obtain addressability.
This exit is activated by including a user exit module called DYNEEXIT with the
DYNACC root module when the user application program is link edited. Upon
entry to the user's exit, the following conditions will exist:
R0 points to the save area provided by the caller on entry to DYNACC. This is
assumed to be a standard format save area of 72 bytes. DYNACC stores the
caller's registers R14 through R12, starting at offset decimal 12 on entry from
the calling program. This save area may be used by the exit to obtain
addressability to code and data in the caller's program.
R13 points to a standard format save area in which the exit must save its registers
on entry and restore them on exit. The first three words contain save area
chain pointers and should not be changed.
R15 will point to the user exit entry point and may be used to obtain addressability.
DYNATEST Functions
DYNATEST can also be used to experiment with the effect of changing various
parameters such as the number of volumes which may be accommodated in
DYNINFO so that the effect on EXCP counts may be observed.
DYNATEST Syntax
The first value specified after the equals sign is the default.
DSN= Optional parameter. Data set name provides the key for generic or direct data
set calls.
D for disk
T for tape
EROPT= Optional parameter. Include it only if you want DYNACC to generate snap
dumps on error. Otherwise omit it.
FSQ=nnnn Optional parameter. For a multifile tape volume, for a direct volume (DV) call,
specifies which data set version is to be retrieved.
a 1- to 4-digit number
GEN=nnn Optional parameter. Specifies the CA Dynam/D data set version to retrieve for
a direct data set call (DD).
NVBRS=nnnn Optional parameter. Determines the maximum number of tape volumes for a
single version which may be accommodated in DYNINFO.
1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
For other types, additional calls will be constructed and executed to ensure
that all volumes (for data set type calls) or files (for volume type calls) for
each data set or volume are retrieved.
For direct calls (Dx), the generated program terminates once the specified
data set or volume has been completely processed.
For sequential or generic calls (Sx or Gx), the program terminates when
DYNACC indicates an end condition exists.
In any case, the program terminates normally when the NCALLS counter
decrements to zero.
VER=nnn Optional parameter. Identifies the version number of the data set to retrieve
for a direct data set call (DD).
VOL=xxxxxx Optional parameter. Specifies the volume serial number to retrieve for a direct
(Dx) call.
VSQ=nnnn Optional parameter. For a multivolume file version, for a direct data set (DD)
call, specifies the volume sequence number of the first volume to retrieve. As
many subsequent volumes are retrieved as exist and can fit in DYNINFO (see
also the NVBRS parameter).
a 1- to 4-digit number
DYNWRKA DC (1024)XL1'00'
DYNWRKLN EQU *-DYNWRKA LENGTH OF DYNACC WORK AREA
***************************************************************
* DYNREC -- DYNINFO RECORD OUTPUT AREA *
***************************************************************
DYNREC EQU * DYNINFO OUTPUT AREA
***************************************************************
* DYNCCREC -- CATALOG CONTROL RECORD SEGMENT *
***************************************************************
ORG DYNREC
DYNCCREC EQU * CATALOG CONTROL INFORMATION
DYCOWNID DC CL16' ' CATALOG OWNER IDENT.
DYCVOL DC CL6' ' VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
DYCCISZ DC PL3'0' CONTROL INTERVAL SIZE
DYCLOWER DC PL6'0' LOWER EXTENT LIMIT
DYCUPPER DC PL6'0' UPPER EXTENT LIMIT
DYCNBYTS DC PL6'0' NUMBER OF BYTES IN THE CAT.
DYCFSREM DC PL6'0' NUMBER OF FREE SPACE BYTES
DYCNDBRS DC PL6'0' NUMBER OF DATASET BASE RECS.
DYCNSKRS DC PL6'0' NUMBER OF SORT KEY RECORDS
DYCNVBRS DC PL6'0' NUMBER OF VOLUME BASE RECS.
DYCSTAT0 DC CL8' ' STATUS FLAGS BYTE 0
DYCSTAT1 DC CL8' ' STATUS FLAGS BYTE 1 - RESERVED
DYCLEVEL DC CL2' ' CATALOG VERSION AND LEVEL
DYCCJOB DC CL8' ' CREATION JOB NAME
DYCCSTEP DC CL8' ' CREATION STEP NAME
DYCCPROC DC CL8' ' CREATION PROCEDURE NAME
DYCCCPU DC CL16' ' CREATION CPU ID SERIAL NUMBER
DYCCTOD DC PL4'0' CREATION TIME (0HHMMSS)
DYCCDTE DC PL4'0' CREATION SYSTEM DATE (00YYDDD+)
DYCCDAT DC CL8' ' CREATION SYSTEM DATE GREGORIAN
DYCCPART DC CL3' ' CREATION PARTITION ID
DYCCVER DC CL2' ' CREATION ADAPTER VERSION
DYCCLVL DC CL2' ' CREATION ADAPTER LEVEL
DYCCCPUI DC CL1' ' CREATION CPU ID CHARACTER
DYCCSYS DC CL8' ' CREATION OPERATING SYSTEM
DYCCDVTP DC CL6' ' CREATION DEVICE TYPE
DYCCCUU DC CL3' ' CREATION DEVICE ADDRESS
DYCBJOB DC CL8' ' BACKUP JOB NAME
DYCBSTEP DC CL8' ' BACKUP STEP NAME
DYCBPROC DC CL8' ' BACKUP PROCEDURE NAME
DYCBCPU DC CL16' ' BACKUP CPU ID SERIAL NUMBER
DYCBTOD DC PL4'0' BACKUP TIME (0HHMMSS)
DYCBDTE DC PL4'0' BACKUP SYSTEM DATE (00YYDDD+)
DYCBDAT DC CL8' ' BACKUP SYSTEM DATE GREGORIAN
DYCBPART DC CL3' ' BACKUP PARTITION ID
DYCBVER DC CL2' ' BACKUP ADAPTER VERSION
DYCBLVL DC CL2' ' BACKUP ADAPTER LEVEL
DYCBCPUI DC CL1' ' BACKUP CPU ID CHARACTER
DYCBSYS DC CL8' ' BACKUP OPERATING SYSTEM
This chapter explains how to use CAIAUDIT in prompt mode and shows you
how to display the following:
Enter desired option number or any valid command and press ENTER:
1. CUI Session Status Selection
2. CUI Maintenance
3. Event Notification Selection
4. Event Notification Maintenance
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7=Backward 8=Forward 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
To select a menu option, enter the desired menu number and press ENTER, or
tab down to the desired option and press ENTER.
If no criterion is entered, all records in the current CAUDPCn data set are
displayed on the AUDIT Data Set Directory Panel - All Products (AUDT-1100).
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7= 8= 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
CAUDPCn Specify a data set. The default is the current CAUDPCn data set.
Product Specify a product code. For more information about a list of valid product
codes, see the Installation Guide.
Event Specify an event code. For more information about a list of valid event codes,
see the Message Guide.
Facility Specify a facility ID. Depending upon the product, it can be a terminal ID,
partition ID or VTAM application ID.
A Abend
E Error
I Informational
W Warning
Cmd Date Time Prod Evnt User Fac ID Sev Name CPU
Miscellaneous
Prod The CAIAUDIT-assigned product code of the product that logged the event.
Also a selection field. For more information about a list of valid product codes,
see the Installation Guide.
Evnt The event code of the event that occurred. Also a selection field. For more
information about a list of valid event codes, see the Message Guide.
User The user ID associated with the event that occurred. Also a selection field.
Fac ID The facility ID of the event that occurred. Depending upon the product, the
facility ID is a terminal ID, partition ID, or VTAM application ID. Also a
selection field.
Sev The severity code of the event that occurred. Also a selection field. Valid
severity codes are:
A Abend
E Error
I Informational
W Warning
Name The name associated with the event that occurred. Also a selection field.
CPU The relative ID of the CPU where the event occurred. Also a selection field.
Local Commands
Short Commands
DSP Display in detail all available information contained in a specific record. Enter
DSP in the short command area on the same line as the desired record or if no
other short commands have been entered, position the cursor anywhere on
the line of the desired record and press ENTER.
Event Code The event code of the event that occurred. Also a selection field. For more
information about a list of valid event codes, see the Message Guide.
PID The Partition (Syslog ID) that the event occurred in. Also a selection field.
Jobname The Jobname of the job that the event occurred in. Also a selection field.
Phasename The name of the Phase that was executing when the event occurred. Also a
selection field.
Dataset Name The name of the data set that was being processed when the event occurred.
Also a selection field. This field may appear as blanks if the label has not been
processed at the time the audit entry has been logged or in the case of some
job control opens, and so on.
Local Commands
Short Commands
DSP Display in detail all available information contained in a specific record. Enter
DSP in the short command area on the same line as the desired record or if no
other short commands have been entered, position the cursor anywhere on
the line of the desired record and press ENTER.
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7= 8= 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7= 8= 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7=Backward 8=Forward 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
Event Code The event code of the event that occurred. Also a selection field. For more
information about a list of valid event codes, see the Message Guide.
PID The Partition (Syslog ID) that the event occurred in. Also a selection field.
Jobname The Jobname of the job that the event occurred in. Also a selection field.
Phasename The name of the Phase that was executing when the event occurred. Also a
selection field.
Dataset Name The name of the data set that was being processed when the event occurred.
Also a selection field. This field may appear as blanks if the label has not been
processed at the time the audit entry has been logged or in the case of some
job control opens.
Local Commands
Short Commands
DSP Display in detail all available information contained in a specific record. Enter
DSP in the short command area on the same line as the desired record or, if
no other short commands have been entered, position the cursor any- where
on the line of the desired record and press |ENTER|.
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7= 8= 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
__ __ __ __ __ __ __
==> ____ ______ ______ __ ________ ________ _________________
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7=Backward 8=Forward 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
Event Code The event code of the event that occurred. Also a selection field. For more
information about a list of valid event codes, see the Message Guide.
PID The Partition (Syslog ID) that the event occurred in. Also a selection field.
Jobname The Jobname of the job that the event occurred in. Also a selection field.
Phasename The name of the Phase that was executing when the event occurred. Also a
selection field.
Dataset Name The name of the data set that was being processed when the event occurred.
Also a selection field. This field may appear as blanks if the label has not been
processed at the time the audit entry has been logged, in the event of some
job control opens, and so on.
Local Commands
Short Commands
DSP Display in detail all available information contained in a specific record. Enter
DSP in the short command area on the same line as the desired record or, if
no other short commands have been entered, position the cursor any- where
on the line of the desired record and press |ENTER|.
Dataset name: FI
Jobname: FITAPE Phasename: DDTEST CPU: A
Dtfname: UOUT Partition: BG CPUid: FF00005530900000
Device asgnd: 3380 Typefle: OUTPUT Lub: SYS130
Volser: 338000
1=Help 2= 3=Quit 4= 5= 6=
7= 8= 9= 10= 11= 12=Exit
SELECT AUDITRECORDS
Type Global
Example
The following command displays the CAIAUDIT Data Set Browse Selection
Panel (AUDT-1000):
DISPLAY AUDIT
Type
Global
Required Operand
Optional Operands
PRODUCT=ALL|product Specify the product code of the record(s) to be displayed. Only one product
can be specified at a time. Fore more information about a list of valid product
codes, see the Installation Guide. The default is ALL.
DSN=1|2 Specify the data set to be browsed. The default is the data set currently being
logged. Choose one of the following:
1 CAUDPC1
2 CAUDPC2
CPU=nn Specify the relative CPU number of the record(s) to be displayed. It can be
any number from 1 to 32.
DATE=mmddyy|ddm Specify the date of the record(s) to be displayed, using the format specified
myy in the AUDIT Control Options Panel (AUDM-1000).
EVENT=eventcode Specify the event code of the record(s) to be displayed. For more information
about a list of valid event codes, see the Message Guide.
SEVERITY=A|E|I|W Specify the severity code of the record(s) to be displayed. Valid severity codes
are:
A Abend
E Error
I Informational
W Warning
Example
The following command displays all CA Dynam/D records with the event code
OPEN:
D AUDIT,PRODUCT=DYND,EVENT=OPEN
Printable Fields
The following tables list the printable fields that can be used for:
CAIAUDIT
CA DYNAM/T
CA DYNAM/D
CA DYNAM/FI
The Audit Trail facility records the following details about file OPEN/CLOSE
processing:
File name
Version number
System date
Time of processing
The Audit Trail facility also records internal Catalog recovery information.
Therefore, you can use this facility to recreate or recover the CA Dynam
Catalog if it is destroyed or corrupted; no information relating to file
management activity is lost.
The Audit Trail report generator lets you design your own reports by specifying
the following criteria:
Several predefined reports are also provided. For more information about
predefined reports, see the appendix, “Audit Trail Report Examples.”
You can run the Audit Trail facility in either basic or extended mode.
The system option records for DYNAM, DYNAM/D, DYNAM/T, and DYNAM/FI
provide several options through which you can control the level and amount of
logging performed by the Audit subsystem in each CA Dynam subset. This
control gives you maximum flexibility with minimum overhead. For more
information about option records, see the Programming Guide.
− V= response
− password violation
The Audit Trail facility can report all of these conditions through the AUDTUTIL
report generator. It also logs special Catalog recovery entries whenever the
Catalog is modified. However, these are processed only during Catalog
recovery.
Partition ID
Before logged file activity can be directed to the Audit Trail file, you must
initialize the file with the AUDTUTIL program's DATASET command.
Note:
The Audit Trail file must be a single extent file. Messages are written to
SYSLOG as each ten-percent-full mark is reached. If the file fills up,
logging stops and audit entries are lost until a BACKUP of the file is
performed. CA Dynam records the number of entries lost.
The CA Dynam Catalog Recovery facility enables you to recreate the Catalog
file in the event of disaster. Using a previous BACKUP tape of the file in
conjunction with the Audit Trail file, you can recover the Catalog without
concern for system integrity and reliability. CA Dynam uses an enqueue
technique that protects the Catalog during recovery from being updated by
any other jobs running on the system and programs running on other CPUs.
By default, only audit records created after the last BACKUP of the Catalog file
are considered during Catalog recovery. However, you can process multiple
backup tapes of the Audit Trail file. You may override the starting date and
time from which Audit Trail records are selected for processing.
1. Issue the DYNCAT RESTORE command to restore the latest backup of the
Catalog file to disk. Be careful not to issue a RESTORE REORG; this resets
pointers required by the recovery function and should only be used if
recovery is not possible after a RESTORE.
Note: The Audit facility is designed for Catalog recovery from a catastrophic
loss. If you suspect a noncritical or logical Catalog error, execute the DYNCAT
BACKUP, RESTORE REORG, and SCRATCH functions to correct the Catalog
error instead. Audit recovery is unnecessary under these circumstances;
RESTORE REORG resolves noncritical problems.
You can enter any number of Audit Trail commands, in any sequence, in a
single execution of the AUDTUTIL program.
All output is written to SYSLST except for some initial messages which are
displayed at the operator's console.
Maintenance Commands
AUDTUTIL enables you to perform various maintenance functions on the
accumulated Audit Trail data. The chart below lists each maintenance
command and briefly describes its functions.
BACKUP Command
The BACKUP command writes the Audit Trail file to the tape mounted on the
drive assigned to logical unit SYSnnn.
ADD Required if using other optional parameters. Copies the period-to-date audit
information from the input (previous period-to-date tape) to the output tape
and adds new information.
INITIALIZE Required if using other optional parameters. Initializes tape for output. The
Audit Trail data is written at the beginning of the tape.
INPUT=SYSnnn Optional parameter. If ADD is used, the input tape is assigned by logical unit
SYSnnn (default is SYS005.)
TAPE=SYSnnn Optional parameter. Assigns the output tape by logical unit SYSnnn (default is
SYS006).
DISP=KEEP Optional parameter. Ensures that the Audit Trail file is not cleared after the
BACKUP function is run. This operand is only valid on a BACKUP INITIALIZE
command. Use DISP=KEEP only for generating tapes for reporting and testing.
This reduces the possibility of creating multiple copies of the same data.
Examples
// JOB BACKUP
// ASSGN SYS006,181
// TLBL DYNHIST,'CA Dynam AUDIT'
// EXEC AUDTUTIL,SIZE=128K
BACKUP INITIALIZE TAPE=SYS006
/*
/&
Note:
The Audit Trail file is reinitialized when the BACKUP is complete unless
DISP=KEEP is specified.
A TLBL for DYNOLD is required for the ADD function for the input period-
to-date tape.
If the Audit Trail data set becomes full, perform a BACKUP immediately
records cannot be logged until the BACKUP is executed.
If the AUDTUTIL job cancels during a BACKUP, and the Audit data set has
been specified as SHARE=YES, execute the DATASET UNLOCK command.
The BACKUP function locks the Audit Trail file while it is writing the data
records to tape. The file is not unlocked until the BACKUP completes
successfully.
The CATALOG command recovers tape activity information lost from the
Catalog files. This command uses the information on the Audit Trail tape(s)
and Audit Trail disk file in order to update the existing Catalog file.
TAPE=SYSnnn Optional parameter. Assigns the input Audit Trail tape by logical unit SYSnnn
(default is SYS005).
MULTITAPE=n Optional parameter. Specifies the number of logical Audit Trail backup files to
use in the recovery. The Catalog recovery reads the specified number of files.
This operand is not required for a single file which spans multiple volumes.
Catalog recovery supports end-of-volume conditions.
NODISK Optional parameter. Instructs CA Dynam not to process the Audit Trail disk file
after all Audit tapes are read. Use this operand with caution: entries contained
in the Audit disk file indicate the most recent CA Dynam activity.
NOTAPE Optional parameter. Instructs CA Dynam not to process any Audit Trail backup
tapes. Audit Trail information is read only from the Audit disk file.
DATE=mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy
Optional parameter. Indicates the starting date from which Audit Trail records
will be processed. All Audit records with an older date are ignored. Use this
operand with caution: the date you supply overrides the last 'backup' date,
which is contained in the Catalog time-stamp record (CCR).
Default: date and time of the last backup as indicated in the CCR for the
existing Catalog.
TIME=hh.mm.ss Optional parameter. Indicates the time of day (using a 24-hour clock) for the
first audit entry to be used in the Catalog recovery. You can include this
operand only if you also specify the DATE= operand. If you specify DATE=
without the TIME= operand, the default is 00.00.00.
Examples
After the Audit backup tape file is processed, the Audit disk file is to be
processed.
Only audit records with a date after January 1, 2000 are to be processed.
// JOB RECOVERY
// ASSGN SYS005,181
// TLBL DYNHIST
// EXEC AUDTUTIL,SIZE=128K
CATALOG RECOVERY NODISK LIST TAPE=SYS005
/*
/&
Backing up the CA Dynam Catalog, and backing up and clearing the Audit data
set:
This job stream creates a backup of the Catalog and Audit files and clears the
Audit data set. Run this job in the order shown at least once daily. This
ensures that current backups are always available.
Back up and clear the Audit data set first to ensure the following is done:
All records on the Audit data set reflect activity since the most recent
backup
Example
This job stream recovers the Catalog using the current backup tape and the
Audit data set. No file ID is specified for IJSYSBK, the backup tape to be
restored. Since the Catalog has been destroyed, it would serve no purpose to
try to input the tape as a controlled data set.
Note:
The Audit Trail records to be processed are retrieved first from the Audit
Trail history tape(s), if any exist, then from the Audit Trail disk file.
The Catalog recovery operation does not clear the Audit disk file. Only the
BACKUP function clears the Audit disk.
During the recovery operation, CA Dynam always processes the Audit trail
history tapes used as input during the recovery as uncontrolled data sets -
- even if the tape file's data set name is in the CA Dynam Catalog. During
the recovery operation, the data contained in the Catalog may be
unreliable.
Use the LIST option during Catalog recovery to log each operation.
DATASET Command
INITIALIZE Initializes the Audit Trail data set so that it can be used by AUDTUTIL.
UNLOCK Unlocks the data set when a lock-out condition occurs. This may happen when
SHARE=YES is in effect, and a job is canceled while the Audit Trail data set is
being updated.
Optional parameters
The following parameters are optional but not mutually exclusive. Each
parameter can be used only in combination with the INITIALIZE parameter.
VSELOCK Enqueues the Audit file through the VSE External Lock file
rather than internal CA methods.
Examples
If the Audit Trail file is locked, any program attempting to log (update) the
Audit file from another partition is kept waiting until the Audit file is
unlocked. Within a single system, this is accomplished through the VSE
Lock Facility. Cross-system serialization is performed using an exclusive
CA technique (SHARE=YES), which does not employ SENSE RESERVE.
Reporting Commands
AUDTUTIL enables you to report on information logged to the Audit trail file.
This table lists each of the reporting commands and briefly describes their
functions.
Command Function
FIELDS Required and valid only for user-defined reports. Specifies the
fields to be included in a user-defined report and the order in
which they will appear.
A selection list
Predefined Reports
Predefined reports set these lists up for you. You only have to tell the Audit
utility which reports you want. The following commands are valid for
predefined reports:
GENERATE
INPUT
PROGRAM
REPORT
TITLE
The following job stream will produce two reports: one on catalog maintenance
and one on CA Dynam/T uncontrolled tape processing.
If the predefined report field title were not changed, the above example could
be rewritten as follows:
The INPUT statement is not needed since the default is the audit disk file.
User-defined Reports
If you'd rather customize a report, prepare the selection and title lists yourself.
This JCL produces a customized report on two particular data sets.
One report that traces the audit records for the two data sets will be
generated. Note that some of the default titles are being overridden.
For a customized report, you must at least supply FIELDS and GENERATE
statements.
Several reports may be defined in one job stream. Each one is processed when
a GENERATE statement is encountered. Note that report definitions are cleared
after each GENERATE statement is executed so each GENERATE statement
must be paired with a REPORT statement. See the REPORT command for
examples.
FIELDS Command
The FIELDS command specifies the fields to be included in the report and the
order in which they are to appear.
Examples
The first report puts the data set name field on one line, volser and unit on the
second. These two lines are followed by two blank lines. Volser and unit are
separated by 5 spaces. The report will look like this:
Note that if you separate the fields onto individual lines, you are limited to
defining the title for the first FIELDS statement.
The second report puts data set name, volser and unit on one line; volser and
unit are separated by 5 spaces. This line is followed by two blank lines. The
report will look like this:
The third report puts data set name, volser and unit on one line. Fields are
separated by 1 space by default. The report will look like this:
VOLUME
----- D A T A S E T N A M E ------ SERIAL UNIT (default title)
Note:
Fields are printed in the order in which you specify them in the FIELDS
command.
The length of each field differs and is listed along with the field definitions
in the section "Report Fields."
Indicate spaces between fields with $SPn, where n is the number of spaces
to insert.
If two fields are specified with no intervening $SPn, spaces are inserted
between the fields.
To insert a blank line into the report, issue a FIELDS command with the
single field name '$SP'. For example,
This prints the data set name and volser on one line. This is followed by
one blank line.
If all or part of any field falls outside position 120, the field will be
completely omitted.
Each FIELDS command defines a separate report line. If you issue more
than one FIELDS command, each audit entry will have more than one
output line on the report.
GENERATE Command
The GENERATE command executes the report generation function using all
commands issued since the previous REPORT command. No operands are
required with this command.
Example
// JOB REPORTS
// EXEC AUDTUTIL,SIZE=128K
PROGRAM DYNAM/T
REPORT DATASET MAINT
GENERATE (2 predefined reports printed)
PROGRAM DYNAM/D
REPORT
TITLE 'VOLUME AUDIT REPORT'
TITLE DSNAME 'NAME'
TITLE VOLSER 'VOLUME'
FIELDS DSNAME VOLSER
SELECT (DSNAME TEST.FILE1)
SELECT (DSNAME TEST.FILE3)
GENERATE (a customized report printed)
/*
/&
INPUT Command
The INPUT command specifies which Audit Trail data file is to be used for
generating a report. If you omit all operands, the default is INPUT DATASET.
INPUT [ DATASET ]
[ ]
[ TAPE=[SYSnnn] [MULTITAPE=nn] ]
DATASET Optional parameter. Uses the Audit Trail file on disk for generating a report.
TAPE=[SYSnnn] Optional parameter. Uses the Audit Trail history tape assigned by logical unit
SYSnnn.
Default: SYS005
If a logical unit is not specified, you may omit the equal sign (=) too.
MULTITAPE=nn Optional parameter. Specifies the number of input files to be processed Not
required for one file spanning several volumes. End-of-volume switching is
handled normally.
Default: MULTITAPE=1
Examples
INPUT TAPE=SYS008
GENERATE
/*
/&
Examples 1, 3 and 4 use history tape files for input. Example 2 defaults to
using the disk audit trail file as input.
Note: If you are using the history tape for generating a report, you must
include a TLBL statement with the file name 'DYNHIST'; otherwise, the
function will fail and the job will be canceled.
PROGRAM Command
PROGRAM {DYNAM/T|DYNAM/FI|DYNAM/D }
Example
Note:
Issue the PROGRAM command only if you have more than one CA Dynam
product installed.
REPORT Command
Example
// JOB REPORTS
// EXEC AUDTUTIL,SIZE=128K
PROGRAM DYNAM/T
REPORT DATASET MAINT (2 predefined reports requested)
GENERATE
PROGRAM DYNAM/D
REPORT (a customized report defined)
TITLE 'VOLUME AUDIT REPORT'
TITLE DSNAME 'NAME'
TITLE VOLSER 'VOLUME'
FIELDS DSNAME VOLSER
SELECT (DSNAME TEST.FILE1)
SELECT (DSNAME TEST.FILE3)
GENERATE
/*
/&
The above job stream will produce three reports: two predefined reports for
CA Dynam/T (one on CA Dynam/T-controlled tape processing by data set
name and one on catalog maintenance) and one user-defined report.
Note:
FIELDS, INPUT, SELECT and TITLE (when used) follow the REPORT
command.
CA Dynam/T Auditing
CA Dynam/D Auditing
CA Dynam/FI Auditing
SELECT Command
The SELECT command specifies the conditions under which a record is selected
from the Audit Trail data set.
You can specify as many SELECT statements as you like, and include as many
conditions as you like in a single SELECT statement.
The chart below details the conditions you can specify in a SELECT statement:
(field-name value) all records whose indicated field has the specified value, for example, (OWNER
DA)
(field-name low- all records whose indicated field has a value within the specified range, for
value high-value) example, (UNIT 160 167)
Generic class names are described in the following pages. For more
information about lists of the field names, see Report Fields.
Examples
The first example chooses records that meet any one of the following criteria:
The records have a date between February 8, 2007 and February 9, 2007
The second example chooses records that meet any one of the following
criteria:
The records have a data set name of TEST.FILE1 and are output files and
have a date between February 8, 2007 and February 9, 2007
The records have a data set name of TEST.FILE3 and are output files and
have a date between February 8, 2007 and February 9, 2007
Note:
If you do not issue a SELECT statement, all records in the Audit file are
selected.
The following chart details the permitted field values for SELECT:
When you are comparing alphanumeric field values, only the number of
characters supplied on the SELECT statement is used, regardless of the actual
length of the field. For example, to select all job names beginning with the
characters 'EL', issue the command:
Records are logically grouped into generic classes based upon the contents of
one or more fields. Include a class name to reference these records in your
SELECT statement; this eliminates the need to specify the field values.
Field names and their contents are described in the "Report Fields" section of
this chapter.
TITLE Command
The TITLE command overrides CA Dynam defaults for the titles used on the
report (page titles and field titles).
Page Title The page title format prints a user-defined title at the top of each report page.
LEFT and RIGHT are optional parameters indicating left or right justification of
the page title. If you specify neither, you may omit the parentheses and the
title is centered across the page. If all titles are to be centered, you can use
the same format to string the page titles on one statement.
You can issue several TITLE commands. They are printed on separate lines in
the order in which they are issued. The first character of each page title should
be an ANSI control character (blank, '0', '+', or '-'). If the first character is not
a valid ANSI control character, CA Dynam forces single-line spacing.
Field Title This specifies a user-defined title as the heading for the identified field.
Line-number is the title line on which this field title is to be printed: 1 for the
first field title line, 2 for the second field title line, and so on. Default: 1.
Position is the print position at which the field title is to begin, relative to the
beginning of the field on the report line. Default: 0.
A negative position (-nn) indicates that the title is to begin 'nn' spaces before
the start of the field.
If you omit both the line number and position, you can also omit the
parentheses that would have surrounded them.
You can specify as many user-defined field titles as needed. They replace the
default field titles. For more information about the default titles, see Report
Fields.
Examples
The first report defines a 3-line page title centered on the page. Default field
titles are used.
VOLUME
--- D A T A S E T N A M E --- SERIAL
VBWORK SYSWK1
VSFILE SYSWK2
The second report is the same as the first, except that there is a blank line
before the page title starts. The blank line is caused by the ANSI control
character (0) in the first title ('0REPORT2').
REPORT 2
REPORT on DISK DATA SET
AND VOLUME USAGE
VOLUME
--- D A T A S E T N A M E --- SERIAL
VBWORK SYSWK1
VSFILE SYSWK2
The third report prints the date the report was generated and a page title.
Both lines are left-justified on the page. The field title for volume serial
number is printed on three lines. Note that the third line (NUMBERS) is shifted
one character to the left.
VBWORK SYSWK1
VSFILE SYSWK2 Notes:
You may include the strings YY/MM/DD or HH.MM.SS. The Audit Trail
facility will replace these with the current date and time, respectively.
Make sure that you code these strings as shown.
If the TITLE text (within apostrophes) exceeds position 72, you can
continue it starting in position 1 on the next statement.
The maximum length of a page title is 120 characters (excluding the ANSI
control character). If you specify a title larger than 120 characters, only
the leftmost 120 characters are printed.
The maximum length of a field title is 120 characters. The titles are moved
into the output line in the order in which you specified them. If any overlap
occurs, only the last specified title is printed correctly.
There is a maximum of seven titles (page and field). All other titles are
ignored.
The total number of lines per page is the value defined during the VSE
supervisor generation or specified on the Job Control command 'SET
LINECT=nnn'.
The position operand, +nn, may have any value. However, if the
specification causes part of the title to be positioned outside the report
line, truncation occurs and only the contents of the report line are printed.
If all or part of any field title falls outside positions 1 to 120 inclusive, the
field title is completely omitted.
Report Fields
This section identifies the field names for each CA Dynam product. Use these
field names on the FIELDS, SELECT, and TITLE statements. The charts show
the field name that AUDTUTIL recognizes, the length and description of the
field, and the default field title that appears on reports.
Note:
Numeric values are right-justified within their fields; all other values are
left-justified.
The default field title for DSNAME is a character string with the words
'DATASET NAME' double-spaced and padded with hyphens to a length of
44 characters.
CA Dynam/T Fields
SCRATCH or COUNT
if a scratch tape
OUTSIDE
LOCKED
PROTECT
BADLUB
Invalid logical unit used
BADFILE
LBLTFULL
CTFULL
File is full
BADVERS
CONTROL 4 CTRL
Indicates whether the tape and/or file is controlled or
uncontrolled (not in the Catalog). Possible values:
FILES
PARTID 4 Partition ID ID
SEQ.
CA Dynam/FI Fields
SB (single) or DB (double)
INPUT or OUTPUT
LBLTYPE 4 Label type found: TAPE, SD, VSAM, ISC, ISE, DA LABEL FOUND
RELEASE or VERIFY
F, FB, V, VB, U
PARTID 2 Partition ID ID
F, FB, V, VB, U
BLKSIZE
LBLTYPE
DEVICE
DTFFEAT
unsupported DTF feature
RECFORM
IGNORED
CA Dynam/D Fields
INPUT
DDCNTRL
CA Dynam/D-controlled
CATCNTRL
Catalog controlled
DASDDI
DASD DI required
DSNDEL
EQFILDEL
POOL
SECSD
The following fields are valid only for NON-SD data sets. A total of 15
additional extents is possible.
Input and output tapes may be labeled or unlabeled, and may contain
undefined, spanned, fixed-length, or variable-length records. Records may be
blocked or unblocked.
Operation
The following criteria must be met for the successful operation of DYNCOPY:
DYNCOPY requires 64K + 8 bytes of partition GETVIS storage for the input
file buffer. When the COPY function is used, an additional 64K bytes of
partition GETVIS storage is required.
The following file names (DTFnames) are required on DLBLs and TLBLs:
To specify a DTFname of your choosing for the input tape or disk file, specify
FILEIN= or INNAME= on a DYNCOPY control statement. To specify your own
DTFname for the output tape or disk file, specify FILEOUT= or OUTNAME= on
a DYNCOPY control statement.
Parameter Statements
If DYNCOPY is executed from the console, it will read its parameters from the
console. After the last parameter has been entered, pressing (END/ENTER)
with no data will cause DYNCOPY to begin executing the required functions. If
DYNCOPY is executed from SYSRDR, it will read its parameter statements from
SYSIPT, and at least one statement must be input to specify the type of copy
or dump wanted.
Parameters
DUMP Produces a dump of the file with no deblocking of records when the records
are printed. The COPY, MAX=, SKIP=, and CHARONLY parameters may be
used with DUMP, but the SEL= parameter may not be used. All other
parameters used with DUMP will be ignored.
COPY Causes the input file to be copied to tape or disk. If a full copy of the file is
wanted, with no reblocking, no other parameters are needed. If a selective
copy is to be made, the SEL=, LRECL=, BLKSIZE=, and RECFM= parameters
are required. If COPY is used without SEL=, RECFM=, and LRECL= all being
specified, DYNCOPY uses a DTF with undefined records for the output file. The
copy will be correct, but the record size and block size saved on the CA Dynam
Catalog will be missing or incorrect. COPY is the default parameter if no
command is specified.
Startingposition, Specifies a condition upon which input records are to be selected for copying
Length, Condition, and/or printing, and forces deblocking of printed records. If any SEL=
Type, Argument parameters are used, a valid LRECL= parameter must also be specified. The
total number of SEL= parameters may not exceed 20 per run. The SEL=
parameter may be specified on the same statement as other parameters, but
the SEL= parameter must be the last parameter on the statement.
Two SEL= parameters may not be specified on the same statement.
EQ equal to
NE not equal to
GT greater than
LT less than
Note: Record selection for copying or printing occurs when any of the
specified SEL= tests is true (for example, SEL= tests are treated as a set of
"or" conditions); no "and" specification is possible. The tests are executed in
the order in which they are entered on the input statements.
EOJ= | FEOF= The EOJ= and FEOF= parameters can be used interchangeably. Both have
Startingpos, Length, the same format as the SEL= parameter and may be used to avoid reading
Condition, Type, an entire file by specifying the conditions upon which the program is to
Argument terminate. A valid LRECL= parameter and at least one valid SEL= parameter
are required with this parameter.
PRINT Specifies that printing is wanted. PRINT is assumed and need not be specified
if either DUMP or CHARONLY is specified.
MAX=n | RECS=n Specifies that printing and/or copying is to halt and DYNCOPY is to terminate
when n records have been printed or copied. The value of n must be a 1 to 6
digit number between 1 and 999,999. If the LRECL= parameter is specified,
then n specifies the number of logical records; if LRECL= is not specified, then
n specifies the number of physical blocks.
SKIP=n Specifies the number of physical blocks or logical records at the beginning of
the file which are to be skipped before record selection, copying, or printing
begins. The value of n may be any number from zero to 999,999; inclusive.
If this parameter is omitted, no records will be skipped. If the LRECL=
parameter is specified, then n specifies the number of logical records; if
LRECL= is not specified, then n specifies the number of physical blocks.
CHARONLY Specifies that the printed output is not to contain the hex equivalent of the
character data. If this parameter is omitted, hex and character printing is the
default, with one exception: if a line to be printed consists entirely of printable
characters, that line will be printed as if CHARONLY had been specified.
RECFM=xx Specifies the record format. If a full copy of a file is wanted with no change in
block size, this parameter must be omitted. If a selective copy is wanted, this
parameter must specify one of the following:
F Fixed-length, unblocked.
FB Fixed-length, blocked.
V Variable-length, unblocked.
VB Variable-length, blocked.
S Spanned
SB Spanned, blocked
U Undefined
Note: The record type of the output file must be the same as the record type
of the input file (for example, a fixed-length output file requires fixed-length
input records), and a variable-length output file requires variable-length input
records. This parameter is required for selective copying and printing.
LRECL=n Specifies the logical record length in bytes. For variable-length records, specify
LRECL=V. This parameter is required for selective file copying and selective
printing.
BLKSIZE=n Specifies the block size of the input files, in bytes, and must be a valid size for
the output device type. For variable-length blocked files, specify the maximum
size for the largest block in the file. Block size must be a multiple of the value
specified in the LRECL= parameter.
If the block size of the output file is to be different from the block size of the
input file, then the BLKSIZE= parameter must specify the block size of the
input file and either the BLKSZ= parameter on the DLBL or TLBL, or the
DYNCOPY OBLKSIZE parameter must be used to specify the block size of the
output file.
OBLKSIZE=n Specifies the block size of the output file, in bytes, and must be a valid size for
the output device type. For variable length blocked files, specify the maximum
size for the largest block in the file. For disk output, do not add 8 to the
OBLKSIZE= value; simply specify the block size. Block size must be a multiple
of the value specified in the LRECL= parameter.
If the block size of the output file is to be different from the block size of the
input file, then the BLKSIZE= parameter must specify the block size of the
input file and either the DYNCOPY OBLKSIZE= or the BLKSZ= parameter on
the DLBL or TLBL must be used to specify the block size of the output file.
CISIZE=n Specifies the CISIZE, in bytes, to be used for output files on FBA devices, and
is only used when COPY is specified and reblocking is not to be performed.
This parameter is ignored if the input is on a CKD device. In this case, the
CISIZE for the output file is based on the track capacity of the input CKD
device. If the input file is on tape or on FBA and this parameter is not
specified, a CISIZE of 512 will be used. Do not specify this parameter if the
DYNCOPY BLKSIZE= parameter is also specified.
FILES= | INPUT= Specifies the number of input tape or disk files to be concatenated. If
concatenating disk files the DLBL for the first file must be DISKIN, and the
DLBLs for the second and subsequent files must be DISKINn, where n is a
number from 1 to 9. If concatenating tape files, the TLBL for the first file must
be TAPEIN and the TLBLs for the second and subsequent files must be
TAPEINn, where n is a number from 1 to 9. However, if the CA Dynam/T DROP
option is used on TLBLs, the same DTF name may be used for each file.
RUN | RUNIN Specifies that all input and output tapes are to be rewound at open and
rewound and unloaded at close. If this parameter is not specified and the
NOREW or NOREWIN parameter is also not specified, the tape file(s) will be
rewound at open and close.
NOPLINE | NOSCALE Specifies that no "positioning" line is to be printed beneath the records
printed. If this parameter is not specified, a positioning line will be printed
under each record printed.
{LABEL=YES|NO} | UNLBLIN
Specifies whether the input tape file contains standard labels. LABEL=YES
indicates that the input tape contains standard labels. LABEL=NO or UNLBLIN
indicates that the input tape(s) are unlabeled.
FILEIN= | INNAME= Specifies the input DTFname to override the default name of TAPEIN, DISKIN,
or INPUT.
FILEOUT= | OUTNAME=
Specifies the output DTFname to override the default name of TAPEOUT,
DISKOUT, or OUTPUT.
HDRINFO Causes VSE to display the tape header information on the operator console
when opening the input data sets.
NOTPMK Suppresses the leading tape marks normally written before the data on
unlabeled output tapes.
Sample JCL
Example 1: Produce a hex and character dump of all records having a
customer code of 0211 or 0212. The record is 120 bytes long and the
customer code is in positions 47 of the record.
// TLBL TAPEIN,'ORDER.FILE'
// EXEC DYNCOPY,SIZE=22K
LRECL=120,RECFM=F,PRINT
SEL=47,4,EQ,C,0211
SEL=47,4,EQ,C,0212
/*
// DLBL INPUT,'INVENTORY.FILE'
// EXEC DYNCOPY
PRINT,MAX=1000,CHARONLY,LRECL=V,RECFM=VB,BLKSIZE=6000
FEOF=56,2,EQ,C,XY
SEL=1213,2,EQ,X,FFFF
/*
Example 3: Create a test file on disk from the master payroll tape file by
copying record types 1 and 5. The record number is in card column 1. The
records on tape are 100 bytes blocked 20. The output disk file records are to
be blocked 40. Get a hex dump of all records copied to the new test file.
// JOB DYNCOPY
// TLBL TAPEIN,'PAYROLL.MASTER'
// DLBL DISKOUT,'PAYROLL.TEST'
// EXEC DYNCOPY
COPY,PRINT,LRECL=100,RECFM=FB,BLKSIZE=2000,OBLKSIZE=4000
SEL=1,1,EQ,C,1
SEL=1,1,EQ,C,5
/*
/&
// JOB DYNCOPY
// DLBL DISKIN,'DISK.FILE.1' 1st input file
// DLBL DISKIN1,'DISK.FILE.2' 2nd input file
// DLBL DISKIN2,'DISK.FILE.3' 3rd input file
// TLBL OUT1,'TAPE.FILE' output
// EXEC DYNCOPY
COPY,FILES=3,FILEOUT=OUT1
/*
TDYNUTL Reports
DYNCAT Reports
TDYNVLT Reports
TDYNLIST Reports
TDYNSYNC Reports
FIDVER
OWNERID
SYSTEMID
USERID
VOLSER
ALLOCS
CREATE
MESSAGES
MULTFILE
RETENT
TECHSPEC
VAULTS
FIDEXT
REALLOC
REBLOCK
VOLFID
AVOPDAY
DAYSOLD
DAYSUNUS
FIDVER
ACTIVE
ALLTAPES
SCRATCH
CREATE
EXPIRE
FIDEXT
VOLLOC
TDYNUTL Reports
This JCL produces reports TDYNUTL-01 through TDYNUTL-09.
DSN VLT VOLSER VER VOL FIL OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION----- PED PED TAPE MSG
ID ID ID DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
BKFILE.1
A 001546 1 1 2 2 10/31/99 10/29/99 14.37 A F5 381 6250 CPJ94B 214
A 001550 2 1 2 2 10/31/99 10/29/99 07.15 A F5 383 6250 CPJ94B 134
D.FILE
A 001333 1 1 3 10/29/99 10/29/99 02.24 A F5 380 6250 CPJLB 472
A 001534 2 1 3 10/22/99 10/22/99 06.04 A F5 383 6250 CPJLB 656
A 002067 3 1 3 10/15/99 10/15/99 14.30 A F5 380 6250 CPJLB 123
DYN.AUDIT.BKUP
NO TAPE 2
F.AGNT.FILE MF
A 001120 1 1 7 4 10/01/99 10/01/99 07.58 A F6 380 6250 FMJREPRO 917
A 001183 2 1 7 4 10/01/99 10/01/99 06.56 A F6 380 6250 FMJREPRO 291
A 001231 3 1 7 4 10/01/99 10/01/99 05.58 A F6 383 6250 FMJREPRO 567
DSN VLT VOLSER VER VOL FIL OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION----- PED PED TAPE MSG
ID ID ID DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
D.SAVE.IT
A 001333 1 1 3 10/29/99 10/29/99 02.24 A F5 380 6250 CPJOB 472
A 001534 2 1 3 10/22/99 10/22/99 06.04 A F5 383 6250 CPJOB 656
A 002067 3 1 3 10/15/99 10/15/99 14.30 A F5 380 6250 CPJOB 123
DSN VLT VOLSER VER VOL FIL OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION------ PED PED TAPE MSG
ID ID ID DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
AP.MASTER.BKUP
A/P MASTER FILE BACKUP TAPE
A 000770 1 2 0 4 A BG CARP2050 01/23/86
A 002447 2 1 0 4 12/23/85 12/23/85 18.02 A BG CARP2050 01/23/86
A 000921 2 2 0 4 A BG CARP2050 01/23/86
A 001879 3 1 0 4 12/20/85 12/20/85 18.03 A BG CARP2050 01/23/86
A 002271 4 1 0 4 12/19/85 12/19/85 18.03 A BG CARP2050 01/23/86
AP.VNDR.MSTR
A/P VENDOR MASTER
A 000894 2 1 0 3 12/08/85 12/08/85 18.03 A BG CAAP0301 01/23/86
A 000083 3 1 0 3 12/13/85 12/13/85 18.03 A BG CAAP0301 01/23/86
AR.BACKUP
A/R MASTER BACKUP
A 100423 1 2 AR CM MC 0 2 A BG AR 01/23/86
A 100483 2 1 AR CM MC 0 2 12/13/83 12/13/83 18.03 A BG NNCCM 01/23/86
A 000659 3* 1 AR CM MC 0 2 06/13/83 06/13/83 18.03 A BG BAAR0605 01/23/86
AR.DESC.1
ACCNTS RECEIVABLE DESCRIPTION - FILE 1
A 100723 2 1 1 2 05/10/85 05/09/85 18.03 A BG ARDESCUP 01/23/86
A 009876 3* 1 1 2 04/20/85 04/19/85 18.03 A BG DESCUPD 01/23/86
DYNAUDT.BACKUP
DYNAM AUDIT HISTORY FILE BACKUP
EMP.MASTER.BKUP
EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
A 000505 1 2 TA 53 30 3 15 A BG EMP00901 NO
A 000679 1 3 TA 53 30 3 15 A BG EMP00901 NO
A 001794 2 1 TA 53 30 3 15 01/30/86 12/31/85 18.03 A BG EMP00901 NO
A 000926 2 2 TA 53 30 3 15 A BG EMP00901 NO
A 001283 3 1 TA 53 30 3 15 01/14/86 12/15/85 18.03 A BG EMP00901 NO
A 000428 3 2 TA 53 30 3 15 A BG EMP00901 NO
EMP.MASTER.FILE
EMPLOYEE MASTER FILE
A 000711 1 2 0 3 A BG EMP00801 01/23/86
A 000905 1 3 0 3 A BG EMP00801 01/23/86
EMP.TRAN.FILE
EMPLOYEE TRANSACTION FILE
DYNCAT Reports
// JOB DYNCAT SCRATCH DYNAM/T TAPES
// DLBL WORK1,'WORK.FILE.1',0
// EXTENT SYS001...
// ASSGN SYS001,150
// EXEC DYNCAT,SIZE=128K
SCRATCH NOLIST
/*
/&
VOLSER ----------------DATA-SET-NAME------------ VERSION VOLUME OWN SYS USR CREATION PED REMARKS
ID ID ID DATE
DEFAULT VAULT - A
VAULT SEQUENCE -
DISK ALLOCATION
---- ----------
SEQ - 0 VOLSER - SYSWK1 UNITS - TRK SYSNO - TYPE - PRIME START - 1 EXTENT 5
VAULT LOCATION - A
VOLUMES - SYSWK1
VAULT LOCATION - A
VOLUMES - SYSWK1
TDYNVLT Reports
This JCL produces reports TDYNVLT-01 through TDYNVLT-05.
CA L O C A T I O N M O V E M E N T E X I T R E P O R T TDYNVLT-01 PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 11 JAN 2007 18.06.35
VAULT A TAPE LIBRARY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FROM TO VOL.
V SLOT V SLOT VOLSER SEQ VRS DATA SET NAME COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A D 000428 02 3 EMP.MASTER.BKUP EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
A X 000926 02 2 EMP.MASTER.BKUP EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
A D 001283 01 3 EMP.MASTER.BKUP EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
A X 001794 01 2 EMP.MASTER.BKUP EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
A B 100423 02 1 AR.BACKUP A/R MASTER BACKUP
A C 100483 01 2 AR.BACKUP A/R MASTER BACKUP
A B 100486 01 1 AR.BACKUP A/R MASTER BACKUP
CA L O C A T I O N M O V E M E N T E N T R Y R E P O R T TDYNVLT-02 PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 11 JAN 2007 18.06.35
VAULT B OFFSITE VAULT LOCATION 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TO FROM VOL.
V SLOT VOLSER V SLOT SEQ VRS DATA SET NAME COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B 100423 A 02 1 AR.BACKUP A/R MASTER BACKUP
B 100486 A 01 1 AR.BACKUP A/R MASTER BACKUP
CA L O C A T I O N M O V E M E N T S U M M A R Y R E P O R T TDYNVLT-03 PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 11 JAN 2007 18.06.35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VOL. FROM TO
VOLSER SEQ VRS V SLOT V SLOT DATA SET NAME COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
000428 2 3 A D EMP.MASTER.BKUP EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
000926 2 2 A X EMP.MASTER.BKUP EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
001283 1 3 A D EMP.MASTER.BKUP EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
001794 1 2 A X EMP.MASTER.BKUP EMPLOYEE MASTER BACKUP TAPE
100423 2 1 A B AR.BACKUP A/R MASTER BACKUP
100483 1 2 A C AR.BACKUP A/R MASTER BACKUP
100486 1 1 A B AR.BACKUP A/R MASTER BACKUP
CA L O C A T I O N I N V E N T O R Y R E P O R T TDYNVLT-05 PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 11 JAN 2007 18.06.35
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VOL. LOC OW SY US
DATA SET NAME VRS VOLSER SEQ V SLOT ID ID ID COMMENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TDYNLIST Reports
// JOB TDYNLIST
// DLBL WORK1,'DYNAM.WORK.FILE.1.CPU--.=='
// EXTENT SYS003,3350WK,1,1,1,400
// EXEC TDYNLIST,SIZE=128K
TITLE=TITLE ONE
STEP=STEP ONE
DN='NUM.1',VR=1,NOTE=UPDATE MASTER FILE
DN='NUM.1',VR=2
DN='NUMBER.2',VR=3
DN='NUMBER.2',VR=2
DN='NUMBR.3',VR=1
DN='NUMBR.3',VR=2
DN='NUMBR.3',SCRATCH
DN='NUMBR.3',VR=3
NOTE=RUN THIS JOB ON THE FIRST AND 16TH OF THE MONTH
TITLE=TITLE TWO
STEP=STEP TWO
DN='NUM.1',VR=2,NOTE=PREPARE REPORTS
DN='NUMBER.2',VR=1
DN='NUMBER.2',VR=2
DN='NUMBER.2',VR=3
DN='NUMBR.3',NEW
ROUTE
/*
/&
DATE 01/11/07 TIME 16.40 DYNAM/T PULL LIST BY VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
*CA Dynam/T 7.1 0012YD700* TDYNLIST-02 PAGE 1
NUM.1 NUM001 1 1 B
NUM.1 NUM002 2 1 B
NUMBER.2 NUM021 1 1 A
NUMBER.2 NUM022 2 1 A
NUMBER.2 NUM023 3 1 A
NUMBR.3 NUM031 1 1 C
NUMBR.3 NUM032 2 1 C
NUMBR.3 NUM033 3 1 C
APPROXIMATE NUMBER SCRATCH TAPES NEEDED 1
TDYNSYNC Reports
APPLY
CATNAME=CAICATL
APPLY
CA CATALOG APPLY TDYNSYNC PAGE 1
CA Dynam . 22 MAY 2000 TIME 14.27.44
DATASET NAME EXT VOLSER VER VOL FIL VLT SLOT MESSAGE
OWN SEQ SEQ
JNB002 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B JN4281 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000027 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000028 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000029 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000030 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000031 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000032 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000033 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000034 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000035 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000036 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000037 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000038 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000039 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000510 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000511 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000512 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000513 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000514 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000515 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000516 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000517 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000518 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
B 000519 1 A ** VOLUME ADDED
APPLY TRANSACTIONS
SCRATCH 0
ADD 25
CATALOG
ACTIVE VOLUMES SCRATCHED
VOLUMES ADDED (ACTIVE EXTERNAL OWNER) 23
VOLUMES ADDED (SCRATCH) 2
EXTRACT
CATNAME=CAICATL
EXTRACT
CA CATALOG EXTRACT TDYNSYNC PAGE 1
CA Dynam . 22 MAY 2000 TIME 14.07.55
DATASET NAME EXT VOLSER VER VOL FIL VLT SLOT MESSAGE
OWN SEQ SEQ
JOETEST1 000001 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
JOETEST1 000002 2 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
DYN21.CATALOG 000003 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
DYNAM.CMS.WEEKLY 000004 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
DYNAM.CMS.DAILY 000007 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
DYN21.CATALOG 000008 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
DYNAM.DDR.MONTHLY 000009 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
UPLEX.DDR.MONTHLY 000010 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
DYNAM.DDR.MONTHLY 000011 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
UPLEX.DDR.MONTHLY 000012 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
TST21.DDR.MONTHLY 000013 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
TST21.DDR.MONTHLY 000014 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
TST21.DDR.MONTHLY 000015 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
TST21.DDR.MONTHLY 000016 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
TST21.DDR.MONTHLY 000017 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
TST21.DDR.MONTHLY 000018 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
000020 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000021 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000022 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000023 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000024 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000025 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000026 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000027 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000028 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000029 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000030 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000031 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000032 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000033 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000034 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000035 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000036 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000037 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000038 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
000039 A ** SCRATCH VOLUME
ACCT.MF1 000501 1 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
ACCT.MF1 000502 2 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
ACCT.MF1 000503 3 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
ACCT.MF2 000504 4 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
ACCT.MF2 000505 5 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
ACCT.MF3 000506 6 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
ACCT.MF3 000507 7 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
ACCT.MF4 000508 8 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
ACCT.MF4 000509 9 A ** ACTIVE VOLUME
SYNC
SYNC
CA CATALOG SYNCHRONIZATION TDYNSYNC PAGE 1
CA Dynam . 22 MAY 2000 TIME 14.07.55
CA Dynam/T CA 1 MVS
VOLSER DATA SET NAME STAT CREATED SYSTEM DATA SET NAME STAT CREATED SYSTEM DEST MESSAGE
JNB002 SCR 89109 1455 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
JN4281 JOETEST ACT 89118 1421 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000001 JOETEST1 ACT 89129 1503 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000002 JOETEST1 ACT 89129 1531 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000003 DYN21.CATALOG ACT 89129 1634 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000004 DYNAM.CMS.WEEKLY ACT 89129 1658 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000007 DYNAM.CMS.DAILY ACT 89130 1446 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000008 DYN21.CATALOG ACT 89130 1532 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000009 DYNAM.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1114 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000010 UPLEX.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1114 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000011 DYNAM.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1132 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000012 UPLEX.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1133 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000013 TST21.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1210 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000014 TST21.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1210 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000015 TST21.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1226 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000016 TST21.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1226 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000017 TST21.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1349 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000018 TST21.DDR.MONTHLY ACT 89142 1350 VM-CPU1 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000020 SCR 89142 1403 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000021 SCR 89142 1403 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000022 SCR 89142 1403 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000023 SCR 89142 1403 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000024 SCR 89142 1403 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000025 SCR 89142 1403 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000026 SCR 89142 1403 SYS2 VOLSER NOT ON SYS2 EXTRACT
000027 SCR 89142 1403 DYN21C.IJSYSBK ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000028 SCR 89142 1403 DYN21C.IJSYSBK ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000029 SCR 89142 1403 DYN21C.IJSYSBK ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000030 SCR 89142 1403 DYN21C.IJSYSBK ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000031 SCR 89142 1403 DYN21C.IJSYSBK ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000032 SCR 89142 1403 DYNB21C.DYNBBKUP ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000033 SCR 89142 1403 DYNB21C.DYNBBKUP ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000034 SCR 89142 1403 DYNB21C.DYNBBKUP ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000035 SCR 89142 1403 DYNB21C.DYNBBKUP ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000036 SCR 89142 1403 DYNB21C.DYNBBKUP ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000037 SCR 89142 1403 DYNB21C.DYNBBKUP ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000038 SCR 89142 1403 DYNB21C.DYNBBKUP ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000039 SCR 89142 1403 DYNB21C.DYNBBKUP ACT 89135 1717 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLUME STATUS DOES NOT MATCH
000501 ACCT.MF1 ACT 89142 1352VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000502 ACCT.MF1 ACT 89142 1352VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000503 ACCT.MF1 ACT 89142 1352VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000504 ACCT.MF2 ACT 89142 1352VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000505 ACCT.MF2 ACT 89142 1352VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000506 ACCT.MF3 ACT 89142 1352VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000507 ACCT.MF3 ACT 89142 1352VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000508 ACCT.MF4 ACT 89142 1353VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000509 ACCT.MF4 ACT 89142 1353VSE-CPU1 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS2 EACH SYSTEM CLAIMS OWNERSHIP
000510 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000511 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000512 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000513 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000514 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000515 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000516 DYN21.CMS.DAILY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000517 DYN21.CMS.WEEKLY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000518 DYN21.CMS.WEEKLY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
000519 DYN21.CMS.WEEKLY ACT 89135 1716 VM-CPU1 SYS1 VOLSER NOT ON SYS1 EXTRACT
SYS1 SYS2
TOTAL RECORDS READ 45 34
TOTAL RECORDS WRITTEN 25 32
TOTAL RECORDS INVALID 0 0
CA A C T I V E C A T A L O G F I L E S ACTVFILE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.06.37
== SORTED BY FILE-ID/VERSION (DEFAULT) == SELECT: FID
DSN VLT VOLSER VER VOL FSQ OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION------------ PED PED TAPE MSG
TYPE /EXT DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
YDPRASAM.01.AP.MASTER
THIS FILE UPDATED DAILY
DISK T33500 1 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 2 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 3 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 4 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.02.OPTICAL.DATA
DISK T33800 1 1 0 DS VS WD 1 -RETAIN- 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.03.AP.VENDOR
DISK T33800 1 1 0 LT TS CA 183 06/24/00 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.04.EMP.MASTER
DISK T33802 1 1 0 LT TS WD 1 90 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.12.FIXED.ASSETS
DISK T33800 1 1 0 1 3 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.13.AP.DESCR1
DISK T33500 1 1 0 1 7 02/28/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 2 1 0 1 7 02/28/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 3 1 0 1 7 02/28/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
CA A C T I V E C A T A L O G F I L E S ACTVFILE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.06.37
== SORTED BY OWNER-ID/FILE-ID/VERSION == SELECT: OWNE
DSN VLT VOLSER VER VOL FSQ OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION------------ PED PED TAPE MSG
TYPE /EXT DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
YDPRASAM.01.AP.MASTER
THIS FILE UPDATED DAILY
DISK T33500 1 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 2 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 3 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 4 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.02.OPTICAL.DATA
DISK T33800 1 1 0 DS VS WD 1 -RETAIN- 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
CA A C T I V E C A T A L O G F I L E S ACTVFILE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.06.37
== SORTED BY SYSTEM-ID/FILE-ID/VERSION == SELECT: SYSTE
DSN VLT VOLSER VER VOL FSQ OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION------------ PED PED TAPE MSG
TYPE /EXT DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
YDPRASAM.01.AP.MASTER
THIS FILE UPDATED DAILY
DISK T33500 1 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 2 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 3 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 4 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.03.AP.VENDOR
DISK T33800 1 1 0 LT TS CA 183 06/24/00 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.04.EMP.MASTER
DISK T33802 1 1 0 LT TS WD 1 90 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
CA A C T I V E C A T A L O G F I L E S ACTVFILE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.06.37
== SORTED BY USER-ID/FILE-ID/VERSION == SELECT: USE
DSN VLT VOLSER VER VOL FSQ OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION------------ PED PED TAPE MSG
TYPE /EXT DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
YDPRASAM.01.AP.MASTER
THIS FILE UPDATED DAILY
DISK T33500 1 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 2 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 3 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33500 4 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.03.AP.VENDOR
DISK T33800 1 1 0 LT TS CA 183 06/24/00 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
CA A C T I V E C A T A L O G F I L E S ACTVFILE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.06.37
== SORTED BY VOLSER/FILESEQ/FILE-ID == SELECT: VOL
TYPE VLT VOLSER VER VOL FSQ OW SY US ----RETENTION-INFO---- -----------CREATION-INFORMATION------------ PED PED TAPE MSG
DSN /EXT DAY NGEN NOAC EXP-DATE DATE TIME CPU PT CUU MODE LEN JOB-NAME CYC ERRS
YDPRASAM.14.EMP.BIOG.DATA
PASSWORD PROTECTED DSN
DISK T33500
YDPRASAM.01.AP.MASTER
1 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.01.AP.MASTER
2 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.01.AP.MASTER
3 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.01.AP.MASTER
4 1 0 DS TS CA 1 6 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.13.AP.DESCR1
1 1 0 1 7 02/28/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.13.AP.DESCR1
2 1 0 1 7 02/28/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.13.AP.DESCR1
3 1 0 1 7 02/28/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
DISK T33800
YDPRASAM.02.OPTICAL.DATA
1 1 0 DS VS WD 1 -RETAIN- 12/23/99 15:05 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.03.AP.VENDOR
1 1 0 LT TS CA 183 06/24/00 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
YDPRASAM.12.FIXED.ASSETS
1 1 0 1 3 12/30/99 12/23/99 15:06 A BG 181 YDPRASAM
FILEDEFS
CA C A T A L O G F I L E D E F I N I T I O N S FILEDEFS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.00.58
== SORTED BY FILE-ID: DISK ALLOCATION SPECIFICATIONS == SELECT:
TYPE VERS -------------- DATA SET NAME--------------- ------ PRIMARY EXTENT ------ ------- SECONDARY EXTENTS ------- LOGICAL
VOLSER -START- --SIZE- UNITS TRIES VOLSER -START- --SIZE- UNITS UNIT
CA C A T A L O G F I L E D E F I N I T I O N S FILEDEFS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.00.58
== SORTED BY FILE-ID: CATALOG MAINTENANCE INFORMATION == SELECT:
TYPE VERS -------------- DATA SET NAME--------------- --DATE-- --TIME-- CPU PART JOBNAME PROCNAME STEPNAME SYSNAME
CA C A T A L O G F I L E D E F I N I T I O N S FILEDEFS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.00.58
== SORTED BY FILE-ID: COMMENT AND MESSAGES == SELECT:
DISK 4 YDPRFSAM.01.AP.MASTER
COMMENT: THIS FILE UPDATED DAILY
DISK 1 YDPRFSAM.02.OPTICAL.DATA
TO: PROGRAMMER OPEN INPUT MESSAGE: RETURN OUTPUT OPT ICAL DEPT.
FI 1 YDPRFSAM.03.AP.VENDOR
TO: OPERATOR OPEN OUTPUT MESSAGE: USE RESERVED SPACE 32
FI 1 YDPRFSAM.04.EMP.MASTER
TO: OPER & PROG CLOSE INPUT MESSAGE: FILE TERMINATED
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.11.***.PRODUCT.DATA
COMMENT: INFO FIELD TESTS
FI 1 YDPRFSAM.12.FIXED.ASSETS
TO: OPERATOR OPEN INPUT MESSAGE: FILE CONTENTS NEVER CHANGE
TO: OPERATOR CLOSE INPUT MESSAGE: CONTENTS SAME
YDPRFSAM.14.EMP.BIOG.DATA === PASSWORD PROTECTED DATASET ===
CA C A T A L O G F I L E D E F I N I T I O N S FILEDEFS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.00.58
== SORTED BY FILE-ID: MULTIFILE SET INFORMATION == SELECT:
CA C A T A L O G F I L E D E F I N I T I O N S FILEDEFS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.00.58
== SORTED BY FILE-ID: DEFAULT RETENTION SPECIFICATIONS == SELECT:
TYPE VERS -------------- DATA SET NAME--------------- EXPDATE RETN DAYS VERSIONS NOACC DAYS DISK PERIOD-ENDING DATE/CYCLES
GEN
DISK 4 YDPRFSAM.01.AP.MASTER 1 6 4
DISK 1 YDPRFSAM.02.OPTICAL.DATA -RETAIN- 1
FI 1 YDPRFSAM.03.AP.VENDOR 183
FI 1 YDPRFSAM.04.EMP.MASTER 1 90
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.05.PAYROLL.MASTER 1 9 12/31/** 2
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.06.PAYROLL.TRANS 1 9 12/31/** 2
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.07.PAYROLL.CURR 1 9 12/31/** 2
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.08.PAYROLL.PREV 1 9 12/31/** 2
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.09.PAYROLL.TOTALS 1 9 12/31/** 2
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.10.OPT.DESCRIPT 1 20 **/01/** 12
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.11.***.PRODUCT.DATA 1
FI 1 YDPRFSAM.12.FIXED.ASSETS 1 3 1
FI 3 YDPRFSAM.13.AP.DESCR1 02/28/99 1 7 3
YDPRFSAM.14.EMP.BIOG.DATA === PASSWORD PROTECTED DATASET ===
CA C A T A L O G F I L E D E F I N I T I O N S FILEDEFS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.00.58
== SORTED BY FILE-ID: ADMIN. AND TECH. SPECS. == SELECT:
TYPE VERS -------------- DATA SET NAME--------------- OW SY US AUTO OPENS TYPE FMT LRECL BLKSZ KEYLN KEY BUFFERS TAPE VWL
SQNO OFFSET NO. T A SZ MODE
CA C A T A L O G F I L E D E F I N I T I O N S FILEDEFS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.00.58
== SORTED BY FILE-ID: VAULT ROTATION INFORMATION == SELECT:
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.05.PAYROLL.MASTER
AAADUSF
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.10.OPT.DESCRIPT
AAFFSUDDDSA
TAPE 0 YDPRFSAM.11.***.PRODUCT.DATA
AFSUUDSUUFF
YDPRFSAM.14.EMP.BIOG.DATA === PASSWORD PROTECTED DATASET ===
|----+----|----+----|----+----|----+----|----+----|----+----|----+----|----+----|----+----|----+----|
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
FREQUSE
CA F I L E U S A G E F R E Q U E N C Y FREQUSE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.53.26
== SORTED BY AVERAGE OPENS PER DAY == SELECT: AVOP
DAYS AVERAGE
EXTS FIRST CREATION EXP. LAST ACCESS JOBNAME W/O TOTAL OPENS
VER FILE IDENTIFICATION VLS VOLUME DATE DATE DATE TIME CREATOR LAST OPEN OPENS PER DAY
CA F I L E U S A G E F R E Q U E N C Y FREQUSE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.53.26
== SORTED BY DESCENDING DAYS-SINCE-CREATION == SELECT: DAYS
DAYS AVERAGE
EXTS FIRST CREATION EXP. LAST ACCESS JOBNAME W/O TOTAL OPENS
VER FILE IDENTIFICATION VLS VOLUME DATE DATE DATE TIME CREATOR LAST OPEN OPENS PER DAY
CA F I L E U S A G E F R E Q U E N C Y FREQUSE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.53.26
== SORTED BY DESCENDING DAYS NOT USED == SELECT: DAYSU
DAYS AVERAGE
EXTS FIRST CREATION EXP. LAST ACCESS JOBNAME W/O TOTAL OPENS
VER FILE IDENTIFICATION VLS VOLUME DATE DATE DATE TIME CREATOR LAST OPEN OPENS PER DAY
CA F I L E U S A G E F R E Q U E N C Y FREQUSE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 15.53.26
== SORTED BY FILE-ID/VERSION (DEFAULT) == SELECT: FID
DAYS AVERAGE
EXTS FIRST CREATION EXP. LAST ACCESS JOBNAME W/O TOTAL OPENS
VER FILE IDENTIFICATION VLS VOLUME DATE DATE DATE TIME CREATOR LAST OPEN OPENS PER DAY
SPACEUSE
CA D I S K S P A C E U S A G E A N A L Y S I S SPACEUSE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 22/01/07 13.56.27
== SORTED ON FILE-ID/EXTENT (DEFAULT) == SELECT: FID
END OF REPORT
CA D I S K S P A C E U S A G E A N A L Y S I S SPACEUSE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 22/01/07 13.56.27
== SORTED ON DECREASING ALLOCATION ERROR PERCENTAGE == SELECT: REAL
END OF REPORT
CA D I S K S P A C E U S A G E A N A L Y S I S SPACEUSE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 22/01/07 13.56.27
== SORTED BY DECREASING GAIN WITH OPTIMUM BLOCKSIZE == SELECT: REBL
END OF REPORT
CA D I S K S P A C E U S A G E A N A L Y S I S SPACEUSE PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 22/01/07 13.56.27
== SORTED ON VOLID / FILE-ID == SELECT: VOL
TAPES
CA T A P E I N V E N T O R Y R E P O R T TAPES PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 16.13.35
== SORTED BY VOLSER/FILESEQ - ACTIVE TAPES == SELECT: ACT
CA T A P E I N V E N T O R Y R E P O R T TAPES PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 16.13.35
== SORTED BY VOLSER/FILESEQ -- ALL TAPES (DEFAULT) == SELECT: ALLTA
CA T A P E I N V E N T O R Y R E P O R T TAPES PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23/01/07 16.20.49
== SORTED BY VOLSER/FILESEQ -- SCRATCH TAPES == SELECT: SCRA
TAPE ERRS
VOLSER OWNER -------------LAST DATA SET NAME------------- SCRATCHED LENGTH MODE OUT IN REASON FOR SCRATCH REMARKS
VTOCS
CA V O L U M E T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S VTOCS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 22/01/07 12.19.11
== SORTED ON CREATION DATE/FILE-ID/EXTENT SEQ NO. == SELECT: CRE
FILE IDENTIFICATION FILE LOW HIGH -REL TRK/BLK- DEVICE VOL -EXTENT- CREATE EXPIRE
-------------------------------------------- TYPE EXTENT EXTENT START NUMBER VOLSER TYPE SEQ TYPE SQ -------- -------- STAT
--- VOLUME TABLE OF CONTENTS --- VTOC 0-00 0-00 0 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0
--- VOLUME TABLE OF CONTENTS --- VTOC 0-00 0-00 0 1 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0
WARNING--YOU HAVE EXCEEDED MINI-DISK SIZE DAM 2-00 554-29 60 16590 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 11/18/99 --PERM--
WARNING--YOU HAVE EXCEEDED MINI-DISK SIZE DAM 2-00 554-29 60 16590 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0 11/18/99 --PERM--
DDSIXXXX.TEST.SORTIN.FILE SAM 1-20 1-27 50 8 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.FILE.P3350N.2VOLS SAM 0-01 0-01 1 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 + 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
SAM 0-02 0-02 2 1 P33502 3350 2 PRIM 1 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
TEST.FILE.P3350T.POOL SAM 0-08 0-08 8 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 12/28/99
TEST.FILE.P33501.PERM SAM 0-05 0-05 5 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.FILE.P33501.RETAIN SAM 0-02 0-02 2 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
SAM 0-03 0-03 3 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 1 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
SAM 0-04 0-04 4 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 2 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
TEST.FILE.P33502.PERM SAM 0-01 0-01 1 1 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#01 SAM 0-06 0-06 6 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#02 SAM 0-07 0-07 7 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#03 SAM 0-09 0-09 9 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P3350B.POOL.MWF G#01 SAM 1-00 1-00 30 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P3350B.POOL.MWF G#02 SAM 1-00 1-00 30 1 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P3350B.POOL.MWF G#03 SAM 1-01 1-01 31 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#04 SAM 0-10 0-10 10 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/22/99 --PERM--
CA V O L U M E T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S VTOCS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 22/01/07 12.19.11
== SORTED ON EXPIRATION DATE/FILE -ID/EXTENT SEQ NO. == SELECT: EXP
FILE IDENTIFICATION FILE LOW HIGH -REL TRK/BLK- DEVICE VOL -EXTENT- CREATE EXPIRE
-------------------------------------------- TYPE EXTENT EXTENT START NUMBER VOLSER TYPE SEQ TYPE SQ -------- -------- STAT
CA V O L U M E T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S VTOCS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 22/12/07 12.19.11
== SORTED ON FILE-ID/EXTENT SEQ NO. (DEFAULT) == SELECT: FID
FILE IDENTIFICATION FILE LOW HIGH -REL TRK/BLK- DEVICE VOL -EXTENT- CREATE EXPIRE
-------------------------------------------- TYPE EXTENT EXTENT START NUMBER VOLSER TYPE SEQ TYPE SQ -------- -------- STAT
--- VOLUME TABLE OF CONTENTS --- VTOC 0-00 0-00 0 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0
--- VOLUME TABLE OF CONTENTS --- VTOC 0-00 0-00 0 1 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0
DDSIXXXX.TEST.SORTIN.FILE SAM 1-20 1-27 50 8 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.FILE.P3350N.2VOLS SAM 0-01 0-01 1 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 + 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
SAM 0-02 0-02 2 1 P33502 3350 2 PRIM 1 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
TEST.FILE.P3350T.POOL SAM 0-08 0-08 8 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 12/28/99
TEST.FILE.P33501.PERM SAM 0-05 0-05 5 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.FILE.P33501.RETAIN SAM 0-02 0-02 2 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
SAM 0-03 0-03 3 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 1 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
SAM 0-04 0-04 4 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 2 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
TEST.FILE.P33502.PERM SAM 0-01 0-01 1 1 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#01 SAM 0-06 0-06 6 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#02 SAM 0-07 0-07 7 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#03 SAM 0-09 0-09 9 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#04 SAM 0-10 0-10 10 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/22/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P3350B.POOL.MWF G#01 SAM 1-00 1-00 30 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P3350B.POOL.MWF G#02 SAM 1-00 1-00 30 1 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P3350B.POOL.MWF G#03 SAM 1-01 1-01 31 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
WARNING--YOU HAVE EXCEEDED MINI-DISK SIZE DAM 2-00 554-29 60 16590 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 11/18/99 --PERM--
WARNING--YOU HAVE EXCEEDED MINI-DISK SIZE DAM 2-00 554-29 60 16590 P33502 3350 1 PRIM 0 11/18/99 --PERM--
CA V O L U M E T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S VTOCS PAGE 1
CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 22/01/07 12.19.11
== SORTED ON VOLID/LOCATION == SELECT: VOL
FILE IDENTIFICATION FILE LOW HIGH -REL TRK/BLK- DEVICE VOL -EXTENT- CREATE EXPIRE
-------------------------------------------- TYPE EXTENT EXTENT START NUMBER VOLSER TYPE SEQ TYPE SQ -------- -------- STAT
--- VOLUME TABLE OF CONTENTS --- VTOC 0-00 0-00 0 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0
TEST.FILE.P3350N.2VOLS SAM 0-01 0-01 1 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 + 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
TEST.FILE.P33501.RETAIN SAM 0-02 0-02 2 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
TEST.FILE.P33501.RETAIN SAM 0-03 0-03 3 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 1 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
TEST.FILE.P33501.RETAIN SAM 0-04 0-04 4 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 2 12/21/99 -RETAIN-
TEST.FILE.P33501.PERM SAM 0-05 0-05 5 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#01 SAM 0-06 0-06 6 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#02 SAM 0-07 0-07 7 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.FILE.P3350T.POOL SAM 0-08 0-08 8 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 12/28/99
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#03 SAM 0-09 0-09 9 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P33NNN.GENERIC G#04 SAM 0-10 0-10 10 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/22/99 --PERM--
* * * - FREE SPACE - * * * 0-11 0-29 11 19
TEST.GDG.P3350B.POOL.MWF G#01 SAM 1-00 1-00 30 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
TEST.GDG.P3350B.POOL.MWF G#03 SAM 1-01 1-01 31 1 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 12/21/99 --PERM--
* * * - FREE SPACE - * * * 1-02 1-29 32 28
WARNING--YOU HAVE EXCEEDED MINI-DISK SIZE DAM 2-00 554-29 60 16590 P33501 3350 1 PRIM 0 11/18/99 --PERM--
P33501
CA CA Dynam 7.1 0709YD000 23 JAN 2007 18.19.03 AUDIT TRAIL UTILITY PROGRAM PAGE 1
PROGRAM DYNAM/T
INPUT DATASET
GENERATE
01/23/86 18.16 0181 3420 BG GK53BKUP DYNCAT OUT OPEN 000910 IJSYSBK DYN53.BACKUP.RCVR
01/23/86 18.17 0181 3420 BG GK53BKUP DYNCAT OUT CLOSE 000910 IJSYSBK DYN53.BACKUP.RCVR
ASI PROC CI
Automated system initialization procedure. Control interval. Unit of data (group of records)
Operating system startup commands read from transmitted to or from storage.
a procedure library.
CKD
AVR Count-key-data. Disk storage device that
Automatic volume recognition. Provides for stores data in three fields:
automatic assignment of a mounted disk by count field (address - by cylinder, head and
searching for the volume serial number of the record number - and length of record)
EXTENT statement. The ASSGN statement is key field (for searching), and
not needed and the user does not have to actual data of record
know the physical device address.
cuu
CA Dynam Catalog Channel and unit address. Tape or disk device
Disk file which stores file attributes and address.
information necessary for processing those
files. DA
Direct access. A method of locating a record
CA Dynam/D directly rather than by searching through all
CA disk management software package. previous records.
Provides catalog, disk pool and enhanced VTOC
management.
Glossary–1
DASD FBA
Direct access storage device. Any storage Fixed block architecture. A DASD architecture
device that can immediately read or write where data is stored in fixed-size blocks that
anywhere on its recording surface. are addressed by a block number relative to
the start of the file.
DSCB
Data set control block. A record in the DASD GETVIS
VTOC containing control and descriptive A dynamically managed storage area.
information about a data set.
home address
DTF Address of track relative to start of volume.
Define the file. A control block used for
sequential or unit record access methods. For IOCS
example, DTFMT is sequential tape. Input/output control system. Used to transfer
data between main storage and auxiliary
DVCDN status storage devices.
Device down status. Device is not available.
IPL
DVCUP status Initial program load. Starting up of a computer
Device up status. Device is available. system.
DYNACC keyword
CA general interface to the CA Dynam Catalog. A predefined word that identifies an operand
It accepts data requests, searches the Catalog and is part of that operand. For example, the
and returns data suitably formatted for keyword in BLKSZ=1210 is BLKSZ. The
building reports. keyword is the whole operand in the CA
Dynam/FI option RUN.
DYNCAT
A CA utility program used to create, maintain LIOCS
and report on the CA Dynam Catalog. Logical input/output control system. Group of
macro instructions which create, retrieve and
DYNDART change data files.
A CA utility program used to generate reports
for CA Dynam Catalog. LTA
Logical transient area. Temporary storage area
DYNPRINT used by system routines.
A CA common reporting component used by
the CA Dynam VSE family. Through CA Earl, it LUB
can generate both standard and user- Logical unit block. Programmer logical unit or
customized reports on CA Dynam tape, disk, SYSnumber. Used instead of actual device
and Catalog activity. address.
parameter SD file
A variable that specifies a value or an Sequential disk file. File that is located by first
operation to be performed. Used reading previous files.
interchangeably with 'operand.'
SVA
PIOCS Shared virtual area. Storage area for system
Physical input/output control system. Controls support and use.
the actual transfer of records between main
storage and auxiliary storage devices. track mapping
Combining all key and data records from
PUB original CKD track into one control interval.
Physical unit block. Table which describes the
input/output devices defined to the system. TDYNSYNC
A CA utility program that provides tape volume
record mapping synchronization between two catalogs that
Creating separate control intervals for each share tape volume status information.
data record on original CKD track.
truncation
recovery Release of unused disk space allocated for a
Retrieving, securing and protecting data by file.
restoring a backup tape and then updating it.
unit record simulation
restore utility Specifying a unit record device (card reader,
A program used to secure and protect data by printer, card punch) to be simulated as a tape,
retrieving, reading and loading the most recent sequential disk or VSAM file (as used in CA
backup tape. Dynam/FI).
RPL VCKD
Request parameter list. A control block with Virtual count-key-data. (See CKD.)
information needed to process an I/O request.
work file (work data set)
sequential access File (data set) used temporarily when extra or
Locating a record by going through all previous intermediate storage is needed for the
records one after the other, starting at record processing of a job.
1.
scratch
Erase or overwrite data that is no longer
needed or that has expired.
scratch tape
Tape that is available for reuse.
Glossary–3
Index
Active tapes, 3-42
Allocating
1400 Emulator tapes, 2-7 disk space
FBA disk files, 6-46, 6-51
minimum percentage, 4-35
LUBs, 2-14
3
scratch tapes, 2-2, 2-53
ALTER
3494 tape libraries, 3-52
command (DYNUTIL), 5-13
response to MOUNT message, 2-15, 2-21
Altering
data set
Absolute generation number, 4-22
ownership, 2-57
ACCEPT response to MOUNT message, 2-16, password, 2-57
2-21 retention characteristics, 2-48
to drop a TLBL, 2-56
Accepting control statements from SYSIPT, 3-9
Altering data set characteristics, 8-17
ACCESS command (DYNPRINT), 9-3
AMF (Automatic Multifile), 2-69
Accessing
generation data sets, 4-22 APPLY
the Catalog file, 2-7 command (TDYNSYNC), 3-19
report, 3-23
Accessing the Catalog, 9-2, 9-14
AR commands
ACTION command (DYNCAT), 8-11
answering mount messages, 2-17
Activating disk bypass status/control, 4-32
automatic cataloging, 2-60 DTPATH query/control of XSYSTEM, 2-25
AVR, 2-12 tape drive status/control, 2-24
VCKD, 6-44
ASA, 4-17
Active cataloged files, 9-16
Index–1
ASCII tape Auxiliary messages, 7-26
DTF restriction, 6-3
AVR
support, 2-73
activating, 2-12
AS-OF-DATE, 8-55 defining disk volumes, 4-32
disk files, 4-24
AS-OF-DATE retention, 2-9
finding scratch tapes during, 2-52
ASSGN function (TDYNASN), 2-7, 3-2, 3-3 functioning of, 2-29, 2-64
implementing, 2-73
Assigning
input tape selection, 2-53
logical unit, 3-3
invoking with OPEN, 3-5
mode in TLBL, 2-46
length checking during, 2-41
scratch tapes, 2-16
output tape selection, 2-17
tape files to physical devices, 2-12, 2-13
overriding, 2-84
volume serial numbers, 2-6
positioning multifile data sets, 2-14
Asterisks in AMF DSN, 2-69 purpose of, 2-12
searching in desired order, 2-84
Audit data set
tape files, 2-12
also see AUDTUTIL, 12-1
verifying tape ownership, 2-58
backup tapes, 12-4, 12-6
with
logging, 12-2
CA Dynam/D, 4-24
recovering the Catalog, 12-4
utility programs, 3-1
reporting commands, 12-11
Index–3
CA Dynam/T, 2-73, 3-1, 3-2, 3-4 DYNAM DISplay VOLume, 7-46
CADynam/D, 4-18 DYNAM MENU, 7-9
DYNAM SELect DATaset, 7-11
CA SRAM with CA Dynam/FI, 6-8, 6-14, 6-19
DYNAM SELect TAPE, 7-40
CA 1 interface summary, 7-4
catalog synchronization, 3-16 local commands, 7-6
DYNCOMM task, 3-22 overview, 7-1, 7-4
message paths, 2-25, 3-16 panel summary, 7-4
PATH command, 2-25 PF keys, 7-1
Primary Selection Panel (CUI-MENU), 7-8
CAIAUDIT
Tape
data sets
Directory panel (CAYD-3100), 7-44
all products directory, 11-4
Selection panel (CAYD-3000), 7-40
displaying a product-specific directory,
Version Detail panel (CAYD-2190),
11-2
7-37
displaying records, 11-4
Version List panel (CAYD-2160), 7-31
selecting records, 11-2
Volume Detail panel (CAYD-3110),
viewing records, 11-4
7-47
in command mode, 11-14
in prompt mode, 11-1 CAIMACC queue file, 3-17
CAICUI (common user interface) CAISPI, CAICUI panels Primary Selection Panel
accessing, 7-7 (CUI-MENU), 7-8
Auxiliary Record panel (CAYD-2140), 7-27
Catalog
Data Set
Access Facility, 9-2, 9-14
Directory panel (CAYD-2100), 7-13
accessing, 2-7, 6-42
Disk Option panel (CAYD-2120), 7-22
adding
on Volume panel (CAYD-3120), 7-50
disk data sets, 4-29
Option panel (CAYD-2130), 7-24
tape data sets, 2-37
Selection panel (CAYD-2000), 7-11
VTAPE versions, 3-56
Disk
backing up, 2-54
Version Detail panel (CAYD-2180),
destroying, 8-69
7-35
management
Version List panel (CAYD-2150), 7-29
disk files, 4-7
FI Version List panel (CAYD-2170), 7-33
tape files, 2-2, 2-60
File Management Panel (CAYD-0000), 7-9
multifile-volume data sets, 2-63
global commands
overriding cataloged mode, 2-46
DYNAM DISplay AUXiliary, 7-26
ownership, 2-56
DYNAM DISplay DISKlist, 7-29
protecting, 2-56, 8-67
DYNAM DISplay DISKVersion, 7-34
purpose of, 2-2
DYNAM DISplay DSNDETail, 7-15
recovery, 12-2, 12-4
DYNAM DISplay DSNDIRectory, 7-13
reporting, customized, DYNPRINT program,
DYNAM DISplay DSNDOPTions, 7-22
9-16
DYNAM DISplay DSNTOPTions, 7-24
reporting, standard
DYNAM DISplay DSNVOLume, 7-50
on active files, 9-16
DYNAM DISplay FIlist, 7-32
on file definitions, 9-19
DYNAM DISplay TAPEDirectory, 7-44
on file usage, 9-21
DYNAM DISplay TAPElist, 7-31
synchronization, 3-16
DYNAM DISplay TAPEVersion, 7-37
updating, 2-8, 2-53, 3-6, 3-14
Index–5
D protection, 2-7
retention, 2-8, 8-44
scratching versions, 2-10
DA files selecting a CAUDPCn record, 11-2
assigning logical units, 4-9 selection, 7-11
deleting, 4-42 specifying for input processing of VTAPE
Data sets files, 3-55
accessing tape, 7-24
disk pools, 4-30 temporary, 2-51, 2-61, 4-8
generation, 4-22 versions, 7-29, 7-31, 7-32, 7-34, 7-37
tape, 2-57 viewing a CAUDPCn record, 11-4
active versions, 7-29, 7-31, 7-32, 7-34, work, 2-49
7-37 Data Sets
altering characteristics, 8-17 partition independent, 2-49
automatic multifile
defining, 2-69, 2-70 DATASET command (AUDTUTIL), 12-10
renaming, 2-72 Date
report fields and comments, 3-43 processing, 4-43
scratching, 2-71 retention, 2-9, 2-10
volume switching, 2-70
cataloging Default allocation, 4-10
tape, 2-55, 2-60 DEFINE command (DYNCAT), 8-44
control, 2-7
CPU-independent, 2-50 Defining
creating, 2-2 automatic multifile data sets, 2-69, 2-70
defining, 7-15 Catalog ownership, 2-56
defining multifile-volume, 2-62, 2-65 data sets, 7-15
directory, 7-13 disk pool volumes, 4-30, 4-32
Disk Option Panel (CAYD-2120), 7-22 DLBL options, 4-14, 6-10, 6-15
FI, 7-22, 7-24 dynamic LUB allocation, 4-27
forcing input, 2-55 FBA disk files, 6-47
generation generation data sets, 4-20
deleting, 4-22 independent files, 2-49, 4-38
retention, 2-9 LUB ranges, 4-27
list, 2-54 message paths, 3-16
MACC queue files, 3-16 multifile-volume data sets, 2-62, 2-65
maintenance, 7-10 partition-independent files, 4-38
multiple disk versions, 4-20 SYSPCH tape, 3-6
naming tape
file, 2-2 data sets, 2-3
in the Catalog, 6-37 drive pools, 2-13
multifile-volumes, 2-63 tape volumes, 7-46
tape, 2-2 TLBL options, 2-30, 6-10
temporary, 4-8 DELETE command (DYNCAT), 8-63
naming via DYNCAT, 8-54, 8-56, 8-57
output, 2-53 DELETE command (DYNUTIL), 5-17
overriding mode of, 2-46 Deleting
ownership of, 2-57 DA files, 4-42
positioning multifile-volume tapes, 2-14 expired files, 4-13
Index–7
DYNAM/T option record parameters, 13-2
MULTCPU parameter, 2-50 requirements, 13-1
processing
DYNEEXIT user exit, 10-18
common LOCK name, 2-84
FLT option, 2-73 DYNINFO
VOLSER= option, 2-82 area (DYNACC), 10-2
record layout, 10-6
Dynamic LUB allocation, 2-14, 4-27
request fields, 10-12
DYNATEST program return codes, 10-15
functions, 10-18
DYNOPEN utility program
parameters, 10-19
DITTO, 5-8
syntax, 10-19
IDCAMS, 5-8
DYNCAT command (CAICUI), 7-6 pre-open processing, 5-8
restarting checkpointed files, 4-52
DYNCAT utility program, 3-17, 7-6
commands DYNPRINT standard reports
ACTION, 8-11 SPACEUSE, 5-43
ADD, 8-12 TAPES, 3-28
ALTER, 8-17 VTOCS, 5-47
BACKUP, 8-41
DYNPRINT utility program
DEFINE, 8-44
commands, 9-2
DELETE, 8-63
control statements, 9-2
DEQUEUE, 8-66
customized reports, 9-8
END, 8-67
requirements for, 9-3, 9-10
INITIAL, 8-67
standard reports
INT and INTR, 8-69
ACTVFILE, 9-16
LISTCAT, 8-73
FILEDEFS, 9-19
MACC, 8-75
FREQUSE, 9-21
MCAT, 8-76
overview, 9-6
OWN, 8-77
RENAME, 8-78 DYNREAD interface, 9-2, 9-14
RESTORE, 8-80
DYNUTIL utility program
RESTORE REORG, 8-41
commands
SCRATCH, 8-83
ALTER, 5-13
SCRPOOL, 8-86
CLOSE, 5-16
STATUS, 8-90
DELETE, 5-17
VAULT, 8-91
DISPLAY, 5-19
VTOC, 8-93
DUMP, 5-21
control statement format, 8-2
LISTTAPE, 5-24
functions, 8-3
OPEN, 5-25
processing options, 8-11
REORG, 5-26
summary of control statements, 8-5, 8-6,
RESTORE, 5-37
8-7, 8-8, 8-10, 8-11
summary, 5-12
DYNCOMM task, 3-22 TAPE, 5-40
TRACE, 5-42
DYNCONV utility program, 5-3
DYNVTOC utility program
DYNCOPY, File Utility program
report headings, 9-26
examples, 13-6
UPSI settings, 9-24
general, 13-1
Index–9
Frequency of file usage, 9-19 I
FREQUSE report, 9-21
INPUT=parameter,
HDR1 information, 2-38 DYNCOPY program, 13-5
HDRINFO= parameter, DYNCOPY program, Inputting automatic multifile data sets, 2-71
13-6
Job LUB
control, conversion, 5-3 allocation
exit facility (FI), 6-11, 6-42 defining, 4-27
dynamic, 2-14
prohibiting, 4-18
recommended, 4-9
L processing, 4-25
ranges, 4-27
Label
prefix, 3-13
processing area, 2-72
with TDYNASN, 3-7
Index–11
M MOVEMENT command (TDYNVLT), 3-49, 3-51
MTC, 3-6
MACC command (DYNCAT), 8-75 Multi
MACC queue files ACCESS queue files
creating, 3-16 creating, 3-16
formatting, 3-17 formatting, 3-17
Mapping FBA disk files, 6-44, 6-45, 6-46, 6-48 Multifile-volume data sets
adding versions, 2-64
MAX= parameter, DYNCOPY program, 13-4 cataloging, 2-63
Maximizing tape resources, 2-12 defining, 2-62, 2-65
generating DSNs for, 2-69
MCAT command (DYNCAT), 8-76 identical dtfnames, 2-67
MENU command (CAICUI), 7-8 input and output, 2-66
maintaining, 2-64
Messages naming, 2-63
answering, 2-17, 2-18, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, processing, 2-65
2-22, 2-23, 2-29 reporting TAPE ERRS, 3-43
auxiliary, 7-26 restrictions, 2-64
for data sets, 8-20, 8-47 retention characteristics, 2-63
operator recovery actions, 4-36 STACK option, 2-67
paths, initializing, 3-17 support for, 2-62
responses, mounting tapes, 2-15, 2-16 tape positioning, 2-64
support, 2-61, 4-45 unchaining tapes, 2-67
Migrating generation data sets, 5-26 Multiple
Mode catalogs, 2-58
assigning in TLBL, 2-46 installations, 2-58
control, 2-42, 2-44
example, 2-59
overriding, 2-46 N
setting, 2-42, 2-44
uncontrolled tape files, 2-46
Naming
unspecified, 2-46
disk data sets, 4-5, 6-37, 8-54, 8-56, 8-57
MODE multifile-volume data sets, 2-63
specifying, 2-42 sort key records, 8-61
tape data sets, 2-2, 8-54, 8-56, 8-57
Modification Aid (CAINTDK), 5-1
temporary disk data sets, 4-8
Modifying test jobs, 2-53
JCL, 2-5
NEWTAP response to MOUNT message, 2-16
retention characteristics, 2-10
NOLABEL option, 2-76
MOUNT message
examples, 2-17, 2-18, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 2- Non-standard files, tape cartridges, 2-46
22, 2-23
NOPLINE parameter, DYNCOPY program, 13-6
responses, 2-15, 2-16
NOREW parameter
Mounting tapes, 2-15
DYNCOPY program, 13-6
Option record
Panels
COMLUB, 4-28
AUDIT Data Set Browse Selection (AUDT-
CPUID, 2-50
1000), 11-2
DTLOCK, 2-13, 2-84
AUDIT Data Set Detail - DYNAM/T (AUDT-
DTPATH, 2-25
1910), 11-8
DTPOOL, 2-13, 2-84
AUDIT Data Set Detail - DYNAM/T (AUDT-
DYNAM/D, 4-10
1920), 11-9
DYNAM/T, 2-50, 2-73, 2-82, 2-84
AUDIT Data Set Detail - DYNAM/T (AUDT-
LOCK, 2-85
1A10), 11-11
Macros COMAVR, 4-32
AUDIT Data Set Directory - All Products
(AUDT-1100), 11-4
Index–13
AUDIT Data Set Directory – CA Dynam/T PF keys, system defaults, 7-1
(AUDT-1900), 11-6
Placing partition in WAIT state, 2-52
AUDIT Data Set Directory - DYNAM/T
(AUDT-1A00), 11-9 POFFLOAD tapes, controlling, 2-80
AUDIT Data Set Directory - DYNAM/T
Pools
(AUDT-1B00), 11-12
disk, 4-30
AUDIT Dataset Detail Panel- CA Dynam/FI
tape, 2-84
(AUDT-1B10), 11-14
Auxiliary Record Panel (CAYD-2140), 7-26 POWER Offload tapes, controlling, 2-80
Data Set Detail Panel (CAYD-2110), 7-15
Predefined reports (AUDTUTIL), 12-20
Data Set Directory Panel (CAYD-2100),
7-13 PREFIX option (TDYNLBL), 3-13
Data Set Disk Option Panel (CAYD-2120),
Pre-open file processing
7-22
for CA Dynam/D, 5-8
Data Set Option Panel (CAYD-2130), 7-24
for CA Dynam/T, 2-73
Data Set Selection Panel (CAYD-2000),
7-11 Preparing to use CA Dynam/T, 2-1
Data Sets on Volume Panel (CAYD-3120),
PREV response to MOUNT message, 2-16
7-50
DISK Version Detail Panel (CAYD-2180), Preventing early drive release, 2-38
7-34
PRINT parameter, DYNCOPY program, 13-4
Disk Version List Panel (CAYD-2150), 7-29
FI Version List Panel (CAYD-2170), 7-32 Printing tape labels, 3-12
File Management Panel (CAYD-0000), 7-9
Processing
Primary Selection (CUI-MENU), 11-1
equal file IDs, 4-45
Tape Directory Panel (CAYD-3100), 7-44
expired files (CA Dynam/D), 4-43
Tape Selection Panel (CAYD-3000), 7-40
FORTRAN tape files, 2-74
TAPE Version Detail Panel (CAYD-2190),
multifile-volume data sets, 2-65
7-37
retention and expiration date, 4-43
Tape Version List Panel (CAYD-2160), 7-31
the TLBL, 2-49
Tape Volume Detail Panel (CAYD-3110),
7-46 Production JCL, 2-53
Index–15
RESTORE command (DYNCAT), 8-43, 8-80, setting mode on, 2-46
12-4 using as output, 2-55
with established owner, 2-58
RESTORE command (DYNUTIL), 5-37
SCRATCH command (DYNCAT), 8-83, 12-4
RESTORE REORG command (DYNCAT), 8-41,
8-83, 12-4 Scratching
automatic multifile data set names, 2-71
Restore/Backup utility, VCKDBKRS, 6-48
data set versions, 2-10
Retention
SCRPOOL command (DYNCAT), 8-86
and expiration date processing, 4-43
characteristics SCRPOOL usage, 2-41
altering, 2-48
SCRTCH response to MOUNT message, 2-16,
data sets, 2-3
2-21
establishing, 2-8
modifying, 2-10 SD files
multifile-volume data sets, 2-63 deleting, 4-42
specifying, 2-32 releasing unused space, 4-40
work data sets, 2-48 truncating, 4-40
data set ownership, 2-58
Secondary disk space
options, 2-9
cross-volume allocation, 4-33
REW response to MOUNT message, 2-16, 2-19
SEL= parameter, DYNCOPY program, 13-3
Rewinding tapes, 2-16, 2-37
SELECT AUDITRECORDS command, 11-14
ROUTE option (TDYNLIST), 3-32
SELECT command (AUDTUTIL), 12-22
Routing output to console, 6-29
Selecting
RUN parameter input tapes, 2-2
DYNCOPY program, 13-5 logical units, 4-25
Index–17
scratch, 2-58 TDYNCOPY utility program
versions, 7-31, 7-37 JCL examples, 3-11
Label Generator (TDYNLBL), 3-12 options, 3-9, 3-10
listings
TDYNLBL utility program, 3-12
TDYNLIST, 3-31
TDYNPULL, 3-33 TDYNLIST utility program, 3-31
maintenance utilities
TDYNPULL utility program, 3-33
TDYNASN, 3-1
TDYNCLEN, 3-29 TDYNRST utility program, 3-14, 3-15
TDYNCOPY, 3-8
TDYNSYNC utility program
TDYNLBL, 3-12
commands, 3-18
TDYNLIST, 3-31
control statements, 3-18
TDYNPULL, 3-33
creating message paths, 3-16
TDYNRST, 3-14
initializing MACC queue files, 3-17
TDYNSYNC, 3-16
overview, 3-16
TDYNUTL, 3-38
reports, 3-23
TDYNVLT, 3-45
management, 2-1 TDYNUTL utility program
options, 2-34 commands, 3-39
positioning, multifile data sets, 2-64 functions, 3-38
POWER offload, 2-80 report fields, 3-43
recording density, 2-13, 2-42, 2-59 reports, 3-40
reel length, 2-39
TDYNVLT utility program
resources, 2-12
and DYNCAT, 3-47
return to SCRATCH status, 2-55
commands, 3-49
selection, 7-40
defining slots, 3-48
standard-labeled, 2-6
execution phases, 3-47
status
reports, 3-45, 3-51
display, 2-47
slots, 3-48
from TDYNCLEN, 3-31
updating the Catalog, 3-45
of unit, 2-15
volume Temporary data sets, 2-51, 4-8
defining, 7-46
TEST
displaying, 7-50
$TEST jobname, 2-53
information extract, 3-20
option (TDYNLBL), 3-13
ownership initialization, 2-58
status, 2-53
synchronization among catalogs, 3-16
updating, 3-19 Test program (DYNATEST), 10-18
Index–19
V automatic assignment, 4-24
enforcing standards, 2-82
for OPEN requests, 2-7
Vault generic, 4-33
Location Control program (TDYNVLT), 3-45 on tape labels, 3-12
locations, 3-46 specifying in TLBL, 2-33
movement, 3-45 switching with automatic multifile data
reporting, 3-45, 3-49 sets, 2-70
VAULT command (DYNCAT), 8-91 VSAM support for FI, 6-21
vault sequencing with VLTSEQ, 3-46 VTAPE support, 3-57, see IBM Virtual Tape
VCKD Support
activating, 6-44 VTAPFILC parameter
backup/restore, 6-48 DYNCAT ADD command, 8-16
clear disk utility, 6-50
disk file analyzer, 6-51 VTAPFILE parameter
FBA disk files DYNCAT ADD command, 8-16
allocating, 6-46, 6-51 VTAPLOC parameter
creating, 6-47 DYNCAT ADD command, 8-16
mapping, 6-44, 6-46
file parameters, 6-44 VTOC
record formats, 6-43 access to, 9-2
system restrictions, 6-44 command (DYNCAT), 8-93
display, 9-24
VCKDANAL utility program, 6-46, 6-51 index, 4-11
VCKDBKRS utility program, 6-47, 6-48 modification, 5-1
Modification program (CAINTDK), 5-1
VCKDCLDK utility program, 6-47, 6-50 report, 5-47
VERIFY command (TDYNVLT), 3-49, 3-51 VTOCAC, 9-2
Verifying tape ownership during AVR, 2-58 VTOCS report, 5-47
Version specification
in DLBL, 4-16
in TLBL, 2-32 W
versions, data set
specifying for VTAPE files, 3-56 Work files
and CA Dynam/T, 2-48
versions, VTAPE
example, 2-51
adding to the catalog, 3-56
restrictions, 4-5
Viewing CAIAUDIT records, 11-4 SORT, 4-46
VOL1/HDR1 labels, 2-13
Volser, 2-82 X
VOLSER, 3-12